12 Math

Class XII
Chapter 1 Relations and Functions Exercise 1.1
Maths
Question 1: Determine whether each of the following relations are reflexive, symmetric and transitive: (i)Relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 313, 14} defined as R = {(x, y): 3x y = 0} (ii) Relation R in the set N of natural numbers defined as R = {(x, y): y = x + 5 and x < 4} (iii) Relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} as R = {(x, y): y is divisible by x} (iv) Relation R in the set Z of all integers defined as R = {(x, y): x y is as integer} (v) Relation R in the set A of human beings in a town at a particular time given by (a) R = {(x, y): x and y work at the same place} (b) R = {(x, y): x and y live in the same locality} (c) R = {(x, y): x is exactly 7 cm taller than y} (d) R = {(x, y): x is wife of y} (e) R = {(x, y): x is father of y} Answer (i) A = {1, 2, 3 13, 14} R = {(x, y): 3x y = 0} R = {(1, 3), (2, 6), (3, 9), (4, 12)} R is not reflexive since (1, 1), (2, 2) (14, 14) R. Also, R is not symmetric as (1, 3) R, but (3, 1) R. [3(3) 1 0] Also, R is not transitive as (1, 3), (3, 9) R, but (1, 9) R. [3(1) 9 0] Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive. (ii) R = {(x, y): y = x + 5 and x < 4} = {(1, 6), (2, 7), (3, 8)} It is seen that (1, 1) R. R is not reflexive. (1, 6) R But, Page 1 of 68
Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com Mobile: 9999 249717
Head Office: 1/3-H-A-2, Street # 6, East Azad Nagar, Delhi-110051 (One Km from Welcome Metro Station)
Class XII (1, 6) R. R is not symmetric.
Chapter 1 Relations and Functions
Maths
Now, since there is no pair in R such that (x, y) and (y, z) R, then (x, z) cannot belong to R. R is not transitive. Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive. (iii) A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} R = {(x, y): y is divisible by x} We know that any number (x) is divisible by itself. (x, x) R R is reflexive. Now, (2, 4) R [as 4 is divisible by 2] But, (4, 2) R. [as 2 is not divisible by 4] R is not symmetric. Let (x, y), (y, z) R. Then, y is divisible by x and z is divisible by y. z is divisible by x. (x, z) R R is transitive. Hence, R is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric. (iv) R = {(x, y): x y is an integer} Now, for every x Z, (x, x) R as x x = 0 is an integer. R is reflexive. Now, for every x, y Z if (x, y) R, then x y is an integer. (x y) is also an integer. (y x) is an integer. (y, x) R R is symmetric. Now, Let (x, y) and (y, z) R, where x, y, z Z. (x y) and (y z) are integers. x z = (x y) + (y z) is an integer. Page 2 of 68
Class XII (x, z) R R is transitive.
Maths
Hence, R is reflexive, symmetric, and transitive. (v) (a) R = {(x, y): x and y work at the same place} (x, x) R R is reflexive. If (x, y) R, then x and y work at the same place. y and x work at the same place. (y, x) R. R is symmetric. Now, let (x, y), (y, z) R x and y work at the same place and y and z work at the same place. x and z work at the same place. (x, z) R R is transitive. Hence, R is reflexive, symmetric, and transitive. (b) R = {(x, y): x and y live in the same locality} Clearly (x, x) R as x and x is the same human being. R is reflexive. If (x, y) R, then x and y live in the same locality. y and x live in the same locality. (y, x) R R is symmetric. Now, let (x, y) R and (y, z) R. x and y live in the same locality and y and z live in the same locality. x and z live in the same locality. (x, z) R R is transitive. Hence, R is reflexive, symmetric, and transitive. (c) R = {(x, y): x is exactly 7 cm taller than y} Now, (x, x) R Since human being x cannot be taller than himself. Page 3 of 68
Class XII R is not reflexive. Now, let (x, y) R.
Maths
x is exactly 7 cm taller than y. Then, y is not taller than x. (y, x) R Indeed if x is exactly 7 cm taller than y, then y is exactly 7 cm shorter than x. R is not symmetric. Now, Let (x, y), (y, z) R. x is exactly 7 cm taller than y and y is exactly 7 cm taller than z. x is exactly 14 cm taller than z . (x, z) R R is not transitive. Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive. (d) R = {(x, y): x is the wife of y} Now, (x, x) R Since x cannot be the wife of herself. R is not reflexive. Now, let (x, y) R x is the wife of y. Clearly y is not the wife of x. (y, x) R Indeed if x is the wife of y, then y is the husband of x. R is not transitive. Let (x, y), (y, z) R x is the wife of y and y is the wife of z. This case is not possible. Also, this does not imply that x is the wife of z. (x, z) R R is not transitive. Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive. (e) R = {(x, y): x is the father of y} (x, x) R Page 4 of 68
Class XII
Maths
As x cannot be the father of himself. R is not reflexive. Now, let (x, y) R. x is the father of y. y cannot be the father of y. Indeed, y is the son or the daughter of y. (y, x) R R is not symmetric. Now, let (x, y) R and (y, z) R. x is the father of y and y is the father of z. x is not the father of z. Indeed x is the grandfather of z. (x, z) R R is not transitive. Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive.
Question 2: Show that the relation R in the set R of real numbers, defined as R = {(a, b): a b2} is neither reflexive nor symmetric nor transitive. Answer R = {(a, b): a b2}
It can be observed that R is not reflexive. Now, (1, 4) R as 1 < 42 But, 4 is not less than 12. (4, 1) R R is not symmetric. Now, (3, 2), (2, 1.5) R (as 3 < 22 = 4 and 2 < (1.5)2 = 2.25) But, 3 > (1.5)2 = 2.25
Page 5 of 68
Class XII (3, 1.5) R R is not transitive.
Maths
Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive.
Question 3: Check whether the relation R defined in the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} as R = {(a, b): b = a + 1} is reflexive, symmetric or transitive. Answer Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. A relation R is defined on set A as: R = {(a, b): b = a + 1} R = {(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 6)} We can find (a, a) R, where a A. For instance, (1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (4, 4), (5, 5), (6, 6) R R is not reflexive. It can be observed that (1, 2) R, but (2, 1) R. R is not symmetric. Now, (1, 2), (2, 3) R But, (1, 3) R R is not transitive Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive.
Question 4: Show that the relation R in R defined as R = {(a, b): a b}, is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric. Answer R = {(a, b); a b} Clearly (a, a) R as a = a. R is reflexive. Now, (2, 4) R (as 2 < 4) Page 6 of 68
Class XII
Maths
But, (4, 2) R as 4 is greater than 2. R is not symmetric. Now, let (a, b), (b, c) R. Then, a b and b c ac (a, c) R R is transitive. Hence,R is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric.
Question 5: Check whether the relation R in R defined as R = {(a, b): a b3} is reflexive, symmetric or transitive. Answer R = {(a, b): a b3}
It is observed that R is not reflexive. Now, (1, 2) R (as 1 < 23 = 8) But, (2, 1) R (as 23 > 1) R is not symmetric.
We have
But R is not transitive. Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive.
Page 7 of 68
Class XII Question 6:
Maths
Show that the relation R in the set {1, 2, 3} given by R = {(1, 2), (2, 1)} is symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive. Answer Let A = {1, 2, 3}. A relation R on A is defined as R = {(1, 2), (2, 1)}. It is seen that (1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3) R. R is not reflexive. Now, as (1, 2) R and (2, 1) R, then R is symmetric. Now, (1, 2) and (2, 1) R However, (1, 1) R R is not transitive. Hence, R is symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive.
Question 7: Show that the relation R in the set A of all the books in a library of a college, given by R = {(x, y): x and y have same number of pages} is an equivalence relation. Answer Set A is the set of all books in the library of a college. R = {x, y): x and y have the same number of pages} Now, R is reflexive since (x, x) R as x and x has the same number of pages. Let (x, y) R x and y have the same number of pages. y and x have the same number of pages. (y, x) R R is symmetric. Now, let (x, y) R and (y, z) R. x and y and have the same number of pages and y and z have the same number of pages. x and z have the same number of pages. (x, z) R R is transitive. Hence, R is an equivalence relation. Page 8 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Question 8: Show that the relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} given by , is an equivalence relation. Show that all the elements of {1, 3, 5} are related to each other and all the elements of {2, 4} are related to each other. But no element of {1, 3, 5} is related to any element of 2, 4}. Answer A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
It is clear that for any element a A, we have R is reflexive. Let (a, b) R.
(which is even).
R is symmetric. Now, let (a, b) R and (b, c) R.
(a, c) R R is transitive. Hence, R is an equivalence relation. Now, all elements of the set {1, 2, 3} are related to each other as all the elements of this subset are odd. Thus, the modulus of the difference between any two elements will be even. Similarly, all elements of the set {2, 4} are related to each other as all the elements of this subset are even.
Page 9 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Also, no element of the subset {1, 3, 5} can be related to any element of {2, 4} as all elements of {1, 3, 5} are odd and all elements of {2, 4} are even. Thus, the modulus of the difference between the two elements (from each of these two subsets) will not be even.
Question 9: Show that each of the relation R in the set (i) (ii) is an equivalence relation. Find the set of all elements related to 1 in each case. Answer , given by
(i) For any element a A, we have (a, a) R as R is reflexive. Now, let (a, b) R is a multiple of 4. is a multiple of 4.
(b, a) R R is symmetric. Now, let (a, b), (b, c) R.
(a, c) R R is transitive. Hence, R is an equivalence relation. The set of elements related to 1 is {1, 5, 9} since Page 10 of 68
Class XII
Maths
(ii) R = {(a, b): a = b} For any element a A, we have (a, a) R, since a = a. R is reflexive. Now, let (a, b) R. a=b b=a (b, a) R R is symmetric. Now, let (a, b) R and (b, c) R. a = b and b = c a=c (a, c) R R is transitive. Hence, R is an equivalence relation. The elements in R that are related to 1 will be those elements from set A which are equal to 1. Hence, the set of elements related to 1 is {1}.
Question 10: Given an example of a relation. Which is (i) Symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive. (ii) Transitive but neither reflexive nor symmetric. (iii) Reflexive and symmetric but not transitive. (iv) Reflexive and transitive but not symmetric. (v) Symmetric and transitive but not reflexive. Answer (i) Let A = {5, 6, 7}. Define a relation R on A as R = {(5, 6), (6, 5)}. Relation R is not reflexive as (5, 5), (6, 6), (7, 7) R.
Page 11 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Now, as (5, 6) R and also (6, 5) R, R is symmetric. (5, 6), (6, 5) R, but (5, 5) R R is not transitive. Hence, relation R is symmetric but not reflexive or transitive. (ii)Consider a relation R in R defined as: R = {(a, b): a < b} For any a R, we have (a, a) R since a cannot be strictly less than a itself. In fact, a = a. R is not reflexive. Now, (1, 2) R (as 1 < 2) But, 2 is not less than 1. (2, 1) R R is not symmetric. Now, let (a, b), (b, c) R. a < b and b < c a<c (a, c) R R is transitive. Hence, relation R is transitive but not reflexive and symmetric. (iii)Let A = {4, 6, 8}. Define a relation R on A as: A = {(4, 4), (6, 6), (8, 8), (4, 6), (6, 4), (6, 8), (8, 6)} Relation R is reflexive since for every a A, (a, a) R i.e., (4, 4), (6, 6), (8, 8)} R. Relation R is symmetric since (a, b) R (b, a) R for all a, b R. Relation R is not transitive since (4, 6), (6, 8) R, but (4, 8) R. Hence, relation R is reflexive and symmetric but not transitive. (iv) Define a relation R in R as: R = {a, b): a3 b3} Clearly (a, a) R as a3 = a3. R is reflexive. Now, (2, 1) R (as 23 13) Page 12 of 68
Class XII But, (1, 2) R (as 13 < 23) R is not symmetric. Now, Let (a, b), (b, c) R. a3 b3 and b3 c3 a3 c 3 (a, c) R R is transitive.
Maths
Hence, relation R is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric. (v) Let A = {5, 6}. Define a relation R on A as: R = {(5, 6), (6, 5), (5, 5)} Relation R is not reflexive as (6, 6) R. Relation R is symmetric as (5, 6) R and (6, 5}R. It is seen that (5, 6), (6, 5) R. Also, (5, 5) R. The relation R is transitive. Hence, relation R is symmetric and transitive but not reflexive.
Question 11: Show that the relation R in the set A of points in a plane given by R = {(P, Q): distance of the point P from the origin is same as the distance of the point Q from the origin}, is an equivalence relation. Further, show that the set of all point related to a point P (0, 0) is the circle passing through P with origin as centre. Answer R = {(P, Q): distance of point P from the origin is the same as the distance of point Q from the origin} Clearly, (P, P) R since the distance of point P from the origin is always the same as the distance of the same point P from the origin. R is reflexive. Now, Let (P, Q) R.
Page 13 of 68
Class XII
Maths
The distance of point P from the origin is the same as the distance of point Q from the origin. The distance of point Q from the origin is the same as the distance of point P from the origin. (Q, P) R R is symmetric. Now, Let (P, Q), (Q, S) R. The distance of points P and Q from the origin is the same and also, the distance of points Q and S from the origin is the same. The distance of points P and S from the origin is the same. (P, S) R R is transitive. Therefore, R is an equivalence relation. The set of all points related to P (0, 0) will be those points whose distance from the origin is the same as the distance of point P from the origin. In other words, if O (0, 0) is the origin and OP = k, then the set of all points related to P is at a distance of k from the origin. Hence, this set of points forms a circle with the centre as the origin and this circle passes through point P.
Question 12: Show that the relation R defined in the set A of all triangles as R = {(T1, T2): T1 is similar to T2}, is equivalence relation. Consider three right angle triangles T1 with sides 3, 4, 5, T2 with sides 5, 12, 13 and T3 with sides 6, 8, 10. Which triangles among T1, T2 and T3 are related? Answer R = {(T1, T2): T1 is similar to T2} R is reflexive since every triangle is similar to itself. Further, if (T1, T2) R, then T1 is similar to T2. T2 is similar to T1. (T2, T1) R R is symmetric. Page 14 of 68
Class XII Now, Let (T1, T2), (T2, T3) R.
Maths
T1 is similar to T2 and T2 is similar to T3. T1 is similar to T3. (T1, T3) R R is transitive. Thus, R is an equivalence relation. Now, we can observe that:
The corresponding sides of triangles T1 and T3 are in the same ratio. Then, triangle T1 is similar to triangle T3. Hence, T1 is related to T3.
Question 13: Show that the relation R defined in the set A of all polygons as R = {(P1, P2): P1 and P2 have same number of sides}, is an equivalence relation. What is the set of all elements in A related to the right angle triangle T with sides 3, 4 and 5? Answer R = {(P1, P2): P1 and P2 have same the number of sides} R is reflexive since (P1, P1) R as the same polygon has the same number of sides with itself. Let (P1, P2) R. P1 and P2 have the same number of sides. P2 and P1 have the same number of sides. (P2, P1) R R is symmetric. Now, Let (P1, P2), (P2, P3) R. P1 and P2 have the same number of sides. Also, P2 and P3 have the same number of sides. P1 and P3 have the same number of sides. (P1, P3) R Page 15 of 68
Class XII R is transitive.
Maths
Hence, R is an equivalence relation. The elements in A related to the right-angled triangle (T) with sides 3, 4, and 5 are those polygons which have 3 sides (since T is a polygon with 3 sides). Hence, the set of all elements in A related to triangle T is the set of all triangles.
Question 14: Let L be the set of all lines in XY plane and R be the relation in L defined as R = {(L1, L2): L1 is parallel to L2}. Show that R is an equivalence relation. Find the set of all lines related to the line y = 2x + 4. Answer R = {(L1, L2): L1 is parallel to L2} R is reflexive as any line L1 is parallel to itself i.e., (L1, L1) R. Now, Let (L1, L2) R. L1 is parallel to L2. L2 is parallel to L1. (L2, L1) R R is symmetric. Now, Let (L1, L2), (L2, L3) R. L1 is parallel to L2. Also, L2 is parallel to L3. L1 is parallel to L3. R is transitive. Hence, R is an equivalence relation. The set of all lines related to the line y = 2x + 4 is the set of all lines that are parallel to the line y = 2x + 4. Slope of line y = 2x + 4 is m = 2 It is known that parallel lines have the same slopes. The line parallel to the given line is of the form y = 2x + c, where c R. Hence, the set of all lines related to the given line is given by y = 2x + c, where c R.
Page 16 of 68
Maths
Let R be the relation in the set {1, 2, 3, 4} given by R = {(1, 2), (2, 2), (1, 1), (4, 4), (1, 3), (3, 3), (3, 2)}. Choose the correct answer. (A) R is reflexive and symmetric but not transitive. (B) R is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric. (C) R is symmetric and transitive but not reflexive. (D) R is an equivalence relation. Answer R = {(1, 2), (2, 2), (1, 1), (4, 4), (1, 3), (3, 3), (3, 2)} It is seen that (a, a) R, for every a {1, 2, 3, 4}. R is reflexive. It is seen that (1, 2) R, but (2, 1) R. R is not symmetric. Also, it is observed that (a, b), (b, c) R (a, c) R for all a, b, c {1, 2, 3, 4}. R is transitive. Hence, R is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric. The correct answer is B.
Question 16: Let R be the relation in the set N given by R = {(a, b): a = b 2, b > 6}. Choose the correct answer. (A) (2, 4) R (B) (3, 8) R (C) (6, 8) R (D) (8, 7) R Answer R = {(a, b): a = b 2, b > 6} Now, since b > 6, (2, 4) R Also, as 3 8 2, (3, 8) R And, as 8 7 2 (8, 7) R Now, consider (6, 8). We have 8 > 6 and also, 6 = 8 2. (6, 8) R The correct answer is C.
Page 17 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Show that the function f: R* R* defined by
is one-one and onto, where R* is
the set of all non-zero real numbers. Is the result true, if the domain R* is replaced by N with co-domain being same as R*? Answer
It is given that f: R* R* is defined by One-one:
f is one-one. Onto:
It is clear that for y R*, there exists
such that
f is onto. Thus, the given function (f) is one-one and onto. Now, consider function g: N R*defined by
We have,
g is one-one.
Page 18 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Further, it is clear that g is not onto as for 1.2 R* there does not exit any x in N such
that g(x) =
Hence, function g is one-one but not onto.
Question 2: Check the injectivity and surjectivity of the following functions: (i) f: N N given by f(x) = x2 (ii) f: Z Z given by f(x) = x2 (iii) f: R R given by f(x) = x2 (iv) f: N N given by f(x) = x3 (v) f: Z Z given by f(x) = x3 Answer (i) f: N N is given by, f(x) = x2 It is seen that for x, y N, f(x) = f(y) x2 = y2 x = y. f is injective. Now, 2 N. But, there does not exist any x in N such that f(x) = x2 = 2. f is not surjective. Hence, function f is injective but not surjective. (ii) f: Z Z is given by, f(x) = x2 It is seen that f(1) = f(1) = 1, but 1 1. f is not injective. Now,2 Z. But, there does not exist any element x Z such that f(x) = x2 = 2. f is not surjective. Hence, function f is neither injective nor surjective. (iii) f: R R is given by, f(x) = x2 It is seen that f(1) = f(1) = 1, but 1 1. f is not injective. Now,2 R. But, there does not exist any element x R such that f(x) = x2 = 2. Page 19 of 68
Class XII f is not surjective.
Maths
Hence, function f is neither injective nor surjective. (iv) f: N N given by, f(x) = x3 It is seen that for x, y N, f(x) = f(y) x3 = y3 x = y. f is injective. Now, 2 N. But, there does not exist any element x in domain N such that f(x) = x3 = 2. f is not surjective Hence, function f is injective but not surjective. (v) f: Z Z is given by, f(x) = x3 It is seen that for x, y Z, f(x) = f(y) x3 = y3 x = y. f is injective. Now, 2 Z. But, there does not exist any element x in domain Z such that f(x) = x3 = 2. f is not surjective. Hence, function f is injective but not surjective.
Question 3: Prove that the Greatest Integer Function f: R R given by f(x) = [x], is neither oneonce nor onto, where [x] denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to x. Answer f: R R is given by, f(x) = [x] It is seen that f(1.2) = [1.2] = 1, f(1.9) = [1.9] = 1. f(1.2) = f(1.9), but 1.2 1.9. f is not one-one. Now, consider 0.7 R. It is known that f(x) = [x] is always an integer. Thus, there does not exist any element x R such that f(x) = 0.7. f is not onto. Hence, the greatest integer function is neither one-one nor onto.
Page 20 of 68
Maths
Show that the Modulus Function f: R R given by onto, where Answer f: R R is given by, is x, if x is positive or 0 and
, is neither one-one nor
is x, if x is negative.
It is seen that f(1) = f(1), but 1 1. f is not one-one. Now, consider 1 R. It is known that f(x) =
is always non-negative. Thus, there does not exist any = 1.
element x in domain R such that f(x) = f is not onto.
Hence, the modulus function is neither one-one nor onto.
Question 5: Show that the Signum Function f: R R, given by
is neither one-one nor onto. Answer f: R R is given by,
It is seen that f(1) = f(2) = 1, but 1 2. f is not one-one. Page 21 of 68

Class XII
Maths
Now, as f(x) takes only 3 values (1, 0, or 1) for the element 2 in co-domain R, there does not exist any x in domain R such that f(x) = 2. f is not onto. Hence, the signum function is neither one-one nor onto.
Question 6: Let A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {4, 5, 6, 7} and let f = {(1, 4), (2, 5), (3, 6)} be a function from A to B. Show that f is one-one. Answer It is given that A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {4, 5, 6, 7}. f: A B is defined as f = {(1, 4), (2, 5), (3, 6)}. f (1) = 4, f (2) = 5, f (3) = 6 It is seen that the images of distinct elements of A under f are distinct. Hence, function f is one-one.
Question 7: In each of the following cases, state whether the function is one-one, onto or bijective. Justify your answer. (i) f: R R defined by f(x) = 3 4x (ii) f: R R defined by f(x) = 1 + x2 Answer (i) f: R R is defined as f(x) = 3 4x. .
f is one-one.
For any real number (y) in R, there exists
in R such that
f is onto. Page 22 of 68
Class XII Hence, f is bijective. (ii) f: R R is defined as .
Maths
For instance,
does not imply that
f is not one-one. Consider an element 2 in co-domain R. It is seen that is positive for all x R.
Thus, there does not exist any x in domain R such that f(x) = 2. f is not onto. Hence, f is neither one-one nor onto.
Question 8: Let A and B be sets. Show that f: A B B A such that (a, b) = (b, a) is bijective function. Answer f: A B B A is defined as f(a, b) = (b, a). .
f is one-one. Now, let (b, a) B A be any element. Then, there exists (a, b) A B such that f(a, b) = (b, a). [By definition of f] Page 23 of 68
Class XII f is onto. Hence, f is bijective.
Maths
Question 9:
Let f: N N be defined by State whether the function f is bijective. Justify your answer. Answer
f: N N is defined as It can be observed that:
f is not one-one. Consider a natural number (n) in co-domain N. Case I: n is odd n = 2r + 1 for some r N. Then, there exists 4r + 1N such that
. Case II: n is even
n = 2r for some r N. Then,there exists 4r N such that f is onto. Hence, f is not a bijective function.
Question 10: Let A = R {3} and B = R {1}. Consider the function f: A B defined by Page 24 of 68
Class XII
Maths
. Is f one-one and onto? Justify your answer. Answer A = R {3}, B = R {1}
f: A B is defined as .
f is one-one. Let y B = R {1}. Then, y 1. The function f is onto if there exists x A such that f(x) = y. Now,
Thus, for any y B, there exists
such that
Page 25 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Hence, function f is one-one and onto.
Question 11: Let f: R R be defined as f(x) = x4. Choose the correct answer. (A) f is one-one onto (B) f is many-one onto (C) f is one-one but not onto (D) f is neither one-one nor onto Answer f: R R is defined as Let x, y R such that f(x) = f(y).
For instance,
does not imply that
f is not one-one. Consider an element 2 in co-domain R. It is clear that there does not exist any x in domain R such that f(x) = 2. f is not onto. Hence, function f is neither one-one nor onto. The correct answer is D.
Question 12: Let f: R R be defined as f(x) = 3x. Choose the correct answer. (A) f is one-one onto (B) f is many-one onto (C) f is one-one but not onto (D) f is neither one-one nor onto Answer Page 26 of 68
Class XII
Maths
f: R R is defined as f(x) = 3x. Let x, y R such that f(x) = f(y). 3x = 3y x=y f is one-one. Also, for any real number (y) in co-domain R, there exists in R such that
. f is onto. Hence, function f is one-one and onto. The correct answer is A.
Page 27 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Let f: {1, 3, 4} {1, 2, 5} and g: {1, 2, 5} {1, 3} be given by f = {(1, 2), (3, 5), (4, 1)} and g = {(1, 3), (2, 3), (5, 1)}. Write down gof. Answer The functions f: {1, 3, 4} {1, 2, 5} and g: {1, 2, 5} {1, 3} are defined as f = {(1, 2), (3, 5), (4, 1)} and g = {(1, 3), (2, 3), (5, 1)}.
Question 2: Let f, g and h be functions from R to R. Show that
Answer To prove:
Page 28 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Question 3: Find gof and fog, if (i)
(ii) Answer (i)
(ii)
Question 4:
Page 29 of 68
Class XII
Maths
If Answer
, show that f o f(x) = x, for all
. What is the inverse of f?
It is given that
Hence, the given function f is invertible and the inverse of f is f itself.
Question 5: State with reason whether following functions have inverse (i) f: {1, 2, 3, 4} {10} with f = {(1, 10), (2, 10), (3, 10), (4, 10)} (ii) g: {5, 6, 7, 8} {1, 2, 3, 4} with g = {(5, 4), (6, 3), (7, 4), (8, 2)} (iii) h: {2, 3, 4, 5} {7, 9, 11, 13} with h = {(2, 7), (3, 9), (4, 11), (5, 13)} Answer (i) f: {1, 2, 3, 4} {10}defined as: f = {(1, 10), (2, 10), (3, 10), (4, 10)} From the given definition of f, we can see that f is a many one function as: f(1) = f(2) = f(3) = f(4) = 10 f is not one-one. Hence, function f does not have an inverse. (ii) g: {5, 6, 7, 8} {1, 2, 3, 4} defined as:
Page 30 of 68
Class XII
Maths
g = {(5, 4), (6, 3), (7, 4), (8, 2)} From the given definition of g, it is seen that g is a many one function as: g(5) = g(7) = 4. g is not one-one, Hence, function g does not have an inverse. (iii) h: {2, 3, 4, 5} {7, 9, 11, 13} defined as: h = {(2, 7), (3, 9), (4, 11), (5, 13)} It is seen that all distinct elements of the set {2, 3, 4, 5} have distinct images under h. Function h is one-one. Also, h is onto since for every element y of the set {7, 9, 11, 13}, there exists an element x in the set {2, 3, 4, 5}such that h(x) = y. Thus, h is a one-one and onto function. Hence, h has an inverse.
Question 6:
Show that f: [1, 1] R, given by function f: [1, 1] Range f.
is one-one. Find the inverse of the
(Hint: For y Range f, y = Answer
, for some x in [1, 1], i.e.,
f: [1, 1] R is given as Let f(x) = f(y).
f is a one-one function. It is clear that f: [1, 1] Range f is onto. f: [1, 1] Range f is one-one and onto and therefore, the inverse of the function:
Page 31 of 68
Class XII
Maths
f: [1, 1] Range f exists. Let g: Range f [1, 1] be the inverse of f. Let y be an arbitrary element of range f. Since f: [1, 1] Range f is onto, we have:
Now, let us define g: Range f [1, 1] as
gof = f1 = g
and fog =
Question 7: Consider f: R R given by f(x) = 4x + 3. Show that f is invertible. Find the inverse of f. Answer f: R R is given by, f(x) = 4x + 3 One-one: Page 32 of 68
Class XII Let f(x) = f(y).
Maths
f is a one-one function. Onto: For y R, let y = 4x + 3.
Therefore, for any y R, there exists
such that
f is onto. Thus, f is one-one and onto and therefore, f1 exists.
Let us define g: R R by
Hence, f is invertible and the inverse of f is given by
Question 8: Consider f: R+ [4, ) given by f(x) = x2 + 4. Show that f is invertible with the inverse f1 of given f by Answer f: R+ [4, ) is given as f(x) = x2 + 4. Page 33 of 68
, where R+ is the set of all non-negative real numbers.
Class XII One-one: Let f(x) = f(y).
Maths
f is a one-one function. Onto: For y [4, ), let y = x2 + 4.
such that
. f is onto. Thus, f is one-one and onto and therefore, f1 exists. Let us define g: [4, ) R+ by,
Question 21: Find the values of is equal to
(A) (B) Answer
(C) 0 (D)
Page 34 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Let
. Then,
We know that the range of the principal value branch of
Let
The range of the principal value branch of
The correct answer is B.
Question 9: Consider f: R+ [5, ) given by f(x) = 9x2 + 6x 5. Show that f is invertible with
. Answer f: R+ [5, ) is given as f(x) = 9x2 + 6x 5. Let y be an arbitrary element of [5, ). Let y = 9x2 + 6x 5.
Page 35 of 68
Class XII
Maths
f is onto, thereby range f = [5, ).
Let us define g: [5, ) R+ as We now have:
and
Question 10: Let f: X Y be an invertible function. Show that f has unique inverse. (Hint: suppose g1 and g2 are two inverses of f. Then for all y Y, fog1(y) = IY(y) = fog2(y). Use one-one ness of f). Answer Let f: X Y be an invertible function. Also, suppose f has two inverses (say Then, for all y Y, we have:
).
Page 36 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Hence, f has a unique inverse.
Question 11: Consider f: {1, 2, 3} {a, b, c} given by f(1) = a, f(2) = b and f(3) = c. Find f1 and show that (f1)1 = f. Answer Function f: {1, 2, 3} {a, b, c} is given by, f(1) = a, f(2) = b, and f(3) = c If we define g: {a, b, c} {1, 2, 3} as g(a) = 1, g(b) = 2, g(c) = 3, then we have:
and
, where X = {1, 2, 3} and Y= {a, b, c}.
Thus, the inverse of f exists and f1 = g. f1: {a, b, c} {1, 2, 3} is given by, f1(a) = 1, f1(b) = 2, f-1(c) = 3 Let us now find the inverse of f1 i.e., find the inverse of g. If we define h: {1, 2, 3} {a, b, c} as h(1) = a, h(2) = b, h(3) = c, then we have:
Page 37 of 68
Class XII
Maths
, where X = {1, 2, 3} and Y = {a, b, c}.
Thus, the inverse of g exists and g1 = h (f1)1 = h. It can be noted that h = f. Hence, (f1)1 = f.
Question 12: Let f: X Y be an invertible function. Show that the inverse of f1 is f, i.e., (f1)1 = f. Answer Let f: X Y be an invertible function. Then, there exists a function g: Y X such that gof = IXand fog = IY. Here, f1 = g. Now, gof = IXand fog = IY f1of = IXand fof1= IY Hence, f1: Y X is invertible and f is the inverse of f1 i.e., (f1)1 = f.
Question 13:
If f: R R be given by
, then fof(x) is
(A) Answer
(B) x3 (C) x (D) (3 x3)
Page 38 of 68
Class XII
Maths
f: R R is given as
The correct answer is C.
Question 14:
Let
be a function defined as
. The inverse of f is map g:
Range
(A)
(B)
(C) Answer
(D)
It is given that Let y be an arbitrary element of Range f.
Then, there exists x
such that
Let us define g: Range
as
Page 39 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Now,
Thus, g is the inverse of f i.e., f1 = g.
Hence, the inverse of f is the map g: Range
, which is given by
Page 40 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Determine whether or not each of the definition of given below gives a binary operation. In the event that * is not a binary operation, give justification for this. (i) On Z+, define * by a * b = a b (ii) On Z+, define * by a * b = ab (iii) On R, define * by a * b = ab2 (iv) On Z+, define * by a * b = |a b| (v) On Z+, define * by a * b = a Answer (i) On Z+, * is defined by a * b = a b. It is not a binary operation as the image of (1, 2) under * is 1 * 2 = 1 2 = 1 Z+. (ii) On Z+, * is defined by a * b = ab. It is seen that for each a, b Z+, there is a unique element ab in Z+. This means that * carries each pair (a, b) to a unique element a * b = ab in Z+. Therefore, * is a binary operation. (iii) On R, * is defined by a * b = ab2. It is seen that for each a, b R, there is a unique element ab2 in R. This means that * carries each pair (a, b) to a unique element a * b = ab2 in R. Therefore, * is a binary operation. (iv) On Z+, * is defined by a * b = |a b|. It is seen that for each a, b Z+, there is a unique element |a b| in Z+. This means that * carries each pair (a, b) to a unique element a * b = |a b| in Z+. Therefore, * is a binary operation. (v) On Z+, * is defined by a * b = a. * carries each pair (a, b) to a unique element a * b = a in Z+. Therefore, * is a binary operation.
Page 41 of 68
Maths
For each binary operation * defined below, determine whether * is commutative or associative. (i) On Z, define a * b = a b (ii) On Q, define a * b = ab + 1
(iii) On Q, define a * b (iv) On Z+, define a * b = 2ab (v) On Z+, define a * b = ab
(vi) On R {1}, define Answer (i) On Z, * is defined by a * b = a b. It can be observed that 1 * 2 = 1 2 = 1 and 2 * 1 = 2 1 = 1. 1 * 2 2 * 1; where 1, 2 Z Hence, the operation * is not commutative. Also we have: (1 * 2) * 3 = (1 2) * 3 = 1 * 3 = 1 3 = 4 1 * (2 * 3) = 1 * (2 3) = 1 * 1 = 1 (1) = 2 (1 * 2) * 3 1 * (2 * 3) ; where 1, 2, 3 Z Hence, the operation * is not associative. (ii) On Q, * is defined by a * b = ab + 1. It is known that: ab = ba a, b Q ab + 1 = ba + 1 a, b Q a * b = a * b a, b Q Therefore, the operation * is commutative. It can be observed that: (1 * 2) * 3 = (1 2 + 1) * 3 = 3 * 3 = 3 3 + 1 = 10 1 * (2 * 3) = 1 * (2 3 + 1) = 1 * 7 = 1 7 + 1 = 8 (1 * 2) * 3 1 * (2 * 3) ; where 1, 2, 3 Q Therefore, the operation * is not associative.
Page 42 of 68
Class XII
Maths
(iii) On Q, * is defined by a * b It is known that: ab = ba a, b Q
a, b Q
a * b = b * a a, b Q Therefore, the operation * is commutative. For all a, b, c Q, we have:
Therefore, the operation * is associative. (iv) On Z+, * is defined by a * b = 2ab. It is known that: ab = ba a, b Z+ 2ab = 2ba a, b Z+ a * b = b * a a, b Z+ Therefore, the operation * is commutative. It can be observed that:
(1 * 2) * 3 1 * (2 * 3) ; where 1, 2, 3 Z+ Therefore, the operation * is not associative. (v) On Z+, * is defined by a * b = ab. It can be observed that: and Page 43 of 68
Class XII
Maths
1 * 2 2 * 1 ; where 1, 2 Z+ Therefore, the operation * is not commutative. It can also be observed that:
(2 * 3) * 4 2 * (3 * 4) ; where 2, 3, 4 Z+ Therefore, the operation * is not associative.
(vi) On R, * {1} is defined by
It can be observed that
and
1 * 2 2 * 1 ; where 1, 2 R {1} Therefore, the operation * is not commutative. It can also be observed that:
(1 * 2) * 3 1 * (2 * 3) ; where 1, 2, 3 R {1} Therefore, the operation * is not associative.
Question 3: Consider the binary operation on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} defined by a b = min {a, b}. Write the operation table of the operation. Answer The binary operation on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} is defined as a b = min {a, b} a, b {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}. Thus, the operation table for the given operation can be given as: 1 2 3 4 5
Page 44 of 68
Class XII 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 2 3 4 5
Maths
Question 4: Consider a binary operation * on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} given by the following multiplication table. (i) Compute (2 * 3) * 4 and 2 * (3 * 4) (ii) Is * commutative? (iii) Compute (2 * 3) * (4 * 5). (Hint: use the following table) * 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 1 1 1 5
Answer (i) (2 * 3) * 4 = 1 * 4 = 1 2 * (3 * 4) = 2 * 1 = 1 (ii) For every a, b {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, we have a * b = b * a. Therefore, the operation * is commutative. (iii) (2 * 3) = 1 and (4 * 5) = 1
Page 45 of 68
Class XII
Maths
(2 * 3) * (4 * 5) = 1 * 1 = 1
Question 5: Let* be the binary operation on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} defined by a * b = H.C.F. of a and b. Is the operation * same as the operation * defined in Exercise 4 above? Justify your answer. Answer The binary operation * on the set {1, 2, 3 4, 5} is defined as a * b = H.C.F of a and b. The operation table for the operation * can be given as: * 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 1 1 1 5
We observe that the operation tables for the operations * and * are the same. Thus, the operation * is same as the operation*.
Question 6: Let * be the binary operation on N given by a * b = L.C.M. of a and b. Find (i) 5 * 7, 20 * 16 (ii) Is * commutative? (iii) Is * associative? (iv) Find the identity of * in N (v) Which elements of N are invertible for the operation *? Answer The binary operation * on N is defined as a * b = L.C.M. of a and b. (i) 5 * 7 = L.C.M. of 5 and 7 = 35 20 * 16 = L.C.M of 20 and 16 = 80 (ii) It is known that: L.C.M of a and b = L.C.M of b and a a, b N. Page 46 of 68
Class XII a * b = b * a
Maths
Thus, the operation * is commutative. (iii) For a, b, c N, we have: (a * b) * c = (L.C.M of a and b) * c = LCM of a, b, and c a * (b * c) = a * (LCM of b and c) = L.C.M of a, b, and c (a * b) * c = a * (b * c) Thus, the operation * is associative. (iv) It is known that: L.C.M. of a and 1 = a = L.C.M. 1 and a a N a*1=a=1*aaN Thus, 1 is the identity of * in N. (v) An element a in N is invertible with respect to the operation * if there exists an element b in N, such that a * b = e = b * a. Here, e = 1 This means that: L.C.M of a and b = 1 = L.C.M of b and a This case is possible only when a and b are equal to 1. Thus, 1 is the only invertible element of N with respect to the operation *.
Question 7: Is * defined on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} by a * b = L.C.M. of a and b a binary operation? Justify your answer. Answer The operation * on the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} is defined as a * b = L.C.M. of a and b. Then, the operation table for the given operation * can be given as: * 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 4 4 12 5 5 10 15
Page 47 of 68
Class XII 4 5 4 5 4 10 12 15 4 20 20 5
Maths
It can be observed from the obtained table that: 3 * 2 = 2 * 3 = 6 A, 5 * 2 = 2 * 5 = 10 A, 3 * 4 = 4 * 3 = 12 A 3 * 5 = 5 * 3 = 15 A, 4 * 5 = 5 * 4 = 20 A Hence, the given operation * is not a binary operation.
Question 8: Let * be the binary operation on N defined by a * b = H.C.F. of a and b. Is * commutative? Is * associative? Does there exist identity for this binary operation on N? Answer The binary operation * on N is defined as: a * b = H.C.F. of a and b It is known that: H.C.F. of a and b = H.C.F. of b and a a, b N. a * b = b * a Thus, the operation * is commutative. For a, b, c N, we have: (a * b)* c = (H.C.F. of a and b) * c = H.C.F. of a, b, and c a *(b * c)= a *(H.C.F. of b and c) = H.C.F. of a, b, and c (a * b) * c = a * (b * c) Thus, the operation * is associative. Now, an element e N will be the identity for the operation * if a * e = a = e* a N. But this relation is not true for any a N. Thus, the operation * does not have any identity in N. a
Question 9: Let * be a binary operation on the set Q of rational numbers as follows: (i) a * b = a b (ii) a * b = a2 + b2 (iii) a * b = a + ab (iv) a * b = (a b)2
Page 48 of 68
Class XII
Maths
(v)
(vi) a * b = ab2
Find which of the binary operations are commutative and which are associative. Answer (i) On Q, the operation * is defined as a * b = a b. It can be observed that:
and
; where
Thus, the operation * is not commutative. It can also be observed that:
Thus, the operation * is not associative. (ii) On Q, the operation * is defined as a * b = a2 + b2. For a, b Q, we have:
a * b = b * a Thus, the operation * is commutative. It can be observed that:
Thus, ,the operation * is not associative. (iii) On Q, the operation * is defined as a * b = a + ab. Page 49 of 68
Class XII It can be observed that:
Maths
Thus, the operation * is not associative. (iv) On Q, the operation * is defined by a * b = (a b)2. For a, b Q, we have: a * b = (a b)2 b * a = (b a)2 = [ (a b)]2 = (a b)2 a*b=b*a Thus, the operation * is commutative. It can be observed that:
Thus, the operation * is not associative.
(v) On Q, the operation * is defined as For a, b Q, we have:
a*b=b*a Thus, the operation * is commutative. Page 50 of 68

Class XII For a, b, c Q, we have:
Maths
(a * b) * c = a * (b * c) Thus, the operation * is associative. (vi) On Q, the operation * is defined as a * b = ab2 It can be observed that:
Thus, the operation * is not associative. Hence, the operations defined in (ii), (iv), (v) are commutative and the operation defined in (v) is associative.
Page 51 of 68
Maths
Find which of the operations given above has identity. Answer An element e Q will be the identity element for the operation * if a * e = a = e * a, a Q.
However, there is no such element e Q with respect to each of the six operations satisfying the above condition. Thus, none of the six operations has identity.
Question 11: Let A = N N and * be the binary operation on A defined by (a, b) * (c, d) = (a + c, b + d) Show that * is commutative and associative. Find the identity element for * on A, if any. Answer A=NN * is a binary operation on A and is defined by: (a, b) * (c, d) = (a + c, b + d) Let (a, b), (c, d) A Then, a, b, c, d N We have: (a, b) * (c, d) = (a + c, b + d) (c, d) * (a, b) = (c + a, d + b) = (a + c, b + d) [Addition is commutative in the set of natural numbers] (a, b) * (c, d) = (c, d) * (a, b) Therefore, the operation * is commutative. Now, let (a, b), (c, d), (e, f) A Then, a, b, c, d, e, f N We have:
Page 52 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the operation * is associative. An element will be an identity element for the operation * if , i.e., not true for any element in A. Therefore, the operation * does not have any identity element. which is
Question 12: State whether the following statements are true or false. Justify. (i) For an arbitrary binary operation * on a set N, a * a = a a * N.
(ii) If * is a commutative binary operation on N, then a * (b * c) = (c * b) * a Answer (i) Define an operation * on N as: a*b=a+b a, b N
Then, in particular, for b = a = 3, we have: 3*3=3+3=63 Therefore, statement (i) is false. (ii) R.H.S. = (c * b) * a = (b * c) * a [* is commutative] = a * (b * c) [Again, as * is commutative] = L.H.S. a * (b * c) = (c * b) * a Therefore, statement (ii) is true.
Question 13: Consider a binary operation * on N defined as a * b = a3 + b3. Choose the correct answer. (A) Is * both associative and commutative? (B) Is * commutative but not associative? Page 53 of 68
Class XII
Maths
(C) Is * associative but not commutative? (D) Is * neither commutative nor associative? Answer On N, the operation * is defined as a * b = a3 + b3. For, a, b, N, we have: a * b = a3 + b3 = b3 + a3 = b * a [Addition is commutative in N] Therefore, the operation * is commutative. It can be observed that:
(1 * 2) * 3 1 * (2 * 3) ; where 1, 2, 3 N Therefore, the operation * is not associative. Hence, the operation * is commutative, but not associative. Thus, the correct answer is B.
Page 54 of 68
Class XII
Chapter 1 Relations and Functions Miscellaneous Questions:
Maths
Question 1: Let f: R R be defined as f(x) = 10x + 7. Find the function g: R R such that g o f = f o g = 1R. Answer It is given that f: R R is defined as f(x) = 10x + 7. One-one: Let f(x) = f(y), where x, y R. 10x + 7 = 10y + 7 x=y f is a one-one function. Onto: For y R, let y = 10x + 7.
such that
f is onto. Therefore, f is one-one and onto. Thus, f is an invertible function.
Let us define g: R R as Now, we have:
Page 55 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required function g: R R is defined as
Question 2: Let f: W W be defined as f(n) = n 1, if is odd and f(n) = n + 1, if n is even. Show that f is invertible. Find the inverse of f. Here, W is the set of all whole numbers. Answer It is given that:
f: W W is defined as One-one: Let f(n) = f(m). It can be observed that if n is odd and m is even, then we will have n 1 = m + 1. nm=2 However, this is impossible. Similarly, the possibility of n being even and m being odd can also be ignored under a similar argument. Both n and m must be either odd or even. Now, if both n and m are odd, then we have: f(n) = f(m) n 1 = m 1 n = m Again, if both n and m are even, then we have: f(n) = f(m) n + 1 = m + 1 n = m f is one-one. It is clear that any odd number 2r + 1 in co-domain N is the image of 2r in domain N and any even number 2r in co-domain N is the image of 2r + 1 in domain N. f is onto. Hence, f is an invertible function. Let us define g: W W as:
Page 56 of 68
Class XII Now, when n is odd:
Maths
And, when n is even:
Similarly, when m is odd:
When m is even:
Thus, f is invertible and the inverse of f is given by f1 = g, which is the same as f. Hence, the inverse of f is f itself.
Question 3: If f: R R is defined by f(x) = x2 3x + 2, find f(f(x)). Answer It is given that f: R R is defined as f(x) = x2 3x + 2.
Question 4:
Show that function f: R {x R: 1 < x < 1} defined by f(x) = and onto function. Answer
, x R is one-one
It is given that f: R {x R: 1 < x < 1} is defined as f(x) = Suppose f(x) = f(y), where x, y R. Page 57 of 68
Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com
, x R.
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII
Maths
It can be observed that if x is positive and y is negative, then we have:
Since x is positive and y is negative: x>yxy>0 But, 2xy is negative. Then, .
Thus, the case of x being positive and y being negative can be ruled out. Under a similar argument, x being negative and y being positive can also be ruled out x and y have to be either positive or negative. When x and y are both positive, we have:
When x and y are both negative, we have:
f is one-one. Now, let y R such that 1 < y < 1.
If y is negative, then there exists
such that
If y is positive, then there exists
such that
Page 58 of 68
Class XII
Maths
f is onto. Hence, f is one-one and onto.
Question 5: Show that the function f: R R given by f(x) = x3 is injective. Answer f: R R is given as f(x) = x3. Suppose f(x) = f(y), where x, y R. x3 = y3 (1) Now, we need to show that x = y. Suppose x y, their cubes will also not be equal. x3 y3 However, this will be a contradiction to (1). x=y Hence, f is injective.
Question 6: Give examples of two functions f: N Z and g: Z Z such that g o f is injective but g is not injective. (Hint: Consider f(x) = x and g(x) = Answer Define f: N Z as f(x) = x and g: Z Z as g(x) = We first show that g is not injective. It can be observed that: g(1) = Page 59 of 68
Class XII
Maths
g(1) = g(1) = g(1), but 1 1. g is not injective. Now, gof: N Z is defined as Let x, y N such that gof(x) = gof(y). Since x and y N, both are positive. .
Hence, gof is injective
Question 7: Given examples of two functions f: N N and g: N N such that gof is onto but f is not onto.
(Hint: Consider f(x) = x + 1 and Answer Define f: N N by, f(x) = x + 1 And, g: N N by,
We first show that g is not onto. For this, consider element 1 in co-domain N. It is clear that this element is not an image of any of the elements in domain N. f is not onto. Now, gof: N N is defined by,
Then, it is clear that for y N, there exists x = y N such that gof(x) = y. Hence, gof is onto. Page 60 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Question 8: Given a non empty set X, consider P(X) which is the set of all subsets of X. Define the relation R in P(X) as follows: For subsets A, B in P(X), ARB if and only if A B. Is R an equivalence relation on P(X)? Justify you answer: Answer Since every set is a subset of itself, ARA for all A P(X). R is reflexive. Let ARB A B. This cannot be implied to B A. For instance, if A = {1, 2} and B = {1, 2, 3}, then it cannot be implied that B is related to A. R is not symmetric. Further, if ARB and BRC, then A B and B C. AC ARC R is transitive. Hence, R is not an equivalence relation since it is not symmetric.
Question 9: Given a non-empty set X, consider the binary operation *: P(X) P(X) P(X) given by A * B = A B A, B in P(X) is the power set of X. Show that X is the identity element for this operation and X is the only invertible element in P(X) with respect to the operation*. Answer It is given that We know that . .
Thus, X is the identity element for the given binary operation *. Now, an element is invertible if there exists Page 61 of 68
such that
Class XII
Maths
This case is possible only when A = X = B. Thus, X is the only invertible element in P(X) with respect to the given operation*. Hence, the given result is proved.
Question 10: Find the number of all onto functions from the set {1, 2, 3, , n) to itself. Answer Onto functions from the set {1, 2, 3, ,n} to itself is simply a permutation on n symbols 1, 2, , n. Thus, the total number of onto maps from {1, 2, , n} to itself is the same as the total number of permutations on n symbols 1, 2, , n, which is n.
Question 11: Let S = {a, b, c} and T = {1, 2, 3}. Find F1 of the following functions F from S to T, if it exists. (i) F = {(a, 3), (b, 2), (c, 1)} (ii) F = {(a, 2), (b, 1), (c, 1)} Answer S = {a, b, c}, T = {1, 2, 3} (i) F: S T is defined as: F = {(a, 3), (b, 2), (c, 1)} F (a) = 3, F (b) = 2, F(c) = 1 Therefore, F1: T S is given by F1 = {(3, a), (2, b), (1, c)}. (ii) F: S T is defined as: F = {(a, 2), (b, 1), (c, 1)} Since F (b) = F (c) = 1, F is not one-one. Hence, F is not invertible i.e., F1 does not exist.
Question 12:
Page 62 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Consider the binary operations*: R R and o: R R R defined as
and
a o b = a, a, b R. Show that * is commutative but not associative, o is associative but not commutative. Further, show that a, b, c R, a*(b o c) = (a * b) o (a * c). [If it is so, we say that the operation * distributes over the operation o]. Does o distribute over *? Justify your answer. Answer It is given that *: R R and o: R R R isdefined as and a o b = a, a, b R. For a, b R, we have:
a * b = b * a The operation * is commutative. It can be observed that,
The operation * is not associative. Now, consider the operation o: It can be observed that 1 o 2 = 1 and 2 o 1 = 2. 1 o 2 2 o 1 (where 1, 2 R) The operation o is not commutative. Let a, b, c R. Then, we have: (a o b) o c = a o c = a a o (b o c) = a o b = a a o b) o c = a o (b o c) The operation o is associative. Now, let a, b, c R, then we have: a * (b o c) = a * b =
Page 63 of 68
Class XII
Maths
(a * b) o (a * c) = Hence, a * (b o c) = (a * b) o (a * c). Now, 1 o (2 * 3) = (1 o 2) * (1 o 3) = 1 * 1 = 1 o (2 * 3) (1 o 2) * (1 o 3) (where 1, 2, 3 R) The operation o does not distribute over *.
Question 13: Given a non-empty set X, let *: P(X) P(X) P(X) be defined as A * B = (A B) (B A), A, B P(X). Show that the empty set is the identity for the operation * and all the elements A of P(X) are invertible with A1 = A. (Hint: (A ) ( A) = A and (A A) (A A) = A * A = ). Answer It is given that *: P(X) P(X) P(X) is defined as A * B = (A B) (B A) A, B P(X). Let A P(X). Then, we have: A * = (A ) ( A) = A = A * A = ( A) (A ) = A = A A * = A = * A. A P(X) Thus, is the identity element for the given operation*. Now, an element A P(X) will be invertible if there exists B P(X) such that A * B = = B * A. (As is the identity element) Now, we observed that Hence, all the elements A of P(X) are invertible with A
1
. = A.
Question 14: Define a binary operation *on the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5} as
Page 64 of 68
Class XII
Maths
Show that zero is the identity for this operation and each element a 0 of the set is invertible with 6 a being the inverse of a. Answer Let X = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}. The operation * on X is defined as:
An element e X is the identity element for the operation *, if
Thus, 0 is the identity element for the given operation *. An element a X is invertible if there exists b X such that a * b = 0 = b * a.
i.e., a = b or b = 6 a But, X = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5} and a, b X. Then, a b. b = 6 a is the inverse of a a X. Hence, the inverse of an element a X, a 0 is 6 a i.e., a1 = 6 a.
Question 15: Let A = {1, 0, 1, 2}, B = {4, 2, 0, 2} and f, g: A B be functions defined by f(x) =
x2 x, x A and
. Are f and g equal?
Justify your answer. (Hint: One may note that two function f: A B and g: A B such that f(a) = g(a) a A, are called equal functions). Answer Page 65 of 68
Class XII
Maths
It is given that A = {1, 0, 1, 2}, B = {4, 2, 0, 2}. Also, it is given that f, g: A B are defined by f(x) = x2 x, x A and
. It is observed that:
Hence, the functions f and g are equal.
Question 16: Let A = {1, 2, 3}. Then number of relations containing (1, 2) and (1, 3) which are reflexive and symmetric but not transitive is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 Answer The given set is A = {1, 2, 3}. The smallest relation containing (1, 2) and (1, 3) which is reflexive and symmetric, but not transitive is given by:
Page 66 of 68
Class XII
Maths
R = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (1, 2), (1, 3), (2, 1), (3, 1)} This is because relation R is reflexive as (1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3) R. Relation R is symmetric since (1, 2), (2, 1) R and (1, 3), (3, 1) R. But relation R is not transitive as (3, 1), (1, 2) R, but (3, 2) R. Now, if we add any two pairs (3, 2) and (2, 3) (or both) to relation R, then relation R will become transitive. Hence, the total number of desired relations is one. The correct answer is A.
Question 17: Let A = {1, 2, 3}. Then number of equivalence relations containing (1, 2) is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 Answer It is given that A = {1, 2, 3}. The smallest equivalence relation containing (1, 2) is given by, R1 = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (1, 2), (2, 1)} Now, we are left with only four pairs i.e., (2, 3), (3, 2), (1, 3), and (3, 1). If we odd any one pair [say (2, 3)] to R1, then for symmetry we must add (3, 2). Also, for transitivity we are required to add (1, 3) and (3, 1). Hence, the only equivalence relation (bigger than R1) is the universal relation. This shows that the total number of equivalence relations containing (1, 2) is two. The correct answer is B.
Question 18: Let f: R R be the Signum Function defined as
and g: R R be the Greatest Integer Function given by g(x) = [x], where [x] is greatest integer less than or equal to x. Then does fog and gof coincide in (0, 1]? Answer It is given that,
Page 67 of 68
Class XII
Maths
f: R R is defined as Also, g: R R is defined as g(x) = [x], where [x] is the greatest integer less than or equal to x. Now, let x (0, 1]. Then, we have: [x] = 1 if x = 1 and [x] = 0 if 0 < x < 1.
Thus, when x (0, 1), we have fog(x) = 0and gof (x) = 1. Hence, fog and gof do not coincide in (0, 1].
Question 19: Number of binary operations on the set {a, b} are (A) 10 (B) 16 (C) 20 (D) 8 Answer A binary operation * on {a, b} is a function from {a, b} {a, b} {a, b} i.e., * is a function from {(a, a), (a, b), (b, a), (b, b)} {a, b}. Hence, the total number of binary operations on the set {a, b} is 24 i.e., 16. The correct answer is B.
Page 68 of 68
Class XII
Chapter 2 Inverse Trigonometric Functions
Maths
Exercise 2.1
Question 1:
Find the principal value of Answer
Let sin-1
Then sin y =
We know that the range of the principal value branch of sin1 is
and sin
Therefore, the principal value of
Question 2:
We know that the range of the principal value branch of cos1 is
Question 3: Find the principal value of cosec1 (2) Answer Page 1 of 38

Class XII
Maths
Let cosec1 (2) = y. Then,
We know that the range of the principal value branch of cosec1 is
Question 4: Find the principal value of Answer
We know that the range of the principal value branch of tan1 is
Question 5:
We know that the range of the principal value branch of cos1 is
Page 2 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 6: Find the principal value of tan1 (1) Answer
Let tan1 (1) = y. Then, We know that the range of the principal value branch of tan1 is
Question 7:
We know that the range of the principal value branch of sec1 is
Page 3 of 38
Class XII
Maths
We know that the range of the principal value branch of cot1 is (0,) and
Question 9:
We know that the range of the principal value branch of cos1 is [0,] and
We know that the range of the principal value branch of cosec1 is
Page 4 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 11:
Find the value of Answer
Question 12:
Page 5 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 13: Find the value of if sin1 x = y, then
(A)
(B)
(C) Answer
(D)
It is given that sin1 x = y.
We know that the range of the principal value branch of sin1 is
Therefore,
Question 14: Find the value of is equal to
(A) (B) Answer
(C)
(D)
Page 6 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Page 7 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Exercise 2.2
Question 1:
Prove Answer
To prove: Let x = sin. Then, We have, R.H.S. =
= 3
= L.H.S.
Question 2:
Prove Answer
To prove: Let x = cos. Then, cos1 x =. We have,
Page 8 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 3:
Prove Answer
To prove:
Question 4:
Prove Answer
To prove:
Page 9 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: Write the function in the simplest form:
Answer
Page 10 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Put x = cosec = cosec1 x
Page 11 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Answer
Page 12 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Answer
Page 13 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 11:
Let
. Then,
Question 12:
Page 14 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 13:
Find the value of Answer Let x = tan . Then, = tan1 x.
Let y = tan . Then, = tan1 y.
Question 14:
Page 15 of 38
Class XII
Maths
If Answer
, then find the value of x.
On squaring both sides, we get:
Page 16 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the value of x is
Question 15:
If Answer
, then find the value of x.
Page 17 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the value of x is
Question 16:
Find the values of Answer
Page 18 of 38
Class XII
Maths
We know that sin1 (sin x) = x if sin1x.
, which is the principal value branch of
Here,
Now,
can be written as:
Question 17:
We know that tan1 (tan x) = x if tan x.

1
Here,
Now,
can be written as:
Page 19 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 18:
Let
. Then,
Question 19:
Page 20 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Find the values of
is equal to
(A) Answer
(B)
(C)
(D)
We know that cos1 (cos x) = x if

1
, which is the principal value branch of cos
x.
Here,
Now,
can be written as:
Question 20:
Find the values of
is equal to
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D) 1
Answer
Let
. Then,
We know that the range of the principal value branch of Page 21 of 38

Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII
Maths
The correct answer is D.
Page 22 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Miscellaneous Solutions
Question 1:
Find the value of Answer We know that cos1 (cos x) = x if

1
, which is the principal value branch of cos
x.
Here,
Now,
can be written as:
Question 2:
We know that tan1 (tan x) = x if tan

1
x.
Here,
Now,
can be written as:
Page 23 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 3:
Prove Answer
Now, we have:
Page 24 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
Prove Answer
Now, we have:
Page 25 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 5:
Prove Answer
Page 26 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Now, we will prove that:
Page 27 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 6:
Prove Answer
Now, we have:
Page 28 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 7:
Prove Answer
Using (1) and (2), we have
Page 29 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 8:
Prove Answer
Page 30 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Prove Answer
Page 31 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Prove Answer
Question 11:
Prove Answer
[Hint: putx = cos 2]
Page 32 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 12:
Prove Answer
Page 33 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Question 13: Solve Answer
Question 14:
Solve Answer Page 34 of 38

Class XII
Maths
Question 15: Solve is equal to
(A) Answer
(B)
(C)
(D)
Let tan1 x = y. Then,
Question 16:
Solve
, then x is equal to
Page 35 of 38
Class XII
Maths
(A) Answer
(B)
(C) 0 (D)
Therefore, from equation (1), we have
Put x = sin y. Then, we have:
But, when
, it can be observed that:
Page 36 of 38
Class XII
Maths
is not the solution of the given equation. Thus, x = 0. Hence, the correct answer is C.
Question 17:
Solve
is equal to
(A)
(B).
(C)
(D)
Answer
Page 37 of 38
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the correct answer is C.
Page 38 of 38
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices Exercise 3.1
Maths
Question 1:
In the matrix
, write:
(i) The order of the matrix (ii) The number of elements, (iii) Write the elements a13, a21, a33, a24, a23 Answer (i) In the given matrix, the number of rows is 3 and the number of columns is 4. Therefore, the order of the matrix is 3 4. (ii) Since the order of the matrix is 3 4, there are 3 4 = 12 elements in it.
(iii) a13 = 19, a21 = 35, a33 = 5, a24 = 12, a23 =
Question 2: If a matrix has 24 elements, what are the possible order it can have? What, if it has 13 elements? Answer We know that if a matrix is of the order m n, it has mn elements. Thus, to find all the possible orders of a matrix having 24 elements, we have to find all the ordered pairs of natural numbers whose product is 24. The ordered pairs are: (1, 24), (24, 1), (2, 12), (12, 2), (3, 8), (8, 3), (4, 6), and (6, 4) Hence, the possible orders of a matrix having 24 elements are: 1 24, 24 1, 2 12, 12 2, 3 8, 8 3, 4 6, and 6 4 (1, 13) and (13, 1) are the ordered pairs of natural numbers whose product is 13. Hence, the possible orders of a matrix having 13 elements are 1 13 and 13 1.
Question 3:
Page 1 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
If a matrix has 18 elements, what are the possible orders it can have? What, if it has 5 elements? Answer We know that if a matrix is of the order m n, it has mn elements. Thus, to find all the possible orders of a matrix having 18 elements, we have to find all the ordered pairs of natural numbers whose product is 18. The ordered pairs are: (1, 18), (18, 1), (2, 9), (9, 2), (3, 6,), and (6, 3) Hence, the possible orders of a matrix having 18 elements are: 1 18, 18 1, 2 9, 9 2, 3 6, and 6 3 (1, 5) and (5, 1) are the ordered pairs of natural numbers whose product is 5. Hence, the possible orders of a matrix having 5 elements are 1 5 and 5 1.
Question 5: Construct a 3 4 matrix, whose elements are given by
(i) Answer
(ii)
In general, a 3 4 matrix is given by
(i)
Page 2 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Therefore, the required matrix is (ii)
Page 3 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Therefore, the required matrix is
Question 6: Find the value of x, y, and z from the following equation:
(i)
(ii)
(iii) Answer
(i) As the given matrices are equal, their corresponding elements are also equal. Comparing the corresponding elements, we get: Page 4 of 83
Class XII x = 1, y = 4, and z = 3
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(ii) As the given matrices are equal, their corresponding elements are also equal. Comparing the corresponding elements, we get: x + y = 6, xy = 8, 5 + z = 5 Now, 5 + z = 5 z = 0 We know that: (x y)2 = (x + y)2 4xy (x y)2 = 36 32 = 4 x y = 2 Now, when x y = 2 and x + y = 6, we get x = 4 and y = 2 When x y = 2 and x + y = 6, we get x = 2 and y = 4 x = 4, y = 2, and z = 0 or x = 2, y = 4, and z = 0
(iii) As the two matrices are equal, their corresponding elements are also equal. Comparing the corresponding elements, we get: x + y + z = 9 (1) x + z = 5 (2) y + z = 7 (3) From (1) and (2), we have: y+5=9 y=4 Then, from (3), we have: 4+z=7 z=3 x+z=5 x=2 x = 2, y = 4, and z = 3
Page 5 of 83
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Find the value of a, b, c, and d from the equation:
Answer
As the two matrices are equal, their corresponding elements are also equal. Comparing the corresponding elements, we get: a b = 1 (1) 2a b = 0 (2) 2a + c = 5 (3) 3c + d = 13 (4) From (2), we have: b = 2a Then, from (1), we have: a 2a = 1 a=1 b=2 Now, from (3), we have: 2 1 + c = 5 c=3 From (4) we have: 3 3 + d = 13 9 + d = 13 d = 4 a = 1, b = 2, c = 3, and d = 4
Question 8: is a square matrix, if (A) m < n (B) m > n
Page 6 of 83
Class XII (C) m = n (D) None of these Answer The correct answer is C.
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
It is known that a given matrix is said to be a square matrix if the number of rows is equal to the number of columns. Therefore, is a square matrix, if m = n.
Question 9: Which of the given values of x and y make the following pair of matrices equal
(A) (B) Not possible to find
(C)
(D) Answer The correct answer is B.
It is given that Equating the corresponding elements, we get:
Page 7 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
We find that on comparing the corresponding elements of the two matrices, we get two different values of x, which is not possible. Hence, it is not possible to find the values of x and y for which the given matrices are equal.
Question 10: The number of all possible matrices of order 3 3 with each entry 0 or 1 is: (A) 27 (B) 18 (C) 81 (D) 512 Answer The correct answer is D. The given matrix of the order 3 3 has 9 elements and each of these elements can be either 0 or 1. Now, each of the 9 elements can be filled in two possible ways. Therefore, by the multiplication principle, the required number of possible matrices is 29 = 512
Page 8 of 83
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Let Find each of the following (i) (iv) Answer (i) (ii) (v) (iii)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv) Matrix A has 2 columns. This number is equal to the number of rows in matrix B. Therefore, AB is defined as:
Page 9 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(v) Matrix B has 2 columns. This number is equal to the number of rows in matrix A. Therefore, BA is defined as:
Question 2: Compute the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(v) Answer (i)
(ii)
Page 10 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(iii)
(iv)
Question 3: Compute the indicated products
(i)
(ii)
Page 11 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi) Answer
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Page 12 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Page 13 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 4:
If compute Answer and . Also, verify that
, and
, then
Page 14 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 5:
If Answer
and
then compute
Page 15 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 6:
Simplify Answer
Question 7: Find X and Y, if
(i)
and
(ii) Answer (i)
and
Page 16 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Adding equations (1) and (2), we get:
(ii)
Multiplying equation (3) with (2), we get:
Page 17 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Multiplying equation (4) with (3), we get:
From (5) and (6), we have:
Now,
Page 18 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 8:
Find X, if Answer
and
Page 19 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 9:
Find x and y, if Answer
Comparing the corresponding elements of these two matrices, we have:
x = 3 and y = 3
Question 10:
Page 20 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Solve the equation for x, y, z and t if
Answer
Comparing the corresponding elements of these two matrices, we get:
Question 11:
If Answer
, find values of x and y.
Page 21 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Comparing the corresponding elements of these two matrices, we get: 2x y = 10 and 3x + y = 5 Adding these two equations, we have: 5x = 15 x=3 Now, 3x + y = 5 y = 5 3x y = 5 9 = 4 x = 3 and y = 4
Question 12:
Given w. Answer
, find the values of x, y, z and
Comparing the corresponding elements of these two matrices, we get:
Page 22 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 13:
If Answer
, show that
Page 23 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 14: Show that
(i)
(ii) Answer Page 24 of 83

Class XII (i)
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(ii)
Page 25 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 15:
Find Answer
if
We have A2 = A A
Page 26 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Page 27 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 16:
If Answer
, prove that
Page 28 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 17:
If Answer
and
, find k so that
Page 29 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Comparing the corresponding elements, we have:
Thus, the value of k is 1.
Question 18:
If
and I is the identity matrix of order 2, show that
Answer
Page 30 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Page 31 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 19: A trust fund has Rs 30,000 that must be invested in two different types of bonds. The first bond pays 5% interest per year, and the second bond pays 7% interest per year. Using matrix multiplication, determine how to divide Rs 30,000 among the two types of bonds. If the trust fund must obtain an annual total interest of: (a) Rs 1,800 (b) Rs 2,000 Answer (a) Let Rs x be invested in the first bond. Then, the sum of money invested in the second bond will be Rs (30000 x). It is given that the first bond pays 5% interest per year and the second bond pays 7% interest per year. Therefore, in order to obtain an annual total interest of Rs 1800, we have:
Page 32 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus, in order to obtain an annual total interest of Rs 1800, the trust fund should invest Rs 15000 in the first bond and the remaining Rs 15000 in the second bond. (b) Let Rs x be invested in the first bond. Then, the sum of money invested in the second bond will be Rs (30000 x). Therefore, in order to obtain an annual total interest of Rs 2000, we have:
Thus, in order to obtain an annual total interest of Rs 2000, the trust fund should invest Rs 5000 in the first bond and the remaining Rs 25000 in the second bond.
Question 20:
Page 33 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
The bookshop of a particular school has 10 dozen chemistry books, 8 dozen physics books, 10 dozen economics books. Their selling prices are Rs 80, Rs 60 and Rs 40 each respectively. Find the total amount the bookshop will receive from selling all the books using matrix algebra. Answer The bookshop has 10 dozen chemistry books, 8 dozen physics books, and 10 dozen economics books. The selling prices of a chemistry book, a physics book, and an economics book are respectively given as Rs 80, Rs 60, and Rs 40. The total amount of money that will be received from the sale of all these books can be represented in the form of a matrix as:
Thus, the bookshop will receive Rs 20160 from the sale of all these books.
Question 21: Assume X, Y, Z, W and P are matrices of order respectively. The restriction on n, k and p so that A. k = 3, p = n B. k is arbitrary, p = 2 C. p is arbitrary, k = 3 D. k = 2, p = 3 Answer Matrices P and Y are of the orders p k and 3 k respectively. Therefore, matrix PY will be defined if k = 3. Consequently, PY will be of the order p k. Matrices W and Y are of the orders n 3 and 3 k respectively. Page 34 of 83
, and will be defined are:
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Since the number of columns in W is equal to the number of rows in Y, matrix WY is well-defined and is of the order n k. Matrices PY and WY can be added only when their orders are the same. However, PY is of the order p k and WY is of the order n k. Therefore, we must have p = n. Thus, k = 3 and p = n are the restrictions on n, k, and p so that defined. will be
Question 22: Assume X, Y, Z, W and P are matrices of order respectively. If n = p, then the order of the matrix Ap2B2nCn3Dpn Answer The correct answer is B. Matrix X is of the order 2 n. Therefore, matrix 7X is also of the same order. Matrix Z is of the order 2 p, i.e., 2 n [Since n = p] Therefore, matrix 5Z is also of the same order. Now, both the matrices 7X and 5Z are of the order 2 n. Thus, matrix 7X 5Z is well-defined and is of the order 2 n. is , and
Page 35 of 83
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find the transpose of each of the following matrices:
(i) Answer
(ii)
(iii)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Question 2:
If (i) (ii) Answer We have:
and
, then verify that
Page 36 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(i)
(ii)
Page 37 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 3:
If (i) (ii) Answer
and
, then verify that
(i) It is known that Therefore, we have:
Page 38 of 83
Class XII (ii)
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 4:
If Answer We know that
and
, then find
Question 5: For the matrices A and B, verify that (AB) = where
Page 39 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(i)
(ii) Answer (i)
(ii)
Page 40 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 6:
If (i)
, then verify that
(ii) Answer (i)
, then verify that
Page 41 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(ii)
Page 42 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 7:
(i) Show that the matrix
is a symmetric matrix
(ii) Show that the matrix Answer (i) We have:
is a skew symmetric matrix
Hence, A is a symmetric matrix. (ii) We have:
Page 43 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Hence, A is a skew-symmetric matrix.
Question 8:
For the matrix (i) (ii) Answer
, verify that
is a symmetric matrix is a skew symmetric matrix
(i)
Hence,
is a symmetric matrix.
(ii)
Hence,
is a skew-symmetric matrix.
Question 9:
Page 44 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Find Answer
and
, when
The given matrix is
Question 10: Express the following matrices as the sum of a symmetric and a skew symmetric matrix:
(i) Page 45 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(ii)
(iii)
(iv) Answer (i)
Thus,
Page 46 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus,
Representing A as the sum of P and Q:
(ii)
Thus,
Page 47 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus,
(iii)
Page 48 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus,
Thus,
Page 49 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(iv)
Thus,
Thus,
Representing A as the sum of P and Q: Page 50 of 83

Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 11: If A, B are symmetric matrices of same order, then AB BA is a A. Skew symmetric matrix B. Symmetric matrix C. Zero matrix D. Identity matrix Answer The correct answer is A. A and B are symmetric matrices, therefore, we have:
Thus, (AB BA) is a skew-symmetric matrix.
Question 12:
If
, then
, if the value of is
A.
B.
C. D. Answer The correct answer is B.
Page 51 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Comparing the corresponding elements of the two matrices, we have:
Exercise 3.4
Question 1: Find the inverse of each of the matrices, if it exists.
Answer
We know that A = IA
Page 52 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Page 53 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Answer
We know that A = IA
Page 54 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Page 55 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Page 56 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = AI
Page 57 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Page 58 of 83
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Find the inverse of each of the matrices, if it exists.
Answer
We know that A = IA
Answer
We know that A = AI
Page 59 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = AI
Page 60 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Now, in the above equation, we can see all the zeros in the second row of the matrix on the L.H.S. Therefore, A1 does not exist.
Answer
Page 61 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
We know that A = IA
Answer
We know that A = IA
Applying
, we have:
Page 62 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Now, in the above equation, we can see all the zeros in the first row of the matrix on the L.H.S. Therefore, A1 does not exist.
Answer
We know that A = IA
Applying R2 R2 + 3R1 and R3 R3 2R1, we have:
Page 63 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Page 64 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Answer
We know that A = IA
Applying
, we have:
Page 65 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 18: Matrices A and B will be inverse of each other only if A. AB = BA C. AB = 0, BA = I B. AB = BA = 0 D. AB = BA = I Answer Page 66 of 83
Class XII Answer: D
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
We know that if A is a square matrix of order m, and if there exists another square matrix B of the same order m, such that AB = BA = I, then B is said to be the inverse of A. In this case, it is clear that A is the inverse of B. Thus, matrices A and B will be inverses of each other only if AB = BA = I.
Page 67 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 1:
Let order 2 and n N Answer
, show that
, where I is the identity matrix of
It is given that
We shall prove the result by using the principle of mathematical induction. For n = 1, we have:
Therefore, the result is true for n = 1. Let the result be true for n = k. That is,
Now, we prove that the result is true for n = k + 1. Consider
From (1), we have:
Page 68 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Therefore, the result is true for n = k + 1. Thus, by the principle of mathematical induction, we have:
Question 2:
If Answer
, prove that
It is given that
Therefore, the result is true for n = 1. Let the result be true for n = k.
That is
Page 69 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Now, we prove that the result is true for n = k + 1.
Therefore, the result is true for n = k + 1. Thus by the principle of mathematical induction, we have:
Question 3:
If Answer
, then prove
where n is any positive integer
It is given that
Page 70 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Therefore, the result is true for n = 1. Let the result be true for n = k. That is,
Therefore, the result is true for n = k + 1. Thus, by the principle of mathematical induction, we have:
Question 4: If A and B are symmetric matrices, prove that AB BA is a skew symmetric matrix. Answer It is given that A and B are symmetric matrices. Therefore, we have: Page 71 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus, (AB BA) is a skew-symmetric matrix.
Question 5: Show that the matrix or skew symmetric. Answer We suppose that A is a symmetric matrix, then Consider (1) is symmetric or skew symmetric according as A is symmetric
Thus, if A is a symmetric matrix, then
Now, we suppose that A is a skew-symmetric matrix. Then,
Page 72 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus, if A is a skew-symmetric matrix, then
is a skew-symmetric matrix. is a symmetric or skew-
Hence, if A is a symmetric or skew-symmetric matrix, then symmetric matrix accordingly.
Question 6: Solve system of linear equations, using matrix method.
Answer The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Thus, A is non-singular. Therefore, its inverse exists.
Page 73 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 7:
For what values of Answer We have:
4 + 4x = 0 x = 1 Thus, the required value of x is 1. Page 74 of 83

Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 8:
If Answer
, show that
Question 9:
Page 75 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Find x, if Answer We have:
Question 10: A manufacturer produces three products x, y, z which he sells in two markets. Annual sales are indicated below: Market I II Products 10000 6000 2000 20000 18000 8000
(a) If unit sale prices of x, y and z are Rs 2.50, Rs 1.50 and Rs 1.00, respectively, find the total revenue in each market with the help of matrix algebra.
Page 76 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
(b) If the unit costs of the above three commodities are Rs 2.00, Rs 1.00 and 50 paise respectively. Find the gross profit. Answer (a) The unit sale prices of x, y, and z are respectively given as Rs 2.50, Rs 1.50, and Rs 1.00. Consequently, the total revenue in market I can be represented in the form of a matrix as:
The total revenue in market II can be represented in the form of a matrix as:
Therefore, the total revenue in market I isRs 46000 and the same in market II isRs 53000. (b) The unit cost prices of x, y, and z are respectively given as Rs 2.00, Rs 1.00, and 50 paise. Consequently, the total cost prices of all the products in market I can be represented in the form of a matrix as:
Page 77 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Since the total revenue in market I isRs 46000, the gross profit in this marketis (Rs 46000 Rs 31000) Rs 15000. The total cost prices of all the products in market II can be represented in the form of a matrix as:
Since the total revenue in market II isRs 53000, the gross profit in this market is (Rs 53000 Rs 36000) Rs 17000.
Question 11:
Find the matrix X so that Answer It is given that:
The matrix given on the R.H.S. of the equation is a 2 3 matrix and the one given on the L.H.S. of the equation is a 2 3 matrix. Therefore, X has to be a 2 2 matrix.
Now, let Therefore, we have:
Equating the corresponding elements of the two matrices, we have:
Page 78 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus, a = 1, b = 2, c = 2, d = 0
Hence, the required matrix X is
Question 12: If A and B are square matrices of the same order such that AB = BA, then prove by induction that Answer A and B are square matrices of the same order such that AB = BA. . Further, prove that for all n N
For n = 1, we have:
Page 79 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Therefore, the result is true for n = k + 1. Thus, by the principle of mathematical induction, we have Now, we prove that For n = 1, we have: for all n N
Therefore, the result is true for n = k + 1.
Page 80 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Thus, by the principle of mathematical induction, we have numbers.
, for all natural
Question 13: Choose the correct answer in the following questions:
If A. B. C. D. Answer Answer: C
is such that
then
On comparing the corresponding elements, we have:
Page 81 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Question 14: If the matrix A is both symmetric and skew symmetric, then A. A is a diagonal matrix B. A is a zero matrix C. A is a square matrix D. None of these Answer Answer: B If A is both symmetric and skew-symmetric matrix, then we should have
Therefore, A is a zero matrix.
Question 15: If A is square matrix such that A. A B. I A C. I D. 3A Answer Answer: C then is equal to
Page 82 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 3 Matrices
Maths
Page 83 of 83
Class XII
Chapter 4 Determinants Exercise 4.1
Maths
Question 1: Evaluate the determinants in Exercises 1 and 2.
Answer
= 2(1) 4(5) = 2 + 20 = 18
Question 2: Evaluate the determinants in Exercises 1 and 2.
(i) Answer
(ii)
(i)
= (cos )(cos ) (sin )(sin ) = cos2 + sin2 = 1
(ii) = (x2 x + 1)(x + 1) (x 1)(x + 1) = x3 x2 + x + x2 x + 1 (x2 1) = x3 + 1 x2 + 1 = x3 x2 + 2
Question 3:
If Answer
, then show that
The given matrix is
. Page 1 of 96
Website: www.vidhyarjan.com
Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII
Chapter 4 Determinants
Maths
Question 4:
If Answer
, then show that
The given matrix is
It can be observed that in the first column, two entries are zero. Thus, we expand along the first column (C1) for easier calculation.
From equations (i) and (ii), we have:
Page 2 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the given result is proved.
Question 5: Evaluate the determinants
(i)
(iii)
(ii) Answer
(iv)
(i) Let
It can be observed that in the second row, two entries are zero. Thus, we expand along the second row for easier calculation.
(ii) Let
By expanding along the first row, we have:
Page 3 of 96
Class XII
Maths
(iii) Let By expanding along the first row, we have:
(iv) Let By expanding along the first column, we have:
Question 6:
If Answer
, find
Let By expanding along the first row, we have:
Page 4 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 7: Find values of x, if
(i) Answer
(ii)
(i)
(ii)
Question 8:
If
, then x is equal to
Page 5 of 96
Class XII (A) 6 (B) 6 (C) 6 (D) 0 Answer Answer: B
Maths
Hence, the correct answer is B.
Page 6 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Using the property of determinants and without expanding, prove that:
Answer
Answer
Here, the two rows R1 and R3 are identical. = 0. Page 7 of 96

Class XII
Maths
Answer
Answer
Page 8 of 96
Class XII
Maths
By applying C3 C3 + C2, we have:
Here, two columns C1 and C3 are proportional. = 0.
Answer
Applying R2 R2 R3, we have:
Page 9 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Applying R1 R3 and R2 R3, we have:
Applying R1 R1 R3, we have:
Applying R1 R2 and R2 R3, we have:
From (1), (2), and (3), we have:
Question 6: By using properties of determinants, show that:
Page 10 of 96
Class XII Answer We have,
Maths
Here, the two rows R1 and R3 are identical.
= 0.
Answer
Page 11 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Applying R2 R2 + R1 and R3 R3 + R1, we have:
(i)
(ii) Answer
(i)
Page 12 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Applying R1 R1 R3 and R2 R2 R3, we have:
Applying R1 R1 + R2, we have:
Expanding along C1, we have:
(ii) Let
Applying C1 C1 C3 and C2 C2 C3, we have:
Page 13 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Applying C1 C1 + C2, we have:
Page 14 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Applying R3 R3 + R2, we have:
Expanding along R3, we have:
Page 15 of 96
Class XII
Maths
(i)
(ii) Answer
(i) Applying R1 R1 + R2 + R3, we have:
Applying C2 C2 C1, C3 C3 C1, we have:
Page 16 of 96
Class XII
Maths
(ii) Applying R1 R1 + R2 + R3, we have:
Page 17 of 96
Class XII
Maths
(i)
(ii) Answer
(i) Applying R1 R1 + R2 + R3, we have:
Applying C2 C2 C1, C3 C3 C1, we have:
Page 18 of 96
Class XII Expanding along C3, we have:
Maths
(ii) Applying C1 C1 + C2 + C3, we have:
Page 19 of 96
Class XII Answer
Maths
Applying R1 R1 + R2 + R3, we have:
Page 20 of 96
Maths
By using properties of determinants, show that:
Answer
Applying R1 R1 + bR3 and R2 R2 aR3, we have:
Page 21 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Taking out common factors a, b, and c from R1, R2, and R3 respectively, we have:
Applying C1 aC1, C2 bC2, and C3 cC3, we have:
Page 22 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 15: Choose the correct answer. Let A be a square matrix of order 3 3, then A. Answer Answer: C A is a square matrix of order 3 3. B. C. D. is equal to
Question 16: Which of the following is correct? Page 23 of 96

Class XII
Maths
A. Determinant is a square matrix. B. Determinant is a number associated to a matrix. C. Determinant is a number associated to a square matrix. D. None of these Answer Answer: C We know that to every square matrix, of order n. We can associate a number element of A.
called the determinant of square matrix A, where
Thus, the determinant is a number associated to a square matrix. Hence, the correct answer is C.
Page 24 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find area of the triangle with vertices at the point given in each of the following: (i) (1, 0), (6, 0), (4, 3) (ii) (2, 7), (1, 1), (10, 8) (iii) (2, 3), (3, 2), (1, 8) Answer (i) The area of the triangle with vertices (1, 0), (6, 0), (4, 3) is given by the relation,
(ii) The area of the triangle with vertices (2, 7), (1, 1), (10, 8) is given by the relation,
(iii) The area of the triangle with vertices (2, 3), (3, 2), (1, 8) is given by the relation,
Page 25 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the area of the triangle is
Question 2: Show that points are collinear Answer Area of ABC is given by the relation,
Thus, the area of the triangle formed by points A, B, and C is zero. Page 26 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the points A, B, and C are collinear.
Question 3: Find values of k if area of triangle is 4 square units and vertices are (i) (k, 0), (4, 0), (0, 2) (ii) (2, 0), (0, 4), (0, k) Answer We know that the area of a triangle whose vertices are (x1, y1), (x2, y2), and (x3, y3) is the absolute value of the determinant (), where
It is given that the area of triangle is 4 square units.
= 4.
(i) The area of the triangle with vertices (k, 0), (4, 0), (0, 2) is given by the relation,
k + 4 = 4
When k + 4 = 4, k = 8. When k + 4 = 4, k = 0. Hence, k = 0, 8. Page 27 of 96

Class XII
Maths
(ii) The area of the triangle with vertices (2, 0), (0, 4), (0, k) is given by the relation,
k 4 = 4
When k 4 = 4, k = 0. When k 4 = 4, k = 8. Hence, k = 0, 8.
Question 4: (i) Find equation of line joining (1, 2) and (3, 6) using determinants (ii) Find equation of line joining (3, 1) and (9, 3) using determinants Answer (i) Let P (x, y) be any point on the line joining points A (1, 2) and B (3, 6). Then, the points A, B, and P are collinear. Therefore, the area of triangle ABP will be zero.
Hence, the equation of the line joining the given points is y = 2x. (ii) Let P (x, y) be any point on the line joining points A (3, 1) and
Page 28 of 96
Class XII
Maths
B (9, 3). Then, the points A, B, and P are collinear. Therefore, the area of triangle ABP will be zero.
Hence, the equation of the line joining the given points is x 3y = 0.
Question 5: If area of triangle is 35 square units with vertices (2, 6), (5, 4), and (k, 4). Then k is A. 12 B. 2 C. 12, 2 D. 12, 2 Answer Answer: D The area of the triangle with vertices (2, 6), (5, 4), and (k, 4) is given by the relation,
It is given that the area of the triangle is 35. Therefore, we have:
Page 29 of 96
Class XII
Maths
When 5 k = 7, k = 5 + 7 = 12. When 5 k = 7, k = 5 7 = 2. Hence, k = 12, 2. The correct answer is D.
Page 30 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Write Minors and Cofactors of the elements of following determinants:
(i) Answer
(ii)
(i) The given determinant is Minor of element aij is Mij.
M11 = minor of element a11 = 3
M12 = minor of element a12 = 0 M21 = minor of element a21 = 4 M22 = minor of element a22 = 2 Cofactor of aij is Aij = (1)i + j Mij.
A11 = (1)1+1 M11 = (1)2 (3) = 3
A12 = (1)1+2 M12 = (1)3 (0) = 0 A21 = (1)2+1 M21 = (1)3 (4) = 4 A22 = (1)2+2 M22 = (1)4 (2) = 2
(ii) The given determinant is Minor of element aij is Mij.
Page 31 of 96
Class XII
Maths
M11 = minor of element a11 = d
M12 = minor of element a12 = b M21 = minor of element a21 = c M22 = minor of element a22 = a Cofactor of aij is Aij = (1)i + j Mij.
A11 = (1)1+1 M11 = (1)2 (d) = d
A12 = (1)1+2 M12 = (1)3 (b) = b A21 = (1)2+1 M21 = (1)3 (c) = c A22 = (1)2+2 M22 = (1)4 (a) = a
Question 2:
(i) Answer
(ii)
(i) The given determinant is
By the definition of minors and cofactors, we have:
M11 = minor of a11=
M12 = minor of a12=
Page 32 of 96
Class XII
Maths
M13 = minor of a13 =
M31 = minor of a31=
M33 = minor of a33 = A11 = cofactor of a11= (1)1+1 M11 = 1 A12 = cofactor of a12 = (1)1+2 M12 = 0 A13 = cofactor of a13 = (1)1+3 M13 = 0 A21 = cofactor of a21 = (1)2+1 M21 = 0 A22 = cofactor of a22 = (1)2+2 M22 = 1 A23 = cofactor of a23 = (1)2+3 M23 = 0 A31 = cofactor of a31 = (1)3+1 M31 = 0 A32 = cofactor of a32 = (1)3+2 M32 = 0 A33 = cofactor of a33 = (1)3+3 M33 = 1
(ii) The given determinant is
By definition of minors and cofactors, we have:
M11 = minor of a11= Page 33 of 96

Class XII
Maths
M12 = minor of a12=
M31 = minor of a31=
M33 = minor of a33 = A11 = cofactor of a11= (1)1+1 M11 = 11 A12 = cofactor of a12 = (1)1+2 M12 = 6 A13 = cofactor of a13 = (1)1+3 M13 = 3 A21 = cofactor of a21 = (1)2+1 M21 = 4 A22 = cofactor of a22 = (1)2+2 M22 = 2 A23 = cofactor of a23 = (1)2+3 M23 = 1 A31 = cofactor of a31 = (1)3+1 M31 = 20 A32 = cofactor of a32 = (1)3+2 M32 = 13 A33 = cofactor of a33 = (1)3+3 M33 = 5
Question 3:
Page 34 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Using Cofactors of elements of second row, evaluate Answer
The given determinant is We have:
M21 =
A21 = cofactor of a21 = (1)2+1 M21 = 7
M22 =
A22 = cofactor of a22 = (1)2+2 M22 = 7
M23 =
A23 = cofactor of a23 = (1)2+3 M23 = 7
We know that is equal to the sum of the product of the elements of the second row with their corresponding cofactors.
Page 35 of 96
Class XII
Maths
= a21A21 + a22A22 + a23A23 = 2(7) + 0(7) + 1(7) = 14 7 = 7
Question 4:
Using Cofactors of elements of third column, evaluate Answer
The given determinant is We have:
M13 =
M23 =
M33 =
A13 = cofactor of a13 = (1)1+3 M13 = (z y)
A23 = cofactor of a23 = (1)2+3 M23 = (z x) = (x z) A33 = cofactor of a33 = (1)3+3 M33 = (y x) We know that is equal to the sum of the product of the elements of the second row with their corresponding cofactors.
Page 36 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Hence,
Question 5: For the matrices A and B, verify that (AB) = where
(i)
(ii) Answer (i)
Page 37 of 96
Class XII
Maths
(ii)
Page 38 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 39 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find adjoint of each of the matrices.
Answer
Question 2: Find adjoint of each of the matrices.
Answer
Page 40 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 3: Verify A (adj A) = (adj A) A = I.
Answer
Page 41 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 4: Verify A (adj A) = (adj A) A = I.
Answer
Page 42 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 43 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 6: Find the inverse of each of the matrices (if it exists).
Answer
Page 44 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 45 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Question 9: Find the inverse of each of the matrices (if it exists). Page 46 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
. Answer
Page 47 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 48 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 12:
Let Answer
and
. Verify that
Page 49 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 50 of 96
Class XII
Maths
From (1) and (2), we have: (AB)1 = B1A1 Hence, the given result is proved.
Question 13:
If Answer
, show that
. Hence find
Page 51 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 14:
For the matrix Answer
, find the numbers a and b such that A2 + aA + bI = O.
Page 52 of 96
Class XII
Maths
We have:
Comparing the corresponding elements of the two matrices, we have:
Hence, 4 and 1 are the required values of a and b respectively.
Page 53 of 96
Maths
For the matrix A1. Answer
show that A3 6A2 + 5A + 11 I = O. Hence, find
Page 54 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 55 of 96
Class XII
Maths
From equation (1), we have:
Question 16:
If Answer
verify that A3 6A2 + 9A 4I = O and hence find A1
Page 56 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 57 of 96
Class XII
Maths
From equation (1), we have:
Page 58 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 17: Let A be a nonsingular square matrix of order 3 3. Then A. B. C. D. is equal to
Answer B We know that,
Question 18: If A is an invertible matrix of order 2, then det (A1) is equal to
A. det (A) B. Answer
C. 1 D. 0
Since A is an invertible matrix,
Page 59 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 60 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Examine the consistency of the system of equations. x + 2y = 2 2x + 3y = 3 Answer The given system of equations is: x + 2y = 2 2x + 3y = 3 The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
A is non-singular.
Therefore, A1 exists. Hence, the given system of equations is consistent.
Question 2: Examine the consistency of the system of equations. 2x y = 5 x+y=4 Answer The given system of equations is: 2x y = 5 x+y=4 The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 61 of 96
Class XII
Maths
A is non-singular.
Question 3: Examine the consistency of the system of equations. x + 3y = 5 2x + 6y = 8 Answer The given system of equations is: x + 3y = 5 2x + 6y = 8 The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
A is a singular matrix.
Page 62 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Thus, the solution of the given system of equations does not exist. Hence, the system of equations is inconsistent.
Question 4: Examine the consistency of the system of equations. x+y+z=1 2x + 3y + 2z = 2 ax + ay + 2az = 4 Answer The given system of equations is: x+y+z=1 2x + 3y + 2z = 2 ax + ay + 2az = 4 This system of equations can be written in the form AX = B, where
A is non-singular.
Page 63 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: Examine the consistency of the system of equations. 3x y 2z = 2 2y z = 1 3x 5y = 3 Answer The given system of equations is: 3x y 2z = 2 2y z = 1 3x 5y = 3 This system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
A is a singular matrix.
Thus, the solution of the given system of equations does not exist. Hence, the system of equations is inconsistent.
Page 64 of 96
Maths
Examine the consistency of the system of equations. 5x y + 4z = 5 2x + 3y + 5z = 2 5x 2y + 6z = 1 Answer The given system of equations is: 5x y + 4z = 5 2x + 3y + 5z = 2 5x 2y + 6z = 1 This system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
A is non-singular.
Answer
Page 65 of 96
Class XII
Maths
The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 66 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 67 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 10: Solve system of linear equations, using matrix method. 5x + 2y = 3 3x + 2y = 5 Answer The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 68 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 12: Solve system of linear equations, using matrix method. xy+z=4 2x + y 3z = 0 Page 69 of 96
Class XII x+y+z=2 Answer
Maths
The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 70 of 96
Class XII 2x + 3y + 3z = 5 x 2y + z = 4 3x y 2z = 3 Answer
Maths
The given system of equations can be written in the form AX = B, where
Page 71 of 96
Maths
Solve system of linear equations, using matrix method. x y + 2z = 7 3x + 4y 5z = 5 2x y + 3z = 12 Answer The given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Question 15:
Page 72 of 96
Class XII
Maths
If
, find A1. Using A1 solve the system of equations
Answer
Now, the given system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 73 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 16: The cost of 4 kg onion, 3 kg wheat and 2 kg rice is Rs 60. The cost of 2 kg onion, 4 kg wheat and 6 kg rice is Rs 90. The cost of 6 kg onion 2 kg wheat and 3 kg rice is Rs 70. Find cost of each item per kg by matrix method. Answer Let the cost of onions, wheat, and rice per kg be Rs x, Rs y,and Rs z respectively. Then, the given situation can be represented by a system of equations as:
This system of equations can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 74 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Now, X = A1 B
Hence, the cost of onions is Rs 5 per kg, the cost of wheat is Rs 8 per kg, and the cost of rice is Rs 8 per kg.
Page 75 of 96
Class XII
Chapter 4 Determinants Miscellaneous Solutions
Maths
Question 1:
Prove that the determinant Answer
is independent of .
Hence, is independent of .
Question 2: Without expanding the determinant, prove that
Answer
Page 76 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 3:
Evaluate Answer
Page 77 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
If a, b and c are real numbers, and Show that either a + b + c = 0 or a = b = c. Answer
Page 78 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Hence, if = 0, then either a + b + c = 0 or a = b = c.
Question 5:
Solve the equations Answer
Page 79 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 6:
Prove that Answer
Page 80 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Page 81 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 8:
Let (i) (ii) Answer
verify that
(i)
We have,
Page 82 of 96
Class XII
Maths
(ii)
Page 83 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Evaluate Answer
Page 84 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Evaluate Answer
Page 85 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: Using properties of determinants, prove that:
Answer
Page 86 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 87 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 88 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 89 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 90 of 96
Class XII
Maths
Question 16: Solve the system of the following equations
Answer
Let Then the given system of equations is as follows:
This system can be written in the form of AX = B, where
Page 91 of 96
Class XII
Maths
A Thus, A is non-singular. Therefore, its inverse exists. Now, A11 = 75, A12 = 110, A13 = 72 A21 = 150, A22 = 100, A23 = 0 A31 = 75, A32 = 30, A33 = 24
Page 92 of 96
Class XII Question 17: Choose the correct answer.
Maths
If a, b, c, are in A.P., then the determinant
A. 0 B. 1 C. x D. 2x Answer Answer: A
Here, all the elements of the first row (R1) are zero. Hence, we have = 0. The correct answer is A.
Page 93 of 96
Class XII Question 18: Choose the correct answer.
Maths
If x, y, z are nonzero real numbers, then the inverse of matrix
is
A.
B.
C. Answer Answer: A
D.
Page 94 of 96
Class XII
Maths
The correct answer is A.
Question 19: Choose the correct answer.
Let A. Det (A) = 0
, where 0 2, then
B. Det (A) (2, )
C. Det (A) (2, 4)
Page 95 of 96
Class XII
Maths
D. Det (A) [2, 4]
Answer sAnswer: D
Page 96 of 96
Class XII
Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability Exercise 5.1
Maths
Question 1: Prove that the function Answer is continuous at
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 0
Question 2: Examine the continuity of the function Answer .
Thus, f is continuous at x = 3
Page 1 of 144
Class XII
Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability
Maths
Question 3: Examine the following functions for continuity.
(a)
(b)
(c) Answer (a) The given function is
(d)
It is evident that f is defined at every real number k and its value at k is k 5. It is also observed that,
Hence, f is continuous at every real number and therefore, it is a continuous function.
(b) The given function is For any real number k 5, we obtain
Hence, f is continuous at every point in the domain of f and therefore, it is a continuous function.
(c) The given function is For any real number c 5, we obtain
Page 2 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Hence, f is continuous at every point in the domain of f and therefore, it is a continuous function.
(d) The given function is This function f is defined at all points of the real line. Let c be a point on a real line. Then, c < 5 or c = 5 or c > 5 Case I: c < 5 Then, f (c) = 5 c
Therefore, f is continuous at all real numbers less than 5. Case II : c = 5 Then,
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 5 Case III: c > 5
Therefore, f is continuous at all real numbers greater than 5. Hence, f is continuous at every real number and therefore, it is a continuous function. Page 3 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 4: Prove that the function Answer The given function is f (x) = xn It is evident that f is defined at all positive integers, n, and its value at n is nn. is continuous at x = n, where n is a positive integer.
Therefore, f is continuous at n, where n is a positive integer.
Question 5: Is the function f defined by
continuous at x = 0? At x = 1? At x = 2? Answer
The given function f is At x = 0, It is evident that f is defined at 0 and its value at 0 is 0.
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 0 At x = 1, f is defined at 1 and its value at 1 is 1. The left hand limit of f at x = 1 is,
The right hand limit of f at x = 1 is,
Page 4 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 1 At x = 2, f is defined at 2 and its value at 2 is 5.
Question 6: Find all points of discontinuity of f, where f is defined by
Answer
The given function f is It is evident that the given function f is defined at all the points of the real line. Let c be a point on the real line. Then, three cases arise. (i) c < 2 (ii) c > 2 (iii) c = 2 Case (i) c < 2
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x < 2 Case (ii) c > 2
Page 5 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 2 Case (iii) c = 2 Then, the left hand limit of f at x = 2 is,
It is observed that the left and right hand limit of f at x = 2 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 2 Hence, x = 2 is the only point of discontinuity of f.
Answer
The given function f is The given function f is defined at all the points of the real line. Let c be a point on the real line. Case I:
Page 6 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x < 3 Case II:
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 3 Case III:
Therefore, f is continuous in (3, 3). Case IV: If c = 3, then the left hand limit of f at x = 3 is,
It is observed that the left and right hand limit of f at x = 3 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 3 Case V:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 3 Hence, x = 3 is the only point of discontinuity of f.
Page 7 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
The given function f is It is known that, Therefore, the given function can be rewritten as
The given function f is defined at all the points of the real line. Let c be a point on the real line. Case I:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x < 0 Case II: If c = 0, then the left hand limit of f at x = 0 is,
It is observed that the left and right hand limit of f at x = 0 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 0 Case III: Page 8 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 0 Hence, x = 0 is the only point of discontinuity of f.
Answer
The given function f is It is known that, Therefore, the given function can be rewritten as
Let c be any real number. Then, Also, Therefore, the given function is a continuous function. Hence, the given function has no point of discontinuity.
Page 9 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
The left hand limit of f at x = 1 is,
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 1 Hence, the given function f has no point of discontinuity.
Question 11: Find all points of discontinuity of f, where f is defined by Page 10 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 2 Thus, the given function f is continuous at every point on the real line. Hence, f has no point of discontinuity.
Page 11 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x < 1 Case II: If c = 1, then the left hand limit of f at x = 1 is,
It is observed that the left and right hand limit of f at x = 1 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 1 Case III:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 1 Thus, from the above observation, it can be concluded that x = 1 is the only point of discontinuity of f.
Question 13: Is the function defined by
Page 12 of 144
Class XII
Maths
a continuous function? Answer
The given function is The given function f is defined at all the points of the real line. Let c be a point on the real line. Case I:
It is observed that the left and right hand limit of f at x = 1 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 1 Case III:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 1 Thus, from the above observation, it can be concluded that x = 1 is the only point of discontinuity of f.
Question 14: Page 13 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Discuss the continuity of the function f, where f is defined by
Answer
The given function is The given function is defined at all points of the interval [0, 10]. Let c be a point in the interval [0, 10]. Case I:
Therefore, f is continuous in the interval [0, 1). Case II:
It is observed that the left and right hand limits of f at x = 1 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 1 Case III:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points of the interval (1, 3). Case IV:
Page 14 of 144
Class XII
Maths
It is observed that the left and right hand limits of f at x = 3 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 3 Case V:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points of the interval (3, 10]. Hence, f is not continuous at x = 1 and x = 3
Question 15: Discuss the continuity of the function f, where f is defined by
Answer
The given function is The given function is defined at all points of the real line. Let c be a point on the real line. Case I:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x < 0
Page 15 of 144
Class XII Case II:
Maths
It is observed that the left and right hand limits of f at x = 1 do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = 1 Case V:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 1 Hence, f is not continuous only at x = 1
Question 16: Discuss the continuity of the function f, where f is defined by Page 16 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
The given function f is The given function is defined at all points of the real line. Let c be a point on the real line. Case I:
Page 17 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 2 Case V:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 1 Thus, from the above observations, it can be concluded that f is continuous at all points of the real line.
Question 17: Find the relationship between a and b so that the function f defined by
is continuous at x = 3. Answer
The given function f is If f is continuous at x = 3, then
Page 18 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, from (1), we obtain
Therefore, the required relationship is given by,
Question 18: For what value of is the function defined by
continuous at x = 0? What about continuity at x = 1? Answer
The given function f is If f is continuous at x = 0, then
Therefore, there is no value of for which f is continuous at x = 0
Page 19 of 144
Class XII At x = 1,
Maths
f (1) = 4x + 1 = 4 1 + 1 = 5
Therefore, for any values of , f is continuous at x = 1
Question 19: Show that the function defined by Here Answer The given function is It is evident that g is defined at all integral points. Let n be an integer. Then, is discontinuous at all integral point.
denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to x.
The left hand limit of f at x = n is,
The right hand limit of f at x = n is,
It is observed that the left and right hand limits of f at x = n do not coincide. Therefore, f is not continuous at x = n Hence, g is discontinuous at all integral points.
Question 20: Is the function defined by Answer The given function is continuous at x = p?
Page 20 of 144
Class XII
Maths
It is evident that f is defined at x = p
Therefore, the given function f is continuous at x =
Question 21: Discuss the continuity of the following functions. (a) f (x) = sin x + cos x (b) f (x) = sin x cos x (c) f (x) = sin x cos x Answer It is known that if g and h are two continuous functions, then are also continuous. It has to proved first that g (x) = sin x and h (x) = cos x are continuous functions. Let g (x) = sin x It is evident that g (x) = sin x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Put x = c + h If x c, then h 0 Page 21 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, g is a continuous function. Let h (x) = cos x It is evident that h (x) = cos x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Put x = c + h If x c, then h 0 h (c) = cos c
Therefore, h is a continuous function. Therefore, it can be concluded that (a) f (x) = g (x) + h (x) = sin x + cos x is a continuous function (b) f (x) = g (x) h (x) = sin x cos x is a continuous function (c) f (x) = g (x) h (x) = sin x cos x is a continuous function
Page 22 of 144
Maths
Discuss the continuity of the cosine, cosecant, secant and cotangent functions, Answer It is known that if g and h are two continuous functions, then
It has to be proved first that g (x) = sin x and h (x) = cos x are continuous functions. Let g (x) = sin x It is evident that g (x) = sin x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Put x = c + h If x c, then h 0
Therefore, g is a continuous function. Let h (x) = cos x It is evident that h (x) = cos x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Put x = c + h If x c, then h 0 h (c) = cos c
Page 23 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, h (x) = cos x is continuous function. It can be concluded that,
Therefore, cosecant is continuous except at x = np, n Z
Therefore, secant is continuous except at
Therefore, cotangent is continuous except at x = np, n Z
Question 23: Find the points of discontinuity of f, where
Page 24 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
The given function f is It is evident that f is defined at all points of the real line. Let c be a real number. Case I:
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x > 0 Case III:
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 0 From the above observations, it can be concluded that f is continuous at all points of the real line. Thus, f has no point of discontinuity.
Page 25 of 144
Maths
Determine if f defined by
is a continuous function? Answer
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x 0 Case II:
Page 26 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 0 From the above observations, it can be concluded that f is continuous at every point of the real line. Thus, f is a continuous function.
Question 25: Examine the continuity of f, where f is defined by
Answer
Page 27 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, f is continuous at all points x, such that x 0 Case II:
Therefore, f is continuous at x = 0 From the above observations, it can be concluded that f is continuous at every point of the real line. Thus, f is a continuous function.
Question 26: Find the values of k so that the function f is continuous at the indicated point.
Answer
The given function f is
The given function f is continuous at
, if f is defined at
and if the value of the f
at
equals the limit of f at
Page 28 of 144
Class XII
Maths
It is evident that f is defined at
and
Therefore, the required value of k is 6.
Answer
The given function is The given function f is continuous at x = 2, if f is defined at x = 2 and if the value of f at x = 2 equals the limit of f at x = 2 It is evident that f is defined at x = 2 and
Page 29 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the required value of
Answer
The given function is The given function f is continuous at x = p, if f is defined at x = p and if the value of f at x = p equals the limit of f at x = p It is evident that f is defined at x = p and
Page 30 of 144
Maths
Find the values of k so that the function f is continuous at the indicated point.
Answer
The given function f is The given function f is continuous at x = 5, if f is defined at x = 5 and if the value of f at x = 5 equals the limit of f at x = 5 It is evident that f is defined at x = 5 and
Question 30: Find the values of a and b such that the function defined by
is a continuous function.
Page 31 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
The given function f is It is evident that the given function f is defined at all points of the real line. If f is a continuous function, then f is continuous at all real numbers. In particular, f is continuous at x = 2 and x = 10 Since f is continuous at x = 2, we obtain
Since f is continuous at x = 10, we obtain
On subtracting equation (1) from equation (2), we obtain 8a = 16
a=2
By putting a = 2 in equation (1), we obtain 22+b=5
4+b=5
Page 32 of 144
Class XII
Maths
b=1
Therefore, the values of a and b for which f is a continuous function are 2 and 1 respectively.
Question 31: Show that the function defined by f (x) = cos (x2) is a continuous function. Answer The given function is f (x) = cos (x2) This function f is defined for every real number and f can be written as the composition of two functions as, f = g o h, where g (x) = cos x and h (x) = x2
It has to be first proved that g (x) = cos x and h (x) = x2 are continuous functions. It is evident that g is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Then, g (c) = cos c
Therefore, g (x) = cos x is continuous function.
Page 33 of 144
Class XII h (x) = x2
Maths
Clearly, h is defined for every real number. Let k be a real number, then h (k) = k2
Therefore, h is a continuous function. It is known that for real valued functions g and h,such that (g o h) is defined at c, if g is continuous at c and if f is continuous at g (c), then (f o g) is continuous at c. Therefore, is a continuous function.
Question 32: Show that the function defined by Answer The given function is This function f is defined for every real number and f can be written as the composition of two functions as, f = g o h, where is a continuous function.
It has to be first proved that
are continuous functions.
Clearly, g is defined for all real numbers. Let c be a real number. Case I:
Page 34 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, g is continuous at all points x, such that x < 0 Case II:
Therefore, g is continuous at all points x, such that x > 0 Case III:
Therefore, g is continuous at x = 0 From the above three observations, it can be concluded that g is continuous at all points. h (x) = cos x It is evident that h (x) = cos x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Put x = c + h If x c, then h 0 h (c) = cos c
Therefore, h (x) = cos x is a continuous function. It is known that for real valued functions g and h,such that (g o h) is defined at c, if g is continuous at c and if f is continuous at g (c), then (f o g) is continuous at c.
Page 35 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore,
is a continuous function.
Question 33: Examine that Answer is a continuous function.
This function f is defined for every real number and f can be written as the composition of two functions as, f = g o h, where
It has to be proved first that
are continuous functions.
Page 36 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, g is continuous at x = 0 From the above three observations, it can be concluded that g is continuous at all points. h (x) = sin x It is evident that h (x) = sin x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real number. Put x = c + k If x c, then k 0 h (c) = sin c
Therefore, h is a continuous function. It is known that for real valued functions g and h,such that (g o h) is defined at c, if g is continuous at c and if f is continuous at g (c), then (f o g) is continuous at c. Therefore, is a continuous function.
Question 34: Find all the points of discontinuity of f defined by Answer The given function is .
Page 37 of 144
Class XII
Maths
The two functions, g and h, are defined as
Then, f = g h The continuity of g and h is examined first.
Therefore, g is continuous at x = 0 From the above three observations, it can be concluded that g is continuous at all points.
Clearly, h is defined for every real number. Page 38 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Let c be a real number. Case I:
Therefore, h is continuous at all points x, such that x < 1 Case II:
Therefore, h is continuous at all points x, such that x > 1 Case III:
Therefore, h is continuous at x = 1 From the above three observations, it can be concluded that h is continuous at all points of the real line. g and h are continuous functions. Therefore, f = g h is also a continuous function. Therefore, f has no point of discontinuity.
Page 39 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Exercise 5.2
Question 1: Differentiate the functions with respect to x.
Answer
Thus, f is a composite of two functions.
Alternate method
Page 40 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
Thus, f is a composite function of two functions. Put t = u (x) = sin x
By chain rule, Alternate method
Answer
Thus, f is a composite function of two functions, u and v. Put t = u (x) = ax + b
Hence, by chain rule, we obtain
Page 41 of 144
Class XII Alternate method
Maths
Answer
Thus, f is a composite function of three functions, u, v, and w.
Hence, by chain rule, we obtain
Page 42 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Alternate method
Answer
The given function is h (x) = cos (cx + d)
, where g (x) = sin (ax + b) and
Page 43 of 144
Class XII
Maths
g is a composite function of two functions, u and v.
Therefore, by chain rule, we obtain
h is a composite function of two functions, p and q.
Put y = p (x) = cx + d
Therefore, by chain rule, we obtain
Page 44 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer The given function is .
Answer
Page 45 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Clearly, f is a composite function of two functions, u and v, such that
Page 46 of 144
Class XII
Maths
By using chain rule, we obtain
Alternate method
Question 9: Prove that the function f given by is notdifferentiable at x = 1. Answer The given function is
Page 47 of 144
Class XII
Maths
It is known that a function f is differentiable at a point x = c in its domain if both
are finite and equal. To check the differentiability of the given function at x = 1, consider the left hand limit of f at x = 1
Since the left and right hand limits of f at x = 1 are not equal, f is not differentiable at x =1
Question 10: Prove that the greatest integer function defined by differentiable at x = 1 and x = 2. Answer The given function f is It is known that a function f is differentiable at a point x = c in its domain if both is not
are finite and equal. To check the differentiability of the given function at x = 1, consider the left hand limit of f at x = 1
Page 48 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Since the left and right hand limits of f at x = 1 are not equal, f is not differentiable at x=1 To check the differentiability of the given function at x = 2, consider the left hand limit of f at x = 2
Since the left and right hand limits of f at x = 2 are not equal, f is not differentiable at x =2
Page 49 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Find
Answer The given relationship is Differentiating this relationship with respect to x, we obtain
Question 2:
Find
Page 50 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 3:
Find
Using chain rule, we obtain From (1) and (2), we obtain
and
Question 4:
Find
Page 51 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
The given relationship is Differentiating this relationship with respect to x, we obtain
Question 5:
Find
[Derivative of constant function is 0]
Page 52 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 6:
Find
Question 7:
Find
Page 53 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
The given relationship is Differentiating this relationship with respect to x, we obtain
Using chain rule, we obtain
From (1), (2), and (3), we obtain
Question 8:
Find
Page 54 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Find
Answer
The given relationship is
Differentiating this relationship with respect to x, we obtain
The function,
, is of the form of
Therefore, by quotient rule, we obtain
Page 55 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Also,
Question 10:
Find
Answer
Page 56 of 144
Class XII
Maths
It is known that, Comparing equations (1) and (2), we obtain
Question 11:
Find
x Answer The given relationship is,
Page 57 of 144
Class XII
Maths
On comparing L.H.S. and R.H.S. of the above relationship, we obtain
Question 12:
Find
Answer
Page 58 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Page 59 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Alternate method
Page 60 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 13:
Find
Answer
Page 61 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 14:
Find
Answer
lationship is
Page 62 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 15:
Find
Answer
Page 63 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Page 64 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Differentiate the following w.r.t. x:
Answer
Let By using the quotient rule, we obtain
Answer Let By using the chain rule, we obtain
Page 65 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 2: Show that the function given by f(x) = e2x is strictly increasing on R. Answer Let be any two numbers in R.
Then, we have:
Hence, f is strictly increasing on R.
Page 66 of 144
Class XII Answer Let
Maths
By using the chain rule, we obtain
Page 67 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Answer Let Then, By differentiating this relationship with respect to x, we obtain
Page 68 of 144
Class XII
Maths
,x>1
Page 69 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
Let By using the quotient rule, we obtain
Page 70 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Differentiate the function with respect to x.
Answer
Taking logarithm on both the sides, we obtain
Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we obtain
Answer
Page 71 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 72 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
u = xx Taking logarithm on both the sides, we obtain
v = 2sin x Taking logarithm on both the sides with respect to x, we obtain
Page 73 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 74 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 75 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Page 76 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, from (1), (2), and (3), we obtain
Answer
u = (log x)x
Page 77 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Page 78 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 79 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 80 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer
Page 81 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Page 82 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
Page 83 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 12:
Find
of function.
Page 84 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Answer The given function is Let xy = u and yx = v Then, the function becomes u + v = 1
Page 85 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 13:
Find
of function.
Answer The given function is Taking logarithm on both the sides, we obtain
Question 14:
Find
of function. Page 86 of 144
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII
Maths
Differentiating both sides, we obtain
Question 15:
Find
of function.
Page 87 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 16: Find the derivative of the function given by find Answer The given relationship is Taking logarithm on both the sides, we obtain . and hence
Page 88 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 17: Differentiate (i) By using product rule. (ii) By expanding the product to obtain a single polynomial. (iii By logarithmic differentiation. Do they all give the same answer? Answer in three ways mentioned below
(i)
Page 89 of 144
Class XII
Maths
(ii)
(iii) Taking logarithm on both the sides, we obtain
Page 90 of 144
Class XII
Maths
From the above three observations, it can be concluded that all the results of same.
are
Question 18: If u, v and w are functions of x, then show that
in two ways-first by repeated application of product rule, second by logarithmic differentiation. Answer Let By applying product rule, we obtain
Page 91 of 144
Class XII
Maths
By taking logarithm on both sides of the equation
, we obtain
Page 92 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: If x and y are connected parametrically by the equation, without eliminating the
parameter, find
Answer The given equations are
parameter, find
x = a cos , y = b cos Answer The given equations are x = a cos and y = b cos
Page 93 of 144
Class XII
Maths
parameter, find
x = sin t, y = cos 2t Answer The given equations are x = sin t and y = cos 2t
parameter, find
Answer
The given equations are
Page 94 of 144
Class XII
Maths
parameter, find
parameter, find
Page 95 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
parameter, find
Answer
Page 96 of 144
Class XII
Maths
Page 97 of 144
Class XII
Maths
parameter, find
Answer
Page 98 of 144
Class XII
Maths
parameter, find
Page 99 of 144
Class XII Answer
Maths
parameter, find
Page 100 of 144

Maths
If Answer The given equations are
Page 101 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Page 102 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Exercise 5.7
Question 1: Find the second order derivatives of the function.
Answer Let Then,
Answer Let Then,
Answer Let Then,
Page 103 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Answer Let Then,
Answer Let Then,
Page 104 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Answer Let
Then, Page 105 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Answer Let Then,
Answer Let Then,
Page 106 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Answer Let Then,
Answer Let Then,
Page 107 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 11:
If Answer It is given that, Then,
, prove that
Page 108 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 12:
If Answer
find
in terms of y alone.
It is given that, Then,
Page 109 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 13: If Answer It is given that, Then, , show that
Page 110 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 14:
If
show that
Page 111 of 144

Class XII Answer It is given that, Then,
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 15:
If Answer It is given that, Then,
, show that
Page 112 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 16:
If Answer
, show that
Page 113 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 17: If Answer The given relationship is Then, , show that
Hence, proved.
Page 114 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Verify Rolles Theorem for the function Answer The given function, 2] and is differentiable in (4, 2). , being a polynomial function, is continuous in [4,
f (4) = f (2) = 0
The value of f (x) at 4 and 2 coincides.
Rolles Theorem states that there is a point c (4, 2) such that
Hence, Rolles Theorem is verified for the given function.
Page 115 of 144

Maths
Examine if Rolles Theorem is applicable to any of the following functions. Can you say some thing about the converse of Rolles Theorem from these examples? (i) (ii) (iii) Answer By Rolles Theorem, for a function (a) f is continuous on [a, b] (b) f is differentiable on (a, b) (c) f (a) = f (b) , if
then, there exists some c (a, b) such that
Therefore, Rolles Theorem is not applicable to those functions that do not satisfy any of the three conditions of the hypothesis. (i) It is evident that the given function f (x) is not continuous at every integral point. In particular, f(x) is not continuous at x = 5 and x = 9
f (x) is not continuous in [5, 9].
The differentiability of f in (5, 9) is checked as follows.
Page 116 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Let n be an integer such that n (5, 9).
Since the left and right hand limits of f at x = n are not equal, f is not differentiable at x =n
f is not differentiable in (5, 9).
It is observed that f does not satisfy all the conditions of the hypothesis of Rolles Theorem. Hence, Rolles Theorem is not applicable for (ii) It is evident that the given function f (x) is not continuous at every integral point. In particular, f(x) is not continuous at x = 2 and x = 2 .
Page 117 of 144

Class XII
Maths
It is observed that f does not satisfy all the conditions of the hypothesis of Rolles Theorem. Hence, Rolles Theorem is not applicable for (iii) It is evident that f, being a polynomial function, is continuous in [1, 2] and is differentiable in (1, 2). .
f (1) f (2)
It is observed that f does not satisfy a condition of the hypothesis of Rolles Theorem.
Page 118 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, Rolles Theorem is not applicable for
Question 3: If prove that Answer It is given that is a differentiable function. is a differentiable function and if . does not vanish anywhere, then
Since every differentiable function is a continuous function, we obtain (a) f is continuous on [5, 5]. (b) f is differentiable on (5, 5).
Therefore, by the Mean Value Theorem, there exists c (5, 5) such that
It is also given that
does not vanish anywhere.
Hence, proved.
Question 4: Verify Mean Value Theorem, if and . in the interval , where
Page 119 of 144

Class XII Answer The given function is
Maths
f, being a polynomial function, is continuous in [1, 4] and is differentiable in (1, 4) whose derivative is 2x 4.
Mean Value Theorem states that there is a point c (1, 4) such that
Hence, Mean Value Theorem is verified for the given function.
Question 5: Verify Mean Value Theorem, if b = 3. Find all Answer The given function f is f, being a polynomial function, is continuous in [1, 3] and is differentiable in (1, 3) whose derivative is 3x2 10x 3. for which in the interval [a, b], where a = 1 and
Page 120 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Mean Value Theorem states that there exist a point c (1, 3) such that
Hence, Mean Value Theorem is verified for the given function and only point for which
is the
Question 6: Examine the applicability of Mean Value Theorem for all three functions given in the above exercise 2. Answer Mean Value Theorem states that for a function (a) f is continuous on [a, b] (b) f is differentiable on (a, b) , if
then, there exists some c (a, b) such that
Therefore, Mean Value Theorem is not applicable to those functions that do not satisfy any of the two conditions of the hypothesis.
Page 121 of 144

Class XII
Maths
(i) It is evident that the given function f (x) is not continuous at every integral point. In particular, f(x) is not continuous at x = 5 and x = 9
It is observed that f does not satisfy all the conditions of the hypothesis of Mean Value Theorem. Hence, Mean Value Theorem is not applicable for (ii) It is evident that the given function f (x) is not continuous at every integral point. .
Page 122 of 144

Class XII
Maths
In particular, f(x) is not continuous at x = 2 and x = 2
It is observed that f does not satisfy all the conditions of the hypothesis of Mean Value Theorem. Hence, Mean Value Theorem is not applicable for (iii) It is evident that f, being a polynomial function, is continuous in [1, 2] and is differentiable in (1, 2). It is observed that f satisfies all the conditions of the hypothesis of Mean Value Theorem. .
Page 123 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, Mean Value Theorem is applicable for It can be proved as follows.
Page 124 of 144

Class XII
Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability Miscellaneous Solutions
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Question 2:
Answer
Question 3:
Answer
Page 125 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
Answer
Page 126 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 5:
Answer
Page 127 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 6:
Answer
Page 128 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Therefore, equation (1) becomes
Question 7:
Answer
Page 129 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 8: , for some constant a and b. Answer
By using chain rule, we obtain
Question 9:
Answer
Page 130 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 10: , for some fixed Answer and
Page 131 of 144

Class XII
Maths
s = aa Since a is constant, aa is also a constant.
From (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5), we obtain
Page 132 of 144

Class XII Question 11: , for Answer
Maths
Differentiating with respect to x, we obtain
Also,
Page 133 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Substituting the expressions of
in equation (1), we obtain
Question 12:
Find Answer
, if
Question 13:
Find Answer
, if
Page 134 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 14: If , for, 1 < x <1, prove that
Answer
It is given that,
Page 135 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 15: If , for some prove that
is a constant independent of a and b. Answer It is given that, Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we obtain
Page 136 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Page 137 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Hence, proved.
Question 16:
If Answer
with
prove that
Page 138 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Then, equation (1) reduces to
Hence, proved.
Question 17:
If Answer
and
, find
Page 139 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Question 18: If Answer , show that exists for all real x, and find it.
It is known that, Therefore, when x 0, In this case, When x < 0, and hence,
Page 140 of 144

Class XII
Maths
In this case, Thus, for ,
and hence, exists for all real x and is given by,
Question 19:
Using mathematical induction prove that Answer
for all positive integers n.
For n = 1,
P(n) is true for n = 1
Let P(k) is true for some positive integer k.
That is, It has to be proved that P(k + 1) is also true.
Page 141 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Thus, P(k + 1) is true whenever P (k) is true. Therefore, by the principle of mathematical induction, the statement P(n) is true for every positive integer n.
Hence, proved.
Question 20: Using the fact that sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B and the differentiation, obtain the sum formula for cosines. Answer
Question 22:
If Answer
, prove that
Page 142 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Thus,
Question 23:
If Answer It is given that,
, show that
Page 143 of 144

Class XII
Maths
Page 144 of 144

Class XII
Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives Exercise 6.1
Maths
Question 1: Find the rate of change of the area of a circle with respect to its radius r when (a) r = 3 cm (b) r = 4 cm Answer The area of a circle (A) with radius (r) is given by,
Now, the rate of change of the area with respect to its radius is given by,
1. When r = 3 cm,
Hence, the area of the circle is changing at the rate of 6 cm2/s when its radius is 3 cm. 2. When r = 4 cm,
Hence, the area of the circle is changing at the rate of 8 cm2/s when its radius is 4 cm.
Question 2: The volume of a cube is increasing at the rate of 8 cm3/s. How fast is the surface area increasing when the length of an edge is 12 cm? Answer Let x be the length of a side, V be the volume, and s be the surface area of the cube. Then, V = x3 and S = 6x2 where x is a function of time t.
It is given that
Then, by using the chain rule, we have:
Page 1 of 138
Class XII
Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives
Maths
Thus, when x = 12 cm, Hence, if the length of the edge of the cube is 12 cm, then the surface area is increasing
at the rate of
cm2/s.
Question 3: The radius of a circle is increasing uniformly at the rate of 3 cm/s. Find the rate at which the area of the circle is increasing when the radius is 10 cm. Answer The area of a circle (A) with radius (r) is given by,
Now, the rate of change of area (A) with respect to time (t) is given by,
It is given that,
Page 2 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Thus, when r = 10 cm,
Hence, the rate at which the area of the circle is increasing when the radius is 10 cm is 60 cm2/s.
Question 4: An edge of a variable cube is increasing at the rate of 3 cm/s. How fast is the volume of the cube increasing when the edge is 10 cm long? Answer Let x be the length of a side and V be the volume of the cube. Then, V = x3.
(By chain rule)
It is given that,
Thus, when x = 10 cm,
Page 3 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the volume of the cube is increasing at the rate of 900 cm3/s when the edge is 10 cm long.
Question 5: A stone is dropped into a quiet lake and waves move in circles at the speed of 5 cm/s. At the instant when the radius of the circular wave is 8 cm, how fast is the enclosed area increasing? Answer The area of a circle (A) with radius (r) is given by .
Therefore, the rate of change of area (A) with respect to time (t) is given by,
[By chain rule]
It is given that Thus, when r = 8 cm,
Hence, when the radius of the circular wave is 8 cm, the enclosed area is increasing at the rate of 80 cm2/s.
Question 6: The radius of a circle is increasing at the rate of 0.7 cm/s. What is the rate of increase of its circumference? Answer The circumference of a circle (C) with radius (r) is given by C = 2r. Therefore, the rate of change of circumference (C) with respect to time (t) is given by,
(By chain rule)
Page 4 of 138
Class XII
Maths
It is given that
Hence, the rate of increase of the circumference
Question 7: The length x of a rectangle is decreasing at the rate of 5 cm/minute and the width y is increasing at the rate of 4 cm/minute. When x = 8 cm and y = 6 cm, find the rates of change of (a) the perimeter, and (b) the area of the rectangle. Answer Since the length (x) is decreasing at the rate of 5 cm/minute and the width (y) is increasing at the rate of 4 cm/minute, we have:
and (a) The perimeter (P) of a rectangle is given by, P = 2(x + y)
Hence, the perimeter is decreasing at the rate of 2 cm/min. (b) The area (A) of a rectangle is given by, A=xy
When x = 8 cm and y = 6 cm, Hence, the area of the rectangle is increasing at the rate of 2 cm2/min.
Page 5 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 8: A balloon, which always remains spherical on inflation, is being inflated by pumping in 900 cubic centimetres of gas per second. Find the rate at which the radius of the balloon increases when the radius is 15 cm. Answer The volume of a sphere (V) with radius (r) is given by,
Rate of change of volume (V) with respect to time (t) is given by,
[By chain rule]
It is given that
Therefore, when radius = 15 cm,
Hence, the rate at which the radius of the balloon increases when the radius is 15 cm
is
Page 6 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 9: A balloon, which always remains spherical has a variable radius. Find the rate at which its volume is increasing with the radius when the later is 10 cm. Answer
The volume of a sphere (V) with radius (r) is given by
Rate of change of volume (V) with respect to its radius (r) is given by,
Therefore, when radius = 10 cm,
Hence, the volume of the balloon is increasing at the rate of 400 cm3/s.
Question 10: A ladder 5 m long is leaning against a wall. The bottom of the ladder is pulled along the ground, away from the wall, at the rate of 2 cm/s. How fast is its height on the wall decreasing when the foot of the ladder is 4 m away from the wall? Answer Let y m be the height of the wall at which the ladder touches. Also, let the foot of the ladder be x maway from the wall. Then, by Pythagoras theorem, we have: x2 + y2 = 25 [Length of the ladder = 5 m]
Then, the rate of change of height (y) with respect to time (t) is given by,
It is given that
Page 7 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Now, when x = 4 m, we have:
Hence, the height of the ladder on the wall is decreasing at the rate of
Question 11: A particle moves along the curve . Find the points on the curve at which the y-
coordinate is changing 8 times as fast as the x-coordinate. Answer The equation of the curve is given as:
The rate of change of the position of the particle with respect to time (t) is given by,
When the y-coordinate of the particle changes 8 times as fast as the
x-coordinate i.e.,
, we have:
Page 8 of 138
Class XII
Maths
When
When
Hence, the points required on the curve are (4, 11) and
Question 12:
The radius of an air bubble is increasing at the rate of
cm/s. At what rate is the
volume of the bubble increasing when the radius is 1 cm? Answer The air bubble is in the shape of a sphere. Now, the volume of an air bubble (V) with radius (r) is given by,
The rate of change of volume (V) with respect to time (t) is given by,
It is given that Therefore, when r = 1 cm,
Hence, the rate at which the volume of the bubble increases is 2 cm3/s.
Question 13:
Page 9 of 138
Class XII
Maths
A balloon, which always remains spherical, has a variable diameter rate of change of its volume with respect to x. Answer The volume of a sphere (V) with radius (r) is given by,
Find the
It is given that:
Diameter
Hence, the rate of change of volume with respect to x is as
Question 14: Sand is pouring from a pipe at the rate of 12 cm3/s. The falling sand forms a cone on the ground in such a way that the height of the cone is always one-sixth of the radius of the base. How fast is the height of the sand cone increasing when the height is 4 cm? Answer The volume of a cone (V) with radius (r) and height (h) is given by,
It is given that,
Page 10 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The rate of change of volume with respect to time (t) is given by,
[By chain rule]
It is also given that
Therefore, when h = 4 cm, we have:
Hence, when the height of the sand cone is 4 cm, its height is increasing at the rate
of
Question 15: The total cost C (x) in Rupees associated with the production of x units of an item is given by
Find the marginal cost when 17 units are produced. Answer Marginal cost is the rate of change of total cost with respect to output.
Marginal cost (MC)
When x = 17, MC = 0.021 (172) 0.006 (17) + 15
Page 11 of 138
Class XII
Maths
= 0.021(289) 0.006(17) + 15 = 6.069 0.102 + 15 = 20.967 Hence, when 17 units are produced, the marginal cost is Rs. 20.967.
Question 16: The total revenue in Rupees received from the sale of x units of a product is given by
Find the marginal revenue when x = 7. Answer Marginal revenue is the rate of change of total revenue with respect to the number of units sold.
Marginal Revenue (MR)
= 13(2x) + 26 = 26x + 26
When x = 7, MR = 26(7) + 26 = 182 + 26 = 208 Hence, the required marginal revenue is Rs 208.
Question 17: The rate of change of the area of a circle with respect to its radius r at r = 6 cm is (A) 10 (B) 12 (C) 8 (D) 11 Answer The area of a circle (A) with radius (r) is given by,
Therefore, the rate of change of the area with respect to its radius r is
Page 12 of 138
Class XII
Maths
When r = 6 cm,
Hence, the required rate of change of the area of a circle is 12 cm2/s. The correct answer is B.
Question 18: The total revenue in Rupees received from the sale of x units of a product is given by . The marginal revenue, when (A) 116 (B) 96 (C) 90 (D) 126 Answer Marginal revenue is the rate of change of total revenue with respect to the number of units sold. is
Marginal Revenue (MR)
= 3(2x) + 36 = 6x + 36
When x = 15,
MR = 6(15) + 36 = 90 + 36 = 126 Hence, the required marginal revenue is Rs 126. The correct answer is D.
Page 13 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Show that the function given by f(x) = 3x + 17 is strictly increasing on R. Answer Let be any two numbers in R.
Then, we have:
Alternate method: f'(x) = 3 > 0, in every interval of R. Thus, the function is strictly increasing on R.
Question 2: Show that the function given by f(x) = e2x is strictly increasing on R. Answer Let be any two numbers in R.
Then, we have:
Question 3: Show that the function given by f(x) = sin x is
(a) strictly increasing in
(b) strictly decreasing in
(c) neither increasing nor decreasing in (0, ) Answer The given function is f(x) = sin x.
Page 14 of 138
Class XII
Maths
(a) Since for each
we have
Hence, f is strictly increasing in
(b) Since for each
, we have
Hence, f is strictly decreasing in
(c) From the results obtained in (a) and (b), it is clear that f is neither increasing nor decreasing in (0, ).
Question 4: Find the intervals in which the function f given by f(x) = 2x2 3x is (a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing Answer The given function is f(x) = 2x2 3x.
Now, the point
divides the real line into two disjoint intervals i.e.,
and
In interval
Hence, the given function (f) is strictly decreasing in interval
In interval
Page 15 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the given function (f) is strictly increasing in interval
Question 5: Find the intervals in which the function f given by f(x) = 2x3 3x2 36x + 7 is (a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing Answer The given function is f(x) = 2x3 3x2 36x + 7.
x = 2, 3
The points x = 2 and x = 3 divide the real line into three disjoint intervals i.e.,
In intervals (2, 3), is negative.
is positive while in interval
Hence, the given function (f) is strictly increasing in intervals , while function (f) is strictly decreasing in interval (2, 3).
Question 6: Find the intervals in which the following functions are strictly increasing or decreasing: (a) x2 + 2x 5 (b) 10 6x 2x2 (c) 2x3 9x2 12x + 1 (d) 6 9x x2 (e) (x + 1)3 (x 3)3
Page 16 of 138
Class XII Answer (a) We have,
Maths
Now, x = 1 Point x = 1 divides the real line into two disjoint intervals i.e., In interval
f is strictly decreasing in interval
Thus, f is strictly decreasing for x < 1. In interval
f is strictly increasing in interval
Thus, f is strictly increasing for x > 1. (b) We have, f(x) = 10 6x 2x2
Page 17 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The point
divides the real line into two disjoint intervals
i.e.,
In interval
i.e., when
f is strictly increasing for
In interval
i.e., when
f is strictly decreasing for
(c) We have, f(x) = 2x3 9x2 12x + 1
Points x = 1 and x = 2 divide the real line into three disjoint intervals i.e., In intervals . i.e., when x < 2 and x > 1,
Page 18 of 138
Class XII
Maths
f is strictly decreasing for x < 2 and x > 1.
Now, in interval (2, 1) i.e., when 2 < x < 1,
(d) We have,
The point
divides the real line into two disjoint intervals i.e.,
In interval
i.e., for
In interval
i.e., for
Page 19 of 138
Class XII
Maths
f is strictly decreasing for
(e) We have, f(x) = (x + 1)3 (x 3)3
The points x = 1, x = 1, and x = 3 divide the real line into four disjoint intervals i.e., In intervals , (1, 1), (1, 3), and and (1, 1), . .
f is strictly decreasing in intervals
and (1, 1).
In intervals (1, 3) and
f is strictly increasing in intervals (1, 3) and
Page 20 of 138
Maths
Show that domain. Answer We have,
, is an increasing function of x throughout its
Since x > 1, point x = 0 divides the domain (1, ) in two disjoint intervals i.e., 1 < x < 0 and x > 0. When 1 < x < 0, we have:
Also, when x > 0:
Hence, function f is increasing throughout this domain.
Question 8:
Page 21 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Find the values of x for which Answer We have,
is an increasing function.
The points x = 0, x = 1, and x = 2 divide the real line into four disjoint intervals i.e.,
In intervals
y is strictly decreasing in intervals
However, in intervals (0, 1) and (2, ),
y is strictly increasing in intervals (0, 1) and (2, ).
y is strictly increasing for 0 < x < 1 and x > 2.
Question 9:
Prove that Answer We have,
is an increasing function of in
Page 22 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Since cos 4, cos = 0.
Now,
Page 23 of 138
Class XII
Maths
In interval
, we have cos > 0. Also, 4 > cos 4 cos > 0.
Therefore, y is strictly increasing in interval
Also, the given function is continuous at
Hence, y is increasing in interval
Question 10: Prove that the logarithmic function is strictly increasing on (0, ). Answer
It is clear that for x > 0, Hence, f(x) = log x is strictly increasing in interval (0, ).
Question 11: Prove that the function f given by f(x) = x2 x + 1 is neither strictly increasing nor strictly decreasing on (1, 1). Answer
Page 24 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The given function is f(x) = x2 x + 1.
The point
divides the interval (1, 1) into two disjoint intervals
i.e.,
Now, in interval
Therefore, f is strictly decreasing in interval
However, in interval
Therefore, f is strictly increasing in interval
Hence, f is neither strictly increasing nor decreasing in interval (1, 1).
Question 12:
Which of the following functions are strictly decreasing on (A) cos x (B) cos 2x (C) cos 3x (D) tan x Answer (A) Let
In interval
is strictly decreasing in interval
Page 25 of 138
Class XII
Maths
(B) Let
is strictly decreasing in interval (C) Let
The point
divides the interval
into two disjoint intervals
i.e., 0
f3 is strictly decreasing in interval
Page 26 of 138
Class XII
Maths
f3 is strictly increasing in interval
Hence, f3 is neither increasing nor decreasing in interval (D) Let
In interval
f4 is strictly increasing in interval
Therefore, functions cos x and cos 2x are strictly decreasing in Hence, the correct answers are A and B.
Question 13: On which of the following intervals is the function f given by decreasing? strictly
(A)
(B)
(C) Answer We have,
(D) None of these
Page 27 of 138
Class XII
Maths
In interval
Thus, function f is strictly increasing in interval (0, 1).
In interval
Thus, function f is strictly increasing in interval
f is strictly increasing in interval
Hence, function f is strictly decreasing in none of the intervals. The correct answer is D.
Question 14: Find the least value of a such that the function f given increasing on (1, 2). Answer We have, is strictly
Page 28 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Now, function f will be increasing in (1, 2), if
in (1, 2).
2x + a > 0
2x > a
Therefore, we have to find the least value of a such that
Thus, the least value of a for f to be increasing on (1, 2) is given by,
Hence, the required value of a is 2.
Question 15:
Page 29 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Let I be any interval disjoint from (1, 1). Prove that the function f given by
is strictly increasing on I. Answer We have,
The points x = 1 and x = 1 divide the real line in three disjoint intervals i.e., . In interval (1, 1), it is observed that:
f is strictly decreasing on
In intervals
, it is observed that:
Page 30 of 138
Class XII
Maths
f is strictly increasing on
Hence, function f is strictly increasing in interval I disjoint from (1, 1). Hence, the given result is proved.
Question 16:
Prove that the function f given by f(x) = log sin x is strictly increasing on
and
strictly decreasing on Answer We have,
In interval
f is strictly increasing in
Page 31 of 138
Class XII
Maths
In interval
f is strictly decreasing in
Question 17:
Prove that the function f given by f(x) = log cos x is strictly decreasing on
and
strictly increasing on Answer We have,
In interval
f is strictly decreasing on
In interval
Page 32 of 138
Class XII
Maths
f is strictly increasing on
Question 18: Prove that the function given by Answer We have, is increasing in R.
For any xR, (x 1)2 > 0.
Thus,
is always positive in R.
Hence, the given function (f) is increasing in R.
Question 19: The interval in which (A) Answer We have, (B) (2, 0) (C) is increasing is (D) (0, 2)
Page 33 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The points x = 0 and x = 2 divide the real line into three disjoint intervals i.e., In intervals is always positive.
f is decreasing on
In interval (0, 2),
f is strictly increasing on (0, 2).
Hence, f is strictly increasing in interval (0, 2). The correct answer is D.
Page 34 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = 3x4 4x at x = 4. Answer The given curve is y = 3x4 4x. Then, the slope of the tangent to the given curve at x = 4 is given by,
Question 2:
Find the slope of the tangent to the curve Answer
, x 2 at x = 10.
The given curve is
Thus, the slope of the tangent at x = 10 is given by,
Hence, the slope of the tangent at x = 10 is
Question 3: Find the slope of the tangent to curve y = x3 x + 1 at the point whose x-coordinate is 2. Answer
Page 35 of 138
Class XII The given curve is
Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives .
Maths
The slope of the tangent to a curve at (x0, y0) is It is given that x0 = 2.
Hence, the slope of the tangent at the point where the x-coordinate is 2 is given by,
Question 4: Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = x3 3x + 2 at the point whose xcoordinate is 3. Answer The given curve is .
The slope of the tangent to a curve at (x0, y0) is
Hence, the slope of the tangent at the point where the x-coordinate is 3 is given by,
Question 5:
Find the slope of the normal to the curve x = acos3, y = asin3 at Answer It is given that x = acos3 and y = asin3.
Page 36 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at
is given by,
Hence, the slope of the normal at
Question 6:
Find the slope of the normal to the curve x = 1 a sin , y = b cos2 at Answer It is given that x = 1 a sin and y = b cos2.
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at
is given by,
Page 37 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the slope of the normal at
Question 7: Find points at which the tangent to the curve y = x3 3x2 9x + 7 is parallel to the xaxis. Answer The equation of the given curve is
Now, the tangent is parallel to the x-axis if the slope of the tangent is zero.
When x = 3, y = (3)3 3 (3)2 9 (3) + 7 = 27 27 27 + 7 = 20. When x = 1, y = (1)3 3 (1)2 9 (1) + 7 = 1 3 + 9 + 7 = 12. Hence, the points at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis are (3, 20) and (1, 12).
Question 8: Find a point on the curve y = (x 2)2 at which the tangent is parallel to the chord joining the points (2, 0) and (4, 4). Answer If a tangent is parallel to the chord joining the points (2, 0) and (4, 4), then the slope of the tangent = the slope of the chord.
Page 38 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The slope of the chord is Now, the slope of the tangent to the given curve at a point (x, y) is given by,
Since the slope of the tangent = slope of the chord, we have:
Hence, the required point is (3, 1).
Question 9: Find the point on the curve y = x3 11x + 5 at which the tangent is y = x 11. Answer The equation of the given curve is y = x3 11x + 5. The equation of the tangent to the given curve is given as y = x 11 (which is of the form y = mx + c).
Slope of the tangent = 1
Now, the slope of the tangent to the given curve at the point (x, y) is given by,
Then, we have:
When x = 2, y = (2)3 11 (2) + 5 = 8 22 + 5 = 9. When x = 2, y = (2)3 11 (2) + 5 = 8 + 22 + 5 = 19.
Page 39 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required points are (2, 9) and (2, 19).
Question 10: Find the equation of all lines having slope 1 that are tangents to the curve
. Answer
The equation of the given curve is
The slope of the tangents to the given curve at any point (x, y) is given by,
If the slope of the tangent is 1, then we have:
When x = 0, y = 1 and when x = 2, y = 1. Thus, there are two tangents to the given curve having slope 1. These are passing through the points (0, 1) and (2, 1).
The equation of the tangent through (0, 1) is given by,
Page 40 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The equation of the tangent through (2, 1) is given by,
y 1 = 1 (x 2)
y1=x+2
y+x3=0
Hence, the equations of the required lines are y + x + 1 = 0 and y + x 3 = 0.
Question 11: Find the equation of all lines having slope 2 which are tangents to the
curve Answer
The slope of the tangent to the given curve at any point (x, y) is given by,
Page 41 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, there is no tangent to the given curve having slope 2.
Question 12: Find the equations of all lines having slope 0 which are tangent to the curve
. Answer
The slope of the tangent to the given curve at any point (x, y) is given by,
When x = 1,
The equation of the tangent through
is given by,
Page 42 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the equation of the required line is
Question 13:
Find points on the curve
at which the tangents are
(i) parallel to x-axis (ii) parallel to y-axis Answer
On differentiating both sides with respect to x, we have:
(i) The tangent is parallel to the x-axis if the slope of the tangent is i.e., 0 which is possible if x = 0.
Then,
for x = 0
Hence, the points at which the tangents are parallel to the x-axis are (0, 4) and (0, 4).
Page 43 of 138
Class XII
Maths
(ii) The tangent is parallel to the y-axis if the slope of the normal is 0, which
gives
y = 0.
Then,
for y = 0.
Hence, the points at which the tangents are parallel to the y-axis are (3, 0) and ( 3, 0).
Question 14: Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the given curves at the indicated points: (i) y = x4 6x3 + 13x2 10x + 5 at (0, 5) (ii) y = x4 6x3 + 13x2 10x + 5 at (1, 3) (iii) y = x3 at (1, 1) (iv) y = x2 at (0, 0)
(v) x = cos t, y = sin t at Answer (i) The equation of the curve is y = x4 6x3 + 13x2 10x + 5. On differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Thus, the slope of the tangent at (0, 5) is 10. The equation of the tangent is given as: y 5 = 10(x 0)
Page 44 of 138
Class XII
Maths
y 5 = 10x
10x + y = 5
The slope of the normal at (0, 5) is Therefore, the equation of the normal at (0, 5) is given as:
(ii) The equation of the curve is y = x4 6x3 + 13x2 10x + 5. On differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Thus, the slope of the tangent at (1, 3) is 2. The equation of the tangent is given as:
Page 45 of 138
Class XII
Maths
(iii) The equation of the curve is y = x3. On differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Thus, the slope of the tangent at (1, 1) is 3 and the equation of the tangent is given as:
(iv) The equation of the curve is y = x2. On differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Thus, the slope of the tangent at (0, 0) is 0 and the equation of the tangent is given as: y 0 = 0 (x 0)
y=0
Page 46 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The slope of the normal at (0, 0) is defined. Therefore, the equation of the normal at (x0, y0) = (0, 0) is given by
, which is not
(v) The equation of the curve is x = cos t, y = sin t.
The slope of the tangent at
is 1.
When
Thus, the equation of the tangent to the given curve at
is
The slope of the normal at
is
Page 47 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the equation of the normal to the given curve at
is
Question 15: Find the equation of the tangent line to the curve y = x2 2x + 7 which is (a) parallel to the line 2x y + 9 = 0 (b) perpendicular to the line 5y 15x = 13. Answer The equation of the given curve is On differentiating with respect to x, we get: .
(a) The equation of the line is 2x y + 9 = 0. 2x y + 9 = 0 y = 2x + 9 This is of the form y = mx + c. Slope of the line = 2 If a tangent is parallel to the line 2x y + 9 = 0, then the slope of the tangent is equal to the slope of the line. Therefore, we have: 2 = 2x 2
Now, x = 2 y=44+7=7 Thus, the equation of the tangent passing through (2, 7) is given by,
Page 48 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the equation of the tangent line to the given curve (which is parallel to line 2x y + 9 = 0) is .
(b) The equation of the line is 5y 15x = 13.
5y 15x = 13 This is of the form y = mx + c. Slope of the line = 3 If a tangent is perpendicular to the line 5y 15x = 13, then the slope of the tangent is
Thus, the equation of the tangent passing through
is given by,
Page 49 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the equation of the tangent line to the given curve (which is perpendicular to line 5y 15x = 13) is .
Question 16: Show that the tangents to the curve y = 7x3 + 11 at the points where x = 2 and x = 2 are parallel. Answer The equation of the given curve is y = 7x3 + 11.
The slope of the tangent to a curve at (x0, y0) is
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at the point where x = 2 is given by,
It is observed that the slopes of the tangents at the points where x = 2 and x = 2 are equal. Hence, the two tangents are parallel.
Question 17: Find the points on the curve y = x3 at which the slope of the tangent is equal to the ycoordinate of the point. Answer The equation of the given curve is y = x3.
The slope of the tangent at the point (x, y) is given by,
When the slope of the tangent is equal to the y-coordinate of the point, then y = 3x2. Also, we have y = x3.
Page 50 of 138
Class XII 3x2 = x3 x2 (x 3) = 0 x = 0, x = 3
Maths
When x = 0, then y = 0 and when x = 3, then y = 3(3)2 = 27. Hence, the required points are (0, 0) and (3, 27).
Question 18: For the curve y = 4x3 2x5, find all the points at which the tangents passes through the origin. Answer The equation of the given curve is y = 4x3 2x5.
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at a point (x, y) is 12x2 10x4. The equation of the tangent at (x, y) is given by,
When the tangent passes through the origin (0, 0), then X = Y = 0. Therefore, equation (1) reduces to:
Also, we have
When x = 0, y = When x = 1, y = 4 (1)3 2 (1)5 = 2. When x = 1, y = 4 (1)3 2 (1)5 = 2.
Page 51 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required points are (0, 0), (1, 2), and (1, 2).
Question 19: Find the points on the curve x2 + y2 2x 3 = 0 at which the tangents are parallel to the x-axis. Answer The equation of the given curve is x2 + y2 2x 3 = 0. On differentiating with respect to x, we have:
Now, the tangents are parallel to the x-axis if the slope of the tangent is 0.
But, x2 + y2 2x 3 = 0 for x = 1. y2 = 4 Hence, the points at which the tangents are parallel to the x-axis are (1, 2) and (1, 2).
Question 20: Find the equation of the normal at the point (am2, am3) for the curve ay2 = x3. Answer The equation of the given curve is ay2 = x3. On differentiating with respect to x, we have:
Page 52 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The slope of a tangent to the curve at (x0, y0) is
The slope of the tangent to the given curve at (am2, am3) is
Slope of normal at (am2, am3)
= Hence, the equation of the normal at (am2, am3) is given by,
y am3 =
Question 21: Find the equation of the normals to the curve y = x3 + 2x + 6 which are parallel to the line x + 14y + 4 = 0. Answer The equation of the given curve is y = x3 + 2x + 6. The slope of the tangent to the given curve at any point (x, y) is given by,
Slope of the normal to the given curve at any point (x, y)
The equation of the given line is x + 14y + 4 = 0.
Page 53 of 138
Class XII
Maths
x + 14y + 4 = 0
(which is of the form y = mx + c)
Slope of the given line = If the normal is parallel to the line, then we must have the slope of the normal being equal to the slope of the line.
When x = 2, y = 8 + 4 + 6 = 18. When x = 2, y = 8 4 + 6 = 6.
Therefore, there are two normals to the given curve with slope the points (2, 18) and (2, 6). Thus, the equation of the normal through (2, 18) is given by,
and passing through
And, the equation of the normal through (2, 6) is given by,
Hence, the equations of the normals to the given curve (which are parallel to the given line) are
Page 54 of 138
Maths
Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point (at2, 2at). Answer The equation of the given parabola is y2 = 4ax. On differentiating y2 = 4ax with respect to x, we have:
The slope of the tangent at Then, the equation of the tangent at
is is given by,
y 2at =
Now, the slope of the normal at
is given by,
Thus, the equation of the normal at (at2, 2at) is given as:
Question 23: Prove that the curves x = y2 and xy = k cut at right angles if 8k2 = 1. [Hint: Two curves intersect at right angle if the tangents to the curves at the point of intersection are perpendicular to each other.]
Page 55 of 138
Class XII Answer
Maths
The equations of the given curves are given as Putting x = y2 in xy = k, we get:
Thus, the point of intersection of the given curves is Differentiating x = y with respect to x, we have:
2
Therefore, the slope of the tangent to the curve x = y2 at On differentiating xy = k with respect to x, we have:
is
Slope of the tangent to the curve xy = k at
is given by,
We know that two curves intersect at right angles if the tangents to the curves at the
point of intersection i.e., at
are perpendicular to each other.
This implies that we should have the product of the tangents as 1. Thus, the given two curves cut at right angles if the product of the slopes of their
respective tangents at
is 1.
Page 56 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the given two curves cut at right angels if 8k2 = 1.
Question 24:
Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the hyperbola point Answer .
at the
Differentiating
with respect to x, we have:
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at Then, the equation of the tangent at
is is given by,
Page 57 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Now, the slope of the normal at
is given by,
Hence, the equation of the normal at
is given by,
Question 25: Find the equation of the tangent to the curve 2y + 5 = 0. Answer The equation of the given curve is The slope of the tangent to the given curve at any point (x, y) is given by, which is parallel to the line 4x
Page 58 of 138
Class XII
Maths
The equation of the given line is 4x 2y + 5 = 0.
4x 2y + 5 = 0 Slope of the line = 2
(which is of the form
Now, the tangent to the given curve is parallel to the line 4x 2y 5 = 0 if the slope of the tangent is equal to the slope of the line.
Equation of the tangent passing through the point
is given by,
Hence, the equation of the required tangent is
Question 26: The slope of the normal to the curve y = 2x2 + 3 sin x at x = 0 is
Page 59 of 138
Class XII
Maths
(A) 3 (B) Answer
(C) 3 (D)
Slope of the tangent to the given curve at x = 0 is given by,
Hence, the slope of the normal to the given curve at x = 0 is
Question 27: The line y = x + 1 is a tangent to the curve y2 = 4x at the point (A) (1, 2) (B) (2, 1) (C) (1, 2) (D) (1, 2) Answer The equation of the given curve is .
Differentiating with respect to x, we have:
Therefore, the slope of the tangent to the given curve at any point (x, y) is given by,
The given line is y = x + 1 (which is of the form y = mx + c) Slope of the line = 1 The line y = x + 1 is a tangent to the given curve if the slope of the line is equal to the slope of the tangent. Also, the line must intersect the curve. Thus, we must have:
Page 60 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the line y = x + 1 is a tangent to the given curve at the point (1, 2). The correct answer is A.
Page 61 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: 1. Using differentials, find the approximate value of each of the following up to 3 places of decimal (i) (ii) (iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii) Answer (i) Consider Then,
(xiv)
(xv)
. Let x = 25 and x = 0.3.
Now, dy is approximately equal to y and is given by,
Hence, the approximate value of (ii) Consider Then,
is 0.03 + 5 = 5.03.
. Let x = 49 and x = 0.5.
Page 62 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the approximate value of (iii) Consider Then,
is 7 + 0.035 = 7.035.
. Let x = 1 and x = 0.4.
Hence, the approximate value of
is 1 + (0.2) = 1 0.2 = 0.8.
(iv) Consider Then, . Let x = 0.008 and x = 0.001.
Page 63 of 138
Class XII
Maths
is 0.2 + 0.008 = 0.208.
(v) Consider Then, . Let x = 1 and x = 0.001.
is 1 + (0.0001) = 0.9999.
(vi) Consider Then, . Let x = 16 and x = 1.
Page 64 of 138
Class XII
Maths
is 2 + (0.03125) = 1.96875.
(vii) Consider Then, . Let x = 27 and x = 1.
is 3 + (0.0370) = 2.9629.
(viii) Consider Then, . Let x = 256 and x = 1.
Page 65 of 138
Class XII
Maths
is 4 + (0.0039) = 3.9961.
(ix) Consider Then, . Let x = 81 and x = 1.
is 3 + 0.009 = 3.009.
(x) Consider Then, . Let x = 400 and x = 1.
Page 66 of 138
Class XII
Maths
is 20 + 0.025 = 20.025.
(xi) Consider Then, . Let x = 0.0036 and x = 0.0001.
Thus, the approximate value of
is 0.06 + 0.00083 = 0.06083.
(xii) Consider Then, . Let x = 27 and x = 0.43.
Page 67 of 138
Class XII
Maths
is 3 + (0.015) = 2.984.
(xiii) Consider Then, . Let x = 81 and x = 0.5.
Hence, the approximate value of (xiv) Consider Then,
is 3 + 0.0046 = 3.0046.
. Let x = 4 and x = 0.032.
Page 68 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the approximate value of (xv) Consider Then,
is 8 + (0.096) = 7.904.
. Let x = 32 and x = 0.15.
is 2 + 0.00187 = 2.00187.
Question 2: Find the approximate value of f (2.01), where f (x) = 4x2 + 5x + 2 Answer Let x = 2 and x = 0.01. Then, we have: f(2.01) = f(x + x) = 4(x + x)2 + 5(x + x) + 2 Now, y = f(x + x) f(x)
Page 69 of 138
Class XII f(x + x) = f(x) + y
Maths
Hence, the approximate value of f (2.01) is 28.21.
Question 3: Find the approximate value of f (5.001), where f (x) = x3 7x2 + 15. Answer Let x = 5 and x = 0.001. Then, we have:
Hence, the approximate value of f (5.001) is 34.995.
Question 4: Find the approximate change in the volume V of a cube of side x metres caused by increasing side by 1%.
Page 70 of 138
Class XII Answer
Maths
The volume of a cube (V) of side x is given by V = x3.
Hence, the approximate change in the volume of the cube is 0.03x3 m3.
Question 5: Find the approximate change in the surface area of a cube of side x metres caused by decreasing the side by 1% Answer The surface area of a cube (S) of side x is given by S = 6x2.
Hence, the approximate change in the surface area of the cube is 0.12x2 m2.
Question 6: If the radius of a sphere is measured as 7 m with an error of 0.02m, then find the approximate error in calculating its volume. Answer Let r be the radius of the sphere and r be the error in measuring the radius. Then, r = 7 m and r = 0.02 m Now, the volume V of the sphere is given by,
Page 71 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the approximate error in calculating the volume is 3.92 m3.
Question 7: If the radius of a sphere is measured as 9 m with an error of 0.03 m, then find the approximate error in calculating in surface area. Answer Let r be the radius of the sphere and r be the error in measuring the radius. Then, r = 9 m and r = 0.03 m Now, the surface area of the sphere (S) is given by, S = 4r2
Hence, the approximate error in calculating the surface area is 2.16 m2.
Question 8: If f (x) = 3x2 + 15x + 5, then the approximate value of f (3.02) is A. 47.66 B. 57.66 C. 67.66 D. 77.66 Answer
Page 72 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Let x = 3 and x = 0.02. Then, we have:
Hence, the approximate value of f(3.02) is 77.66. The correct answer is D.
Question 9: The approximate change in the volume of a cube of side x metres caused by increasing the side by 3% is A. 0.06 x3 m3 B. 0.6 x3 m3 C. 0.09 x3 m3 D. 0.9 x3 m3 Answer The volume of a cube (V) of side x is given by V = x3.
Hence, the approximate change in the volume of the cube is 0.09x3 m3. The correct answer is C.
Page 73 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Exercise 6.5 Question 1: Find the maximum and minimum values, if any, of the following functions given by (i) f(x) = (2x 1)2 + 3 (ii) f(x) = 9x2 + 12x + 2 (iii) f(x) = (x 1)2 + 10 (iv) g(x) = x3 + 1 Answer (i) The given function is f(x) = (2x 1)2 + 3. It can be observed that (2x 1)2 0 for every x R. Therefore, f(x) = (2x 1)2 + 3 3 for every x R. The minimum value of f is attained when 2x 1 = 0.
2x 1 = 0
Minimum value of f =
=3
Hence, function f does not have a maximum value. (ii) The given function is f(x) = 9x2 + 12x + 2 = (3x + 2)2 2. It can be observed that (3x + 2)2 0 for every x R. Therefore, f(x) = (3x + 2)2 2 2 for every x R. The minimum value of f is attained when 3x + 2 = 0.
3x + 2 = 0
Minimum value of f = Hence, function f does not have a maximum value. (iii) The given function is f(x) = (x 1)2 + 10. It can be observed that (x 1)2 0 for every x R. Therefore, f(x) = (x 1)2 + 10 10 for every x R. The maximum value of f is attained when (x 1) = 0. (x 1) = 0 x = 0 Maximum value of f = f(1) = (1 1)2 + 10 = 10
Page 74 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, function f does not have a minimum value. (iv) The given function is g(x) = x3 + 1. Hence, function g neither has a maximum value nor a minimum value.
Question 2: Find the maximum and minimum values, if any, of the following functions given by (i) f(x) = |x + 2| 1 (ii) g(x) = |x + 1| + 3 (iii) h(x) = sin(2x) + 5 (iv) f(x) = |sin 4x + 3| (v) h(x) = x + 4, x Answer (i) f(x) = We know that Therefore, f(x) = for every x R. for every x R. . (1, 1)
The minimum value of f is attained when
Minimum value of f = f(2) = Hence, function f does not have a maximum value. (ii) g(x) = We know that Therefore, g(x) = for every x R. for every x R. .
The maximum value of g is attained when
Maximum value of g = g(1) = Hence, function g does not have a minimum value.
Page 75 of 138
Class XII (iii) h(x) = sin2x + 5
Maths
We know that 1 sin 2x 1. 1 + 5 sin 2x + 5 1 + 5 4 sin 2x + 5 6 Hence, the maximum and minimum values of h are 6 and 4 respectively. (iv) f(x) = We know that 1 sin 4x 1. 2 sin 4x + 3 4 2 4
Hence, the maximum and minimum values of f are 4 and 2 respectively. (v) h(x) = x + 1, x (1, 1)
Here, if a point x0 is closest to 1, then we find
for all x0 (1, 1).
Also, if x1 is closest to 1, then
for all x1 (1, 1).
Hence, function h(x) has neither maximum nor minimum value in (1, 1).
Question 3: Find the local maxima and local minima, if any, of the following functions. Find also the local maximum and the local minimum values, as the case may be: (i). f(x) = x2 (ii). g(x) = x3 3x
(iii). h(x) = sinx + cos, 0 < (v). f(x) = x 6x + 9x + 15

3 2
(iv). f(x) = sinx cos x, 0 < x < 2
(vi).
(vii). (viii). Answer
Page 76 of 138
Class XII (i) f(x) = x2
Maths
Thus, x = 0 is the only critical point which could possibly be the point of local maxima or local minima of f. We have , which is positive.
Therefore, by second derivative test, x = 0 is a point of local minima and local minimum value of f at x = 0 is f(0) = 0. (ii) g(x) = x3 3x
By second derivative test, x = 1 is a point of local minima and local minimum value of g at x = 1 is g(1) = 13 3 = 1 3 = 2. However, x = 1 is a point of local maxima and local maximum value of g at x = 1 is g(1) = (1)3 3 ( 1) = 1 + 3 = 2.
(iii) h(x) = sinx + cosx, 0 < x <
Page 77 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, by second derivative test,
is a point of local maxima and the local
maximum value of h at
is
(iv) f(x) = sin x cos x, 0 < x < 2
maximum value of f at
is
However,
is a point of local minima and
the local minimum value of f at (v) f(x) = x 6x + 9x + 15

3 2
is
Page 78 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, by second derivative test, x = 1 is a point of local maxima and the local maximum value of f at x = 1 is f(1) = 1 6 + 9 + 15 = 19. However, x = 3 is a point of local minima and the local minimum value of f at x = 3 is f(3) = 27 54 + 27 + 15 = 15.
(vi)
Since x > 0, we take x = 2.
Therefore, by second derivative test, x = 2 is a point of local minima and the local
minimum value of g at x = 2 is g(2) =
(vii)
Now, for values close to x = 0 and to the left of 0, 0 and to the right of 0, .
Also, for values close to x =
Page 79 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, by first derivative test, x = 0 is a point of local maxima and the local
maximum value of (viii)
maximum value of f at
is
Page 80 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 4: Prove that the following functions do not have maxima or minima: (i) f(x) = ex (ii) g(x) = logx (iii) h(x) = x3 + x2 + x + 1 Answer i. We have, f(x) = ex
Now, if value of x.
. But, the exponential function can never assume 0 for any
Therefore, there does not exist c R such that Hence, function f does not have maxima or minima. ii. We have, g(x) = log x
Therefore, there does not exist c R such that Hence, function g does not have maxima or minima. iii. We have, h(x) = x3 + x2 + x + 1
Now,
h(x) = 0 3x2 + 2x + 1 = 0
Page 81 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, there does not exist c R such that Hence, function h does not have maxima or minima.
Question 5: Find the absolute maximum value and the absolute minimum value of the following functions in the given intervals: (i) (ii)
(iii) (iv) Answer (i) The given function is f(x) = x3.
Then, we evaluate the value of f at critical point x = 0 and at end points of the interval [2, 2]. f(0) = 0 f(2) = (2)3 = 8 f(2) = (2)3 = 8 Hence, we can conclude that the absolute maximum value of f on [2, 2] is 8 occurring at x = 2. Also, the absolute minimum value of f on [2, 2] is 8 occurring at x = 2. (ii) The given function is f(x) = sin x + cos x.
Then, we evaluate the value of f at critical point interval [0, ].
and at the end points of the
Page 82 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, we can conclude that the absolute maximum value of f on [0, ] is
occurring
at
and the absolute minimum value of f on [0, ] is 1 occurring at x = .
(iii) The given function is
Then, we evaluate the value of f at critical point x = 4 and at the end points of the
interval
Hence, we can conclude that the absolute maximum value of f on
is 8 occurring
at x = 4 and the absolute minimum value of f on (iv) The given function is
is 10 occurring at x = 2.
Now,
Page 83 of 138
Class XII
Maths
2(x 1) = 0 x = 1 Then, we evaluate the value of f at critical point x = 1 and at the end points of the interval [3, 1].
Hence, we can conclude that the absolute maximum value of f on [3, 1] is 19 occurring at x = 3 and the minimum value of f on [3, 1] is 3 occurring at x = 1.
Question 6: Find the maximum profit that a company can make, if the profit function is given by p(x) = 41 24x 18x2 Answer The profit function is given as p(x) = 41 24x 18x2.
By second derivative test,
is the point of local maxima of p.
Hence, the maximum profit that the company can make is 49 units.
Page 84 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Question 7:
Find the intervals in which the function f given by (i) increasing (ii) decreasing Answer
is
Now, the points x = 1 and x = 1 divide the real line into three disjoint intervals i.e., In intervals i.e., when x < 1 and x > 1,
Thus, when x < 1 and x > 1, f is increasing. In interval (1, 1) i.e., when 1 < x < 1, Thus, when 1 < x < 1, f is decreasing.
Question 8: At what points in the interval [0, 2], does the function sin 2x attain its maximum value? Answer Let f(x) = sin 2x.
Page 85 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Then, we evaluate the values of f at critical points points of the interval [0, 2].
and at the end
Hence, we can conclude that the absolute maximum value of f on [0, 2] is occurring
at
and
Question 9: What is the maximum value of the function sin x + cos x? Answer Let f(x) = sin x + cos x.
Now,
will be negative when (sin x + cos x) is positive i.e., when sin x and cos x
are both positive. Also, we know that sin x and cos x both are positive in the first
quadrant. Then,
will be negative when
Thus, we consider
Page 86 of 138
Class XII
Maths
By second derivative test, f will be the maximum at
and the maximum value of f
is
Question 10: Find the maximum value of 2x3 24x + 107 in the interval [1, 3]. Find the maximum value of the same function in [3, 1]. Answer Let f(x) = 2x3 24x + 107.
We first consider the interval [1, 3]. Then, we evaluate the value of f at the critical point x = 2 [1, 3] and at the end points of the interval [1, 3]. f(2) = 2(8) 24(2) + 107 = 16 48 + 107 = 75 f(1) = 2(1) 24(1) + 107 = 2 24 + 107 = 85 f(3) = 2(27) 24(3) + 107 = 54 72 + 107 = 89 Hence, the absolute maximum value of f(x) in the interval [1, 3] is 89 occurring at x = 3. Next, we consider the interval [3, 1]. Evaluate the value of f at the critical point x = 2 [3, 1] and at the end points of the interval [1, 3]. f(3) = 2 (27) 24(3) + 107 = 54 + 72 + 107 = 125 f(1) = 2(1) 24 (1) + 107 = 2 + 24 + 107 = 129 f(2) = 2(8) 24 (2) + 107 = 16 + 48 + 107 = 139 Hence, the absolute maximum value of f(x) in the interval [3, 1] is 139 occurring at x = 2.
Question 11:
Page 87 of 138
Class XII
Maths
It is given that at x = 1, the function x4 62x2 + ax + 9 attains its maximum value, on the interval [0, 2]. Find the value of a. Answer Let f(x) = x4 62x2 + ax + 9.
It is given that function f attains its maximum value on the interval [0, 2] at x = 1.
Hence, the value of a is 120.
Question 12: Find the maximum and minimum values of x + sin 2x on [0, 2]. Answer Let f(x) = x + sin 2x.
Then, we evaluate the value of f at critical points of the interval [0, 2].
and at the end points
Page 88 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, we can conclude that the absolute maximum value of f(x) in the interval [0, 2] is 2 occurring at x = 2 and the absolute minimum value of f(x) in the interval [0, 2] is 0 occurring at x = 0.
Question 13: Find two numbers whose sum is 24 and whose product is as large as possible. Answer Let one number be x. Then, the other number is (24 x). Let P(x) denote the product of the two numbers. Thus, we have:
By second derivative test, x = 12 is the point of local maxima of P. Hence, the product of the numbers is the maximum when the numbers are 12 and 24 12 = 12.
Question 14: Find two positive numbers x and y such that x + y = 60 and xy3 is maximum.
Page 89 of 138
Class XII Answer
Maths
The two numbers are x and y such that x + y = 60. y = 60 x Let f(x) = xy3.
By second derivative test, x = 15 is a point of local maxima of f. Thus, function xy3 is maximum when x = 15 and y = 60 15 = 45. Hence, the required numbers are 15 and 45.
Question 15: Find two positive numbers x and y such that their sum is 35 and the product x2y5 is a maximum Answer Let one number be x. Then, the other number is y = (35 x). Let P(x) = x2y5. Then, we have:
Page 90 of 138
Class XII
Maths
x = 0, x = 35, x = 10 When x = 35, equal to 0. When x = 0, y = 35 0 = 35 and the product x2y2 will be 0. x = 0 and x = 35 cannot be the possible values of x. When x = 10, we have: and y = 35 35 = 0. This will make the product x2 y5
By second derivative test, P(x) will be the maximum when x = 10 and y = 35 10 = 25. Hence, the required numbers are 10 and 25.
Question 16: Find two positive numbers whose sum is 16 and the sum of whose cubes is minimum. Answer Let one number be x. Then, the other number is (16 x). Let the sum of the cubes of these numbers be denoted by S(x). Then,
Page 91 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Now, By second derivative test, x = 8 is the point of local minima of S. Hence, the sum of the cubes of the numbers is the minimum when the numbers are 8 and 16 8 = 8.
Question 17: A square piece of tin of side 18 cm is to made into a box without top, by cutting a square from each corner and folding up the flaps to form the box. What should be the side of the square to be cut off so that the volume of the box is the maximum possible? Answer Let the side of the square to be cut off be x cm. Then, the length and the breadth of the box will be (18 2x) cm each and the height of the box is x cm. Therefore, the volume V(x) of the box is given by, V(x) = x(18 2x)2
Page 92 of 138
Class XII
Maths
x = 9 or x = 3 If x = 9, then the length and the breadth will become 0. x 9. x = 3. Now, By second derivative test, x = 3 is the point of maxima of V. Hence, if we remove a square of side 3 cm from each corner of the square tin and make a box from the remaining sheet, then the volume of the box obtained is the largest possible.
Question 18: A rectangular sheet of tin 45 cm by 24 cm is to be made into a box without top, by cutting off square from each corner and folding up the flaps. What should be the side of the square to be cut off so that the volume of the box is the maximum possible? Answer Let the side of the square to be cut off be x cm. Then, the height of the box is x, the length is 45 2x, and the breadth is 24 2x. Therefore, the volume V(x) of the box is given by,
Page 93 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Now,
x = 18 and x = 5
It is not possible to cut off a square of side 18 cm from each corner of the rectangular sheet. Thus, x cannot be equal to 18. x = 5 Now, By second derivative test, x = 5 is the point of maxima. Hence, the side of the square to be cut off to make the volume of the box maximum possible is 5 cm.
Question 19: Show that of all the rectangles inscribed in a given fixed circle, the square has the maximum area. Answer Let a rectangle of length l and breadth b be inscribed in the given circle of radius a. Then, the diagonal passes through the centre and is of length 2a cm.
Now, by applying the Pythagoras theorem, we have:
Page 94 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Area of the rectangle,
By the second derivative test, when maximum. Since , the rectangle is a square.
, then the area of the rectangle is the
Hence, it has been proved that of all the rectangles inscribed in the given fixed circle, the square has the maximum area.
Page 95 of 138
Maths
Show that the right circular cylinder of given surface and maximum volume is such that is heights is equal to the diameter of the base. Answer Let r and h be the radius and height of the cylinder respectively. Then, the surface area (S) of the cylinder is given by,
Let V be the volume of the cylinder. Then,
By second derivative test, the volume is the maximum when
Hence, the volume is the maximum when the height is twice the radius i.e., when the height is equal to the diameter.
Question 21: Of all the closed cylindrical cans (right circular), of a given volume of 100 cubic centimetres, find the dimensions of the can which has the minimum surface area? Answer Let r and h be the radius and height of the cylinder respectively.
Page 96 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Then, volume (V) of the cylinder is given by,
Surface area (S) of the cylinder is given by,
By second derivative test, the surface area is the minimum when the radius of the
cylinder is
Hence, the required dimensions of the can which has the minimum surface area is given
by radius =
and height =
Question 22:
Page 97 of 138
Class XII
Maths
A wire of length 28 m is to be cut into two pieces. One of the pieces is to be made into a square and the other into a circle. What should be the length of the two pieces so that the combined area of the square and the circle is minimum? Answer Let a piece of length l be cut from the given wire to make a square. Then, the other piece of wire to be made into a circle is of length (28 l) m.
Now, side of square =
Let r be the radius of the circle. Then, The combined areas of the square and the circle (A) is given by,
Thus, when
By second derivative test, the area (A) is the minimum when
Page 98 of 138
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the combined area is the minimum when the length of the wire in making the
square is
cm while the length of the wire in making the circle
is
Question 23: Prove that the volume of the largest cone that can be inscribed in a sphere of radius R is
of the volume of the sphere. Answer Let r and h be the radius and height of the cone respectively inscribed in a sphere of radius R.
Let V be the volume of the cone.
Then, Height of the cone is given by, h = R + AB
Page 99 of 138
Class XII
Maths
By second derivative test, the volume of the cone is the maximum when
Page 100 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Question 24: Show that the right circular cone of least curved surface and given volume has an altitude equal to Answer Let r and h be the radius and the height (altitude) of the cone respectively. Then, the volume (V) of the cone is given as: time the radius of the base.
The surface area (S) of the cone is given by, S = rl (where l is the slant height)
Page 101 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Thus, it can be easily verified that when
By second derivative test, the surface area of the cone is the least when
Hence, for a given volume, the right circular cone of the least curved surface has an altitude equal to times the radius of the base.
Question 25: Show that the semi-vertical angle of the cone of the maximum volume and of given slant height is Answer Let be the semi-vertical angle of the cone. .
It is clear that Let r, h, and l be the radius, height, and the slant height of the cone respectively. The slant height of the cone is given as constant.
Page 102 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Now, r = l sin and h = l cos The volume (V) of the cone is given by,
By second derivative test, the volume (V) is the maximum when
Page 103 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Hence, for a given slant height, the semi-vertical angle of the cone of the maximum volume is .
Question 27: The point on the curve x2 = 2y which is nearest to the point (0, 5) is (A) (B)
(C) (0, 0) (D) (2, 2) Answer The given curve is x2 = 2y.
For each value of x, the position of the point will be
The distance d(x) between the points
and (0, 5) is given by,
Page 104 of 138

Class XII
Maths
When, When, By second derivative test, d(x) is the minimum at .
When Hence, the point on the curve x2 = 2y which is nearest to the point (0, 5) is The correct answer is A. .
Question 28:
For all real values of x, the minimum value of (A) 0 (B) 1
is
(C) 3 (D) Answer
Let
Page 105 of 138

Class XII
Maths
By second derivative test, f is the minimum at x = 1 and the minimum value is given
by
Question 29:
The maximum value of
is
Page 106 of 138

Class XII
Maths
(A)
(B)
(C) 1 (D) 0 Answer
Let
Then, we evaluate the value of f at critical point interval [0, 1] {i.e., at x = 0 and x = 1}.
and at the end points of the
Hence, we can conclude that the maximum value of f in the interval [0, 1] is 1. The correct answer is C.
Page 107 of 138

Class XII
Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives Miscellaneous Solutions
Maths
Question 1: Using differentials, find the approximate value of each of the following.
(a) Answer
(b)
(a) Consider
Then,
Hence, the approximate value of = 0.677. (b) Consider . Let x = 32 and x = 1.
= 0.667 + 0.010
Page 108 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Then,
Hence, the approximate value of = 0.5 0.003 = 0.497.
Question 2:
Show that the function given by Answer
has maximum at x = e.
Now, 1 log x = 0
Page 109 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Question 3: The two equal sides of an isosceles triangle with fixed base b are decreasing at the rate of 3 cm per second. How fast is the area decreasing when the two equal sides are equal to the base? Answer Let ABC be isosceles where BC is the base of fixed length b. Let the length of the two equal sides of ABC be a. Draw ADBC.
Now, in ADC, by applying the Pythagoras theorem, we have:
Page 110 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Area of triangle The rate of change of the area with respect to time (t) is given by,
It is given that the two equal sides of the triangle are decreasing at the rate of 3 cm per second.
Then, when a = b, we have:
Hence, if the two equal sides are equal to the base, then the area of the triangle is decreasing at the rate of .
Question 4: Find the equation of the normal to curve y2 = 4x at the point (1, 2). Answer The equation of the given curve is .
Differentiating with respect to x, we have:
Page 111 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Now, the slope of the normal at point (1, 2) is Equation of the normal at (1, 2) is y 2 = 1(x 1). y2=x+1 x+y3=0
Question 5: Show that the normal at any point to the curve is at a constant distance from the origin. Answer We have x = a cos + a sin .
Slope of the normal at any point is
The equation of the normal at a given point (x, y) is given by,
Now, the perpendicular distance of the normal from the origin is
, which is independent of . Hence, the perpendicular distance of the normal from the origin is constant.
Page 112 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Question 6: Find the intervals in which the function f given by
is (i) increasing (ii) decreasing Answer
Now, cos x = 0 or cos x = 4 But, cos x 4 cos x = 0
divides (0, 2) into three disjoint intervals i.e.,
Page 113 of 138

Class XII
Maths
In intervals
Thus, f(x) is increasing for
In the interval
Thus, f(x) is decreasing for
Question 7:
Find the intervals in which the function f given by (i) increasing (ii) decreasing Answer
is
Now, the points x = 1 and x = 1 divide the real line into three disjoint intervals i.e., In intervals i.e., when x < 1 and x > 1,
Thus, when x < 1 and x > 1, f is increasing. In interval (1, 1) i.e., when 1 < x < 1, Thus, when 1 < x < 1, f is decreasing.
Page 114 of 138

Maths
Find the maximum area of an isosceles triangle inscribed in the ellipse its vertex at one end of the major axis. Answer
with
The given ellipse is
Let the major axis be along the x axis. Let ABC be the triangle inscribed in the ellipse where vertex C is at (a, 0). Since the ellipse is symmetrical with respect to the xaxis and y axis, we can assume the coordinates of A to be (x1, y1) and the coordinates of B to be (x1, y1).
Now, we have
Coordinates of A are
and the coordinates of B are
As the point (x1, y1) lies on the ellipse, the area of triangle ABC (A) is given by,
Page 115 of 138

Class XII
Maths
But, x1 cannot be equal to a.
Page 116 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Also, when
, then
Thus, the area is the maximum when Maximum area of the triangle is given by,
Page 117 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Question 9: A tank with rectangular base and rectangular sides, open at the top is to be constructed so that its depth is 2 m and volume is 8 m3. If building of tank costs Rs 70 per sq meters for the base and Rs 45 per square metre for sides. What is the cost of least expensive tank? Answer Let l, b, and h represent the length, breadth, and height of the tank respectively. Then, we have height (h) = 2 m Volume of the tank = 8m3 Volume of the tank = l b h 8=lb2
Now, area of the base = lb = 4 Area of the 4 walls (A) = 2h (l + b)
Page 118 of 138

Class XII
Maths
However, the length cannot be negative. Therefore, we have l = 4.
Thus, by second derivative test, the area is the minimum when l = 2. We have l = b = h = 2. Cost of building the base = Rs 70 (lb) = Rs 70 (4) = Rs 280 Cost of building the walls = Rs 2h (l + b) 45 = Rs 90 (2) (2 + 2) = Rs 8 (90) = Rs 720 Required total cost = Rs (280 + 720) = Rs 1000 Hence, the total cost of the tank will be Rs 1000.
Question 10: The sum of the perimeter of a circle and square is k, where k is some constant. Prove that the sum of their areas is least when the side of square is double the radius of the circle. Answer Let r be the radius of the circle and a be the side of the square. Then, we have:
The sum of the areas of the circle and the square (A) is given by,
Page 119 of 138

Class XII
Maths
The sum of the areas is least when
Hence, it has been proved that the sum of their areas is least when the side of the square is double the radius of the circle.
Question 11: A window is in the form of rectangle surmounted by a semicircular opening. The total perimeter of the window is 10 m. Find the dimensions of the window to admit maximum light through the whole opening. Answer Let x and y be the length and breadth of the rectangular window.
Radius of the semicircular opening
Page 120 of 138

Class XII
Maths
It is given that the perimeter of the window is 10 m.
Area of the window (A) is given by,
Page 121 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Thus, when
Therefore, by second derivative test, the area is the maximum when length Now,
Hence, the required dimensions of the window to admit maximum light is given
by
Question 12: A point on the hypotenuse of a triangle is at distance a and b from the sides of the triangle.
Show that the minimum length of the hypotenuse is Answer Let ABC be right-angled at B. Let AB = x and BC = y. Let P be a point on the hypotenuse of the triangle such that P is at a distance of a and b from the sides AB and BC respectively.
Page 122 of 138

Class XII Let C = .
Maths
We have,
Now, PC = b cosec And, AP = a sec AC = AP + PC AC = b cosec + a sec (1)
Page 123 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Therefore, by second derivative test, the length of the hypotenuse is the maximum when
Now, when
, we have:
Hence, the maximum length of the hypotenuses is
Question 13: Find the points at which the function f given by (i) local maxima (ii) local minima (iii) point of inflexion Answer The given function is has
Page 124 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Now, for values of x close to
and to the left of
Also, for values of x close to
and to the right of
Thus,
is the point of local maxima. Also, for values of x close to
Now, for values of x close to 2 and to the left of 2 and to the right of 2, Thus, x = 2 is the point of local minima. Now, as the value of x varies through 1, Thus, x = 1 is the point of inflexion.
does not changes its sign.
Question 14: Find the absolute maximum and minimum values of the function f given by
Answer
Now, evaluating the value of f at critical points the interval (i.e., at x = 0 and x = ), we have:
and at the end points of
Page 125 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Hence, the absolute maximum value of f is
occurring at
and the absolute
minimum value of f is 1 occurring at
Question 15: Show that the altitude of the right circular cone of maximum volume that can be
inscribed in a sphere of radius r is Answer A sphere of fixed radius (r) is given.
Let R and h be the radius and the height of the cone respectively.
The volume (V) of the cone is given by,
Now, from the right triangle BCD, we have:
Page 126 of 138

Class XII
Maths
The volume is the maximum when
Page 127 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Hence, it can be seen that the altitude of the right circular cone of maximum volume
that can be inscribed in a sphere of radius r is
Question 17: Show that the height of the cylinder of maximum volume that can be inscribed in a
sphere of radius R is Answer
. Also find the maximum volume.
A sphere of fixed radius (R) is given. Let r and h be the radius and the height of the cylinder respectively.
From the given figure, we have The volume (V) of the cylinder is given by,
Page 128 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Now, it can be observed that at
The volume is the maximum when
When
, the height of the cylinder is
Hence, the volume of the cylinder is the maximum when the height of the cylinder is
Page 129 of 138

Maths
Show that height of the cylinder of greatest volume which can be inscribed in a right circular cone of height h and semi vertical angle is one-third that of the cone and the
greatest volume of cylinder is Answer
The given right circular cone of fixed height (h) and semi-vertical angle () can be drawn as:
Here, a cylinder of radius R and height H is inscribed in the cone. Then, GAO = , OG = r, OA = h, OE = R, and CE = H. We have, r = h tan Now, since AOG is similar to CEG, we have:
Now, the volume (V) of the cylinder is given by,
Page 130 of 138

Class XII
Maths
And, for
, we have:
By second derivative test, the volume of the cylinder is the greatest when
Thus, the height of the cylinder is one-third the height of the cone when the volume of the cylinder is the greatest. Now, the maximum volume of the cylinder can be obtained as:
Question 19: A cylindrical tank of radius 10 m is being filled with wheat at the rate of 314 cubic mere per hour. Then the depth of the wheat is increasing at the rate of (A) 1 m/h (B) 0.1 m/h (C) 1.1 m/h (D) 0.5 m/h Answer
Page 131 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Let r be the radius of the cylinder. Then, volume (V) of the cylinder is given by,
Differentiating with respect to time t, we have:
The tank is being filled with wheat at the rate of 314 cubic metres per hour.
Thus, we have:
Hence, the depth of wheat is increasing at the rate of 1 m/h. The correct answer is A.
Question 20: The slope of the tangent to the curve at the point (2, 1) is
(A) Answer
(B)
(C)
(D)
The given curve is
The given point is (2, 1).
Page 132 of 138

Class XII At x = 2, we have:
Maths
The common value of t is 2. Hence, the slope of the tangent to the given curve at point (2, 1) is
Question 21: The line y = mx + 1 is a tangent to the curve y2 = 4x if the value of m is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) Answer The equation of the tangent to the given curve is y = mx + 1. Now, substituting y = mx + 1 in y2 = 4x, we get:
Since a tangent touches the curve at one point, the roots of equation (i) must be equal. Therefore, we have:
Page 133 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required value of m is 1. The correct answer is A.
Question 22: The normal at the point (1, 1) on the curve 2y + x2 = 3 is (A) x + y = 0 (B) x y = 0 (C) x + y + 1 = 0 (D) x y = 1 Answer The equation of the given curve is 2y + x2 = 3. Differentiating with respect to x, we have:
The slope of the normal to the given curve at point (1, 1) is
Hence, the equation of the normal to the given curve at (1, 1) is given as:
Page 134 of 138

Maths
The normal to the curve x2 = 4y passing (1, 2) is (A) x + y = 3 (B) x y = 3 (C) x + y = 1 (D) x y = 1 Answer The equation of the given curve is x2 = 4y. Differentiating with respect to x, we have:
The slope of the normal to the given curve at point (h, k) is given by,
Equation of the normal at point (h, k) is given as:
Now, it is given that the normal passes through the point (1, 2). Therefore, we have:
Since (h, k) lies on the curve x2 = 4y, we have h2 = 4k.
From equation (i), we have:
Page 135 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Hence, the equation of the normal is given as:
The correct answer is A.
Question 24: The points on the curve 9y2 = x3, where the normal to the curve makes equal intercepts with the axes are
(A)
(B)
(C) Answer
(D)
The equation of the given curve is 9y2 = x3. Differentiating with respect to x, we have:
The slope of the normal to the given curve at point
is
Page 136 of 138

Class XII
Maths
The equation of the normal to the curve at
is
It is given that the normal makes equal intercepts with the axes. Therefore, We have:
Also, the point
lies on the curve, so we have
From (i) and (ii), we have:
From (ii), we have:
Page 137 of 138

Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required points are The correct answer is A.
Page 138 of 138

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals Exercise 7.1
Maths
Question 1: sin 2x Answer The anti derivative of sin 2x is a function of x whose derivative is sin 2x.It is known that,
Therefore, the anti derivative of
Question 2: Cos 3x Answer The anti derivative of cos 3x is a function of x whose derivative is cos 3x. It is known that,
Question 3: e2x Answer The anti derivative of e2x is the function of x whose derivative is e2x. It is known that, Page 1 of 216
Website: www.vidhyarjan.com Email: contact@vidhyarjan.com Mobile: 9999 249717 Head Office: 1/3-H-A-2, Street # 6, East Azad Nagar, Delhi-110051 (One Km from Welcome Metro Station)
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 4:
Answer The anti derivative of It is known that, is the function of x whose derivative is .
Question 5:
Answer The anti derivative of . It is known that, is the function of x whose derivative is
Page 2 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
is
Question 6:
Answer
Question 7:
Answer
Question 8:
Answer
Page 3 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Question 10:
Answer
Page 4 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 11:
Answer
Question 12:
Answer
Page 5 of 216
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
On dividing, we obtain
Question 14:
Answer
Question 15:
Answer
Page 6 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16:
Answer
Question 17:
Answer
Page 7 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 18:
Answer
Question 19:
Answer
Page 8 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 20:
Answer
Question 21:
The anti derivative of
equals
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Answer Page 9 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Hence, the correct Answer is C.
Question 22:
If
such that f(2) = 0, then f(x) is
(A)
(B)
(C) Answer It is given that,
(D)
Anti derivative of
Page 10 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Also,
Hence, the correct Answer is A.
Page 11 of 216
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer Let =t
2x dx = dt
Question 2:
Answer Let log |x| = t
Page 12 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 3:
Answer
Let 1 + log x = t
Question 4:
sin x sin (cos x)
Answer
Page 13 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
sin x sin (cos x)
Let cos x = t
sin x dx = dt
Question 5:
Answer
Let
2adx = dt
Page 14 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 6:
Answer Let ax + b = t
adx = dt
Question 7:
Answer Let
Page 15 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
dx = dt
Question 8:
Answer Let 1 + 2x2 = t
4xdx = dt
Page 16 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
Answer Let
(2x + 1)dx = dt
Page 17 of 216
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Let
Question 11:
Answer Let
dx = dt
Page 18 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 12:
Answer Let
Page 19 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 13:
Answer Let
9x2 dx = dt
Page 20 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 14:
Answer Let log x = t
Question 15:
Answer
Page 21 of 216
Class XII Let
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
8x dx = dt
Question 16:
Answer Let
2dx = dt
Page 22 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 17:
Answer Let
2xdx = dt
Question 18:
Answer Let
Page 23 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 19:
Answer
Dividing numerator and denominator by ex, we obtain
Let
Page 24 of 216
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer Let
Question 21:
Answer
Let 2x 3 = t
2dx = dt
Page 25 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 22:
Answer Let 7 4x = t
4dx = dt
Question 23:
Answer Let
Page 26 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 24:
Answer
Let
Page 27 of 216
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Let
Question 26:
Answer Let
Page 28 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 27:
Answer Let sin 2x = t
Question 28:
Answer Let
Page 29 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
cos x dx = dt
Question 29: cot x log sin x Answer Let log sin x = t
Question 30:
Answer Let 1 + cos x = t
Page 30 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
sin x dx = dt
Question 31:
Answer Let 1 + cos x = t
sin x dx = dt
Question 32:
Answer
Page 31 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let sin x + cos x = t (cos x sin x) dx = dt
Question 33:
Answer
Page 32 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Put cos x sin x = t (sin x cos x) dx = dt
Question 34:
Answer
Page 33 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 35:
Answer Let 1 + log x = t
Page 34 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 36:
Answer
Let
Question 37:
Answer Let x4 = t
4x3 dx = dt
Page 35 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let
From (1), we obtain
Question 38:
equals
Answer Let
Page 36 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Hence, the correct Answer is D.
Question 39:
equals A. B. C. D. Answer
Hence, the correct Answer is B.
Page 37 of 216
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Question 2:
Answer
It is known that,
Page 38 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 3: cos 2x cos 4x cos 6x Answer
It is known that,
Question 4: sin3 (2x + 1) Answer Let
Page 39 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 5: sin3 x cos3 x Answer
Question 6: sin x sin 2x sin 3x Answer
Page 40 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
It is known that,
Question 7: sin 4x sin 8x Answer
It is known that,
Page 41 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 8:
Answer
Question 9:
Answer
Page 42 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 10: sin4 x Answer
Page 43 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 11: cos4 2x Answer
Page 44 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 12:
Answer
Page 45 of 216
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 14:
Answer
Page 46 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 15:
Answer
Page 47 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16: tan4x Answer
Page 48 of 216
Class XII From equation (1), we obtain
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 17:
Answer
Question 18:
Answer
Question 19:
Page 49 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 20:
Answer
Page 50 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 21: sin1 (cos x) Answer
Page 51 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
It is known that,
Substituting in equation (1), we obtain
Page 52 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 22:
Answer
Page 53 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 23:
is equal to A. tan x + cot x + C B. tan x + cosec x + C C. tan x + cot x + C D. tan x + sec x + C Answer
Question 24:
equals A. cot (ex ) + C B. tan (xex) + C C. tan (ex) + C D. cot (ex) + C Answer
x
Let exx = t
Page 54 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 55 of 216
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer Let x3 = t
3x2 dx = dt
Question 2:
Answer Let 2x = t
2dx = dt
Page 56 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 3:
Answer Let 2 x = t
dx = dt
Question 4:
Answer Let 5x = t
Page 57 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
5dx = dt
Question 5:
Answer
Question 6:
Answer Let x3 = t Page 58 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
3x2 dx = dt
Question 7:
Answer
From (1), we obtain
Page 59 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 8:
Answer Let x3 = t
3x2 dx = dt
Question 9:
Answer Let tan x = t
sec2x dx = dt
Page 60 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 10:
Answer
Question 11:
Answer
Page 61 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 12:
Answer
Page 62 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 13:
Answer
Question 14:
Page 63 of 216
Class XII Answer
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 15:
Answer
Page 64 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term on both sides, we obtain Page 65 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
4A = 4 A = 1
A+B=1B=0
Let 2x2 + x 3 = t
(4x + 1) dx = dt
Question 17:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term on both sides, we obtain
From (1), we obtain
Page 66 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
From equation (2), we obtain
Question 18:
Answer
Equating the coefficient of x and constant term on both sides, we obtain
Page 67 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 68 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Substituting equations (2) and (3) in equation (1), we obtain
Page 69 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 19:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term, we obtain
2A = 6 A = 3
9A + B = 7 B = 34
6x + 7 = 3 (2x 9) + 34
Page 70 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 71 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Substituting equations (2) and (3) in (1), we obtain
Question 20:
Answer
Page 72 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Using equations (2) and (3) in (1), we obtain
Page 73 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 21:
Answer
Let x2 + 2x +3 = t
(2x + 2) dx =dt
Page 74 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 22:
Answer
Page 75 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Substituting (2) and (3) in (1), we obtain
Question 23:
Answer
Page 76 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term, we obtain
Using equations (2) and (3) in (1), we obtain Page 77 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 24:
equals A. x tan B. tan

1
(x + 1) + C
(x + 1) + C
C. (x + 1) tan1 x + C D. tan1 x + C Answer
Question 25:
equals
A.
B.
C.
Page 78 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
D. Answer
Page 79 of 216
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Let
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term, we obtain A+B=1 2A + B = 0 On solving, we obtain A = 1 and B = 2
Question 2:
Answer
Let
Page 80 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term, we obtain A+B=0 3A + 3B = 1 On solving, we obtain
Question 3:
Answer
Let
Substituting x = 1, 2, and 3 respectively in equation (1), we obtain A = 1, B = 5, and C = 4
Page 81 of 216
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Let
Substituting x = 1, 2, and 3 respectively in equation (1), we obtain
Question 5:
Answer
Let
Substituting x = 1 and 2 in equation (1), we obtain A = 2 and B = 4
Page 82 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 6:
Answer It can be seen that the given integrand is not a proper fraction. Therefore, on dividing (1 x2) by x(1 2x), we obtain
Let
Substituting x = 0 and A = 2 and B = 3
Page 83 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 7:
Answer
Let
Equating the coefficients of x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A+C=0 A + B = 1 B + C = 0 On solving these equations, we obtain
Page 84 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 8:
Answer
Let
Substituting x = 1, we obtain
Equating the coefficients of x2 and constant term, we obtain A+C=0 2A + 2B + C = 0 On solving, we obtain
Page 85 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Let
Substituting x = 1 in equation (1), we obtain B=4 Equating the coefficients of x2 and x, we obtain A+C=0 B 2C = 3 On solving, we obtain
Page 86 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 10:
Answer
Let
Equating the coefficients of x2 and x, we obtain
Page 87 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 11:
Answer
Let
Substituting x = 1, 2, and 2 respectively in equation (1), we obtain
Question 12:
Page 88 of 216
Class XII Answer
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
It can be seen that the given integrand is not a proper fraction. Therefore, on dividing (x3 + x + 1) by x2 1, we obtain
Let
Substituting x = 1 and 1 in equation (1), we obtain
Question 13:
Answer
Equating the coefficient of x2, x, and constant term, we obtain AB=0 BC=0 A+C=2
Page 89 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
On solving these equations, we obtain A = 1, B = 1, and C = 1
Question 14:
Answer
Equating the coefficient of x and constant term, we obtain A=3
2A + B = 1 B = 7
Page 90 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 15:
Answer
Equating the coefficient of x3, x2, x, and constant term, we obtain
On solving these equations, we obtain
Page 91 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16:
[Hint: multiply numerator and denominator by xn 1 and put xn = t] Answer
Multiplying numerator and denominator by xn 1, we obtain
Substituting t = 0, 1 in equation (1), we obtain A = 1 and B = 1
Page 92 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 17:
[Hint: Put sin x = t] Answer
Substituting t = 2 and then t = 1 in equation (1), we obtain A = 1 and B = 1
Page 93 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 18:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x3, x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A+C=0 B+D=4 4A + 3C = 0 4B + 3D = 10 On solving these equations, we obtain A = 0, B = 2, C = 0, and D = 6
Page 94 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 19:
Answer
Let x2 = t 2x dx = dt
Substituting t = 3 and t = 1 in equation (1), we obtain
Page 95 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 20:
Answer
Multiplying numerator and denominator by x3, we obtain
Let x4 = t 4x3dx = dt
Page 96 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Substituting t = 0 and 1 in (1), we obtain A = 1 and B = 1
Question 21:
[Hint: Put ex = t] Answer
Let ex = t ex dx = dt
Page 97 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Substituting t = 1 and t = 0 in equation (1), we obtain A = 1 and B = 1
Question 22:
A.
B.
C. D. Answer
Substituting x = 1 and 2 in (1), we obtain A = 1 and B = 2
Page 98 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 23:
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer
Equating the coefficients of x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A+B=0 C=0 A=1 On solving these equations, we obtain A = 1, B = 1, and C = 0
Page 99 of 216
Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 100 of 216

Class XII
Maths
Question 1: x sin x Answer Let I = Taking x as first function and sin x as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 2:
Answer Let I = Taking x as first function and sin 3x as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 3:
Page 101 of 216

Class XII Answer Let
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Taking x2 as first function and ex as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Again integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 4: x logx Answer Let Taking log x as first function and x as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Page 102 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 5: x log 2x Answer Let Taking log 2x as first function and x as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 6: x2 log x Answer Let Taking log x as first function and x2 as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Page 103 of 216

Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer Let Taking obtain as first function and x as second function and integrating by parts, we
Question 8:
Answer Let
Page 104 of 216

Class XII Taking obtain
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
as first function and x as second function and integrating by parts, we
Question 9:
Answer Let Taking cos1 x as first function and x as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Page 105 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 106 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 10:
Answer Let Taking obtain as first function and 1 as second function and integrating by parts, we
Question 11:
Answer
Let
Page 107 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Taking we obtain
as first function and
as second function and integrating by parts,
Question 12:
Answer Let Taking x as first function and sec2x as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 13:
Answer
Page 108 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let Taking obtain as first function and 1 as second function and integrating by parts, we
Question 14:
Answer
Taking obtain
as first function and 1 as second function and integrating by parts, we
Page 109 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 15:
Answer Let Let I = I1 + I2 (1) Where, and
Taking log x as first function and x2 as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Taking log x as first function and 1 as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Page 110 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16:
Answer Let Let It is known that,
Question 17:
Page 111 of 216

Class XII Answer
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let
Let
It is known that,
Question 18:
Answer
Page 112 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let It is known that,
Question 19:
Page 113 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Also, let It is known that,
Question 20:
Answer
Let It is known that,
Question 21:

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let Integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 22:
Answer Let
Page 115 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
= 2
Integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 23: equals
Answer Let Also, let
Page 116 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 24: equals
Answer
Let Also, let It is known that,
Page 117 of 216

Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Question 2:
Answer
Page 118 of 216

Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 4:
Answer

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 6:
Answer
Question 7:
Answer
Page 120 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 8:
Answer
Page 121 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Question 10: is equal to
A.
B.
C. Page 122 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
D. Answer
Question 11: is equal to
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer
Hence, the correct Answer is D. Page 123 of 216

Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer It is known that,
Page 124 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 2:
Answer
It is known that,
Question 3:
Page 125 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 126 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 4:
Answer
It is known that,
Page 127 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
From equations (2) and (3), we obtain
Page 128 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 5:
Answer
It is known that,
Page 129 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 6:
Page 130 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 131 of 216

Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
By second fundamental theorem of calculus, we obtain
Question 2:
Answer
Question 3:
Page 132 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 4:
Answer
Page 133 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 5:
Answer
Question 6:
Answer
Page 134 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 7:
Answer
Question 8:
Answer
Page 135 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Question 10:
Page 136 of 216

Class XII Answer
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 11:
Answer
Question 12:
Page 137 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 13:
Answer
Page 138 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 14:
Answer
Question 15:
Answer
Page 139 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16:
Answer
Let
Page 140 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Equating the coefficients of x and constant term, we obtain A = 10 and B = 25
Substituting the value of I1 in (1), we obtain
Page 141 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 17:
Answer
Question 18:
Answer
Page 142 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 19:
Answer
Page 143 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 20:
Answer
Page 144 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 21:
equals
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer
Page 145 of 216

Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
equals
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer
Page 146 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 147 of 216

Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
When x = 0, t = 1 and when x = 1, t = 2
Question 2:
Answer
Also, let
Page 148 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 3:
Answer
Also, let x = tan dx = sec2 d
When x = 0, = 0 and when x = 1,
Page 149 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Takingas first function and sec2 as second function and integrating by parts, we obtain
Question 4:
Answer
Let x + 2 = t2 dx = 2tdt When x = 0, and when x = 2, t = 2
Page 150 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 5:
Answer
Let cos x = t sinx dx = dt
When x = 0, t = 1 and when
Page 151 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 6:
Answer
Let
dx = dt
Page 152 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 153 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 7:
Answer
Let x + 1 = t dx = dt When x = 1, t = 0 and when x = 1, t = 2
Question 8:
Answer
Let 2x = t 2dx = dt When x = 1, t = 2 and when x = 2, t = 4
Page 154 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
The value of the integral A. 6 B. 0 C. 3 D. 4 Answer
is
Page 155 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let cot = t cosec2 d= dt
Page 156 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 10: If A. cos x + x sin x B. x sin x C. x cos x D. sin x + x cos x Answer
Page 157 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 158 of 216

Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Adding (1) and (2), we obtain
Question 2:
Answer
Page 159 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 3:
Answer
Page 160 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 4:
Answer
Page 161 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 5:
Answer
It can be seen that (x + 2) 0 on [5, 2] and (x + 2) 0 on [2, 5].
Page 162 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 6:
Answer
It can be seen that (x 5) 0 on [2, 5] and (x 5) 0 on [5, 8].
Question 7:
Answer
Page 163 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 8:
Answer
Page 164 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Page 165 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 10:
Answer
Page 166 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 11:
Answer
As sin2 (x) = (sin (x))2 = (sin x)2 = sin2x, therefore, sin2x is an even function.
Page 167 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
It is known that if f(x) is an even function, then
Question 12:
Answer
Page 168 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 13:
Answer
As sin7 (x) = (sin (x))7 = (sin x)7 = sin7x, therefore, sin2x is an odd function. It is known that, if f(x) is an odd function, then
Question 14:
Answer
It is known that,
Page 169 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 15:
Answer
Question 16:
Answer
Page 170 of 216

Class XII Adding (1) and (2), we obtain
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
sin ( x) = sin x
Let 2x = t 2dx = dt
When x = 0, t = 0 and when
Page 171 of 216

Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
It is known that,
Question 18:
Answer
It can be seen that, (x 1) 0 when 0 x 1 and (x 1) 0 when 1 x 4
Page 172 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 19: Show that if f and g are defined as and
Answer
Question 20:
Page 173 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
The value of A. 0 B. 2 C. D. 1 Answer
is
It is known that if f(x) is an even function, then if f(x) is an odd function, then
and
Question 21:
The value of A. 2
is
B. C. 0 D.
Page 174 of 216

Class XII Answer
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 175 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A + B C = 0 B+C=0 A=1 On solving these equations, we obtain
Page 176 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 2:
Answer
Page 177 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 3:
[Hint: Put Answer
Page 178 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 4:
Answer
Page 179 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 180 of 216

Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
On dividing, we obtain
Question 6:
Page 181 of 216

Class XII Answer
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Equating the coefficients of x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A+B=0 B+C=5 9A + C = 0 On solving these equations, we obtain
Question 7:
Answer
Page 182 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let x a = t dx = dt
Question 8:
Answer
Question 9:
Answer
Page 183 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let sin x = t cos x dx = dt
Question 10:
Answer
Question 11:
Answer
Page 184 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 12:
Answer
Let x4 = t 4x3 dx = dt
Page 185 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 13:
Answer
Let ex = t ex dx = dt
Question 14:
Answer
Page 186 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Equating the coefficients of x3, x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A+C=0 B+D=0 4A + C = 0 4B + D = 1 On solving these equations, we obtain
Question 15:
Answer = cos3 x sin x Let cos x = t sin x dx = dt
Page 187 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 16:
Answer
Question 17:
Answer
Page 188 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 18:
Answer
Page 189 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 19:
Answer
Page 190 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 191 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 20:
Answer
Page 192 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 21:
Answer
Page 193 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 22:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x2, x,and constant term, we obtain A+C=1 3A + B + 2C = 1 2A + 2B + C = 1 On solving these equations, we obtain A = 2, B = 1, and C = 3 From equation (1), we obtain
Page 194 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 23:
Answer
Page 195 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 24:
Answer
Page 196 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 25:
Answer
Page 197 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 26:
Answer
Page 198 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
When x = 0, t = 0 and
Question 27:
Answer
Page 199 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
When
and when
Page 200 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 28:
Answer
When
and when
As
, therefore,
is an even function.
It is known that if f(x) is an even function, then
Page 201 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 29:
Answer
Page 202 of 216

Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Question 31:
Answer
Page 203 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 32:
Answer
Page 204 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 33:
Page 205 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Answer
Page 206 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
From equations (1), (2), (3), and (4), we obtain
Question 34:
Answer
Equating the coefficients of x2, x, and constant term, we obtain A+C=0 A+B=0 B=1 On solving these equations, we obtain A = 1, C = 1, and B = 1
Page 207 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 35:
Answer
Page 208 of 216

Class XII Hence, the given result is proved.
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 36:
Answer
Therefore, f (x) is an odd function. It is known that if f(x) is an odd function, then
Question 37:
Answer
Page 209 of 216

Class XII Hence, the given result is proved.
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 38:
Answer
Question 39:
Answer
Page 210 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Let 1 x2 = t 2x dx = dt
Question 40: Evaluate Answer as a limit of a sum.
It is known that,
Page 211 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 41:
is equal to A. Page 212 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
B. C. D. Answer
Question 42:
is equal to
A. B. C.
D. Answer
Page 213 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 43: If then is equal to
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer
Page 214 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Question 44:
The value of A. 1 B. 0 C. 1
is
D. Answer
Page 215 of 216

Class XII Adding (1) and (2), we obtain
Chapter 7 Integrals
Maths
Page 216 of 216

Class XII
Chapter 8 Application of Integrals
Maths
Exercise 8.1
Question 1: Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y2 = x and the lines x = 1, x = 4 and the x-axis. Answer
The area of the region bounded by the curve, y2 = x, the lines, x = 1 and x = 4, and the x-axis is the area ABCD.
Page 1 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 2: Find the area of the region bounded by y2 = 9x, x = 2, x = 4 and the x-axis in the first quadrant. Answer
The area of the region bounded by the curve, y2 = 9x, x = 2, and x = 4, and the x-axis is the area ABCD.
Page 2 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 3: Find the area of the region bounded by x2 = 4y, y = 2, y = 4 and the y-axis in the first quadrant. Answer
The area of the region bounded by the curve, x2 = 4y, y = 2, and y = 4, and the y-axis is the area ABCD.
Page 3 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
Find the area of the region bounded by the ellipse Answer
The given equation of the ellipse,
, can be represented as
It can be observed that the ellipse is symmetrical about x-axis and y-axis.
Area bounded by ellipse = 4 Area of OAB
Page 4 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, area bounded by the ellipse = 4 3 = 12 units
Question 5:
Find the area of the region bounded by the ellipse Answer The given equation of the ellipse can be represented as
It can be observed that the ellipse is symmetrical about x-axis and y-axis.
Area bounded by ellipse = 4 Area OAB
Page 5 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, area bounded by the ellipse =
Question 6: Find the area of the region in the first quadrant enclosed by x-axis, line circle Answer The area of the region bounded by the circle, area OAB. , and the x-axis is the and the
Page 6 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The point of intersection of the line and the circle in the first quadrant is Area OAB = Area OCA + Area ACB
Area of OAC
Area of ABC
Therefore, area enclosed by x-axis, the line
, and the circle
in the first
quadrant =
Question 7:
Find the area of the smaller part of the circle x2 + y2 = a2 cut off by the line Answer
Page 7 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The area of the smaller part of the circle, x2 + y2 = a2, cut off by the line, area ABCDA.
, is the
It can be observed that the area ABCD is symmetrical about x-axis.
Area ABCD = 2 Area ABC
Page 8 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the area of smaller part of the circle, x2 + y2 = a2, cut off by the line,
is
units.
Question 8: The area between x = y2 and x = 4 is divided into two equal parts by the line x = a, find the value of a. Answer The line, x = a, divides the area bounded by the parabola and x = 4 into two equal parts.
Page 9 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Area OAD = Area ABCD
It can be observed that the given area is symmetrical about x-axis.
Area OED = Area EFCD
Page 10 of 53
Class XII
Maths
From (1) and (2), we obtain
Therefore, the value of a is
Question 9: Find the area of the region bounded by the parabola y = x2 and Answer The area bounded by the parabola, x2 = y,and the line, , can be represented as
Page 11 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The given area is symmetrical about y-axis.
Area OACO = Area ODBO
The point of intersection of parabola, x2 = y, and line, y = x, is A (1, 1). Area of OACO = Area OAB Area OBACO
Area of OACO = Area of OAB Area of OBACO
Therefore, required area =
units Page 12 of 53
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII
Maths
Question 10: Find the area bounded by the curve x2 = 4y and the line x = 4y 2 Answer The area bounded by the curve, x2 = 4y, and line, x = 4y 2, is represented by the shaded area OBAO.
Let A and B be the points of intersection of the line and parabola.
Coordinates of point Coordinates of point B are (2, 1).
We draw AL and BM perpendicular to x-axis. It can be observed that, Area OBAO = Area OBCO + Area OACO (1) Then, Area OBCO = Area OMBC Area OMBO
Page 13 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Similarly, Area OACO = Area OLAC Area OLAO
Therefore, required area =
Question 11: Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y2 = 4x and the line x = 3 Answer The region bounded by the parabola, y2 = 4x, and the line, x = 3, is the area OACO.
Page 14 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The area OACO is symmetrical about x-axis.
Area of OACO = 2 (Area of OAB)
Therefore, the required area is
units.
Question 12: Area lying in the first quadrant and bounded by the circle x2 + y2 = 4 and the lines x = 0 and x = 2 is
Page 15 of 53
Class XII
Maths
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer The area bounded by the circle and the lines, x = 0 and x = 2, in the first quadrant is represented as
Thus, the correct answer is A.
Page 16 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 13: Area of the region bounded by the curve y2 = 4x, y-axis and the line y = 3 is A. 2
B.
C.
D. Answer The area bounded by the curve, y2 = 4x, y-axis, and y = 3 is represented as
Thus, the correct answer is B.
Page 17 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Exercise 8.2
Question 1: Find the area of the circle 4x2 + 4y2 = 9 which is interior to the parabola x2 = 4y Answer The required area is represented by the shaded area OBCDO.
Solving the given equation of circle, 4x2 + 4y2 = 9, and parabola, x2 = 4y, we obtain the
point of intersection as
It can be observed that the required area is symmetrical about y-axis.
Area OBCDO = 2 Area OBCO
We draw BM perpendicular to OA. Therefore, the coordinates of M are .
Therefore, Area OBCO = Area OMBCO Area OMBO
Page 18 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the required area OBCDO is
units
Question 2: Find the area bounded by curves (x 1)2 + y2 = 1 and x2 + y 2 = 1 Answer The area bounded by the curves, (x 1)2 + y2 = 1 and x2 + y 2 = 1, is represented by the shaded area as
Page 19 of 53
Class XII
Maths
On solving the equations, (x 1)2 + y2 = 1 and x2 + y 2 = 1, we obtain the point of
intersection as A
and B
It can be observed that the required area is symmetrical about x-axis.
Area OBCAO = 2 Area OCAO
We join AB, which intersects OC at M, such that AM is perpendicular to OC.
The coordinates of M are
Page 20 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, required area OBCAO =
units
Question 3: Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y = x2 + 2, y = x, x = 0 and x = 3 Answer The area bounded by the curves, y = x2 + 2, y = x, x = 0, and x = 3, is represented by the shaded area OCBAO as
Page 21 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Then, Area OCBAO = Area ODBAO Area ODCO
Question 4: Using integration finds the area of the region bounded by the triangle whose vertices are (1, 0), (1, 3) and (3, 2). Answer BL and CM are drawn perpendicular to x-axis. It can be observed in the following figure that, Area (ACB) = Area (ALBA) + Area (BLMCB) Area (AMCA) (1)
Page 22 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Equation of line segment AB is
Equation of line segment BC is
Equation of line segment AC is
Therefore, from equation (1), we obtain
Page 23 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Area (ABC) = (3 + 5 4) = 4 units
Question 5: Using integration find the area of the triangular region whose sides have the equations y = 2x +1, y = 3x + 1 and x = 4. Answer The equations of sides of the triangle are y = 2x +1, y = 3x + 1, and x = 4. On solving these equations, we obtain the vertices of triangle as A(0, 1), B(4, 13), and C (4, 9).
It can be observed that, Area (ACB) = Area (OLBAO) Area (OLCAO)
Question 6: Smaller area enclosed by the circle x2 + y2 = 4 and the line x + y = 2 is A. 2 ( 2)
Page 24 of 53
Class XII
Maths
B. 2 C. 2 1 D. 2 ( + 2) Answer The smaller area enclosed by the circle, x2 + y2 = 4, and the line, x + y = 2, is represented by the shaded area ACBA as
It can be observed that, Area ACBA = Area OACBO Area (OAB)
Question 7: Area lying between the curve y2 = 4x and y = 2x is
A.
Page 25 of 53
Class XII
Maths
B.
C.
D. Answer The area lying between the curve, y2 = 4x and y = 2x, is represented by the shaded area OBAO as
The points of intersection of these curves are O (0, 0) and A (1, 2). We draw AC perpendicular to x-axis such that the coordinates of C are (1, 0).
Area OBAO = Area (OCA) Area (OCABO)
Page 26 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Page 27 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find the area under the given curves and given lines: (i) y = x2, x = 1, x = 2 and x-axis (ii) y = x4, x = 1, x = 5 and x axis Answer i. The required area is represented by the shaded area ADCBA as
ii.
The required area is represented by the shaded area ADCBA as
Page 28 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 2: Find the area between the curves y = x and y = x2 Answer The required area is represented by the shaded area OBAO as
Page 29 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The points of intersection of the curves, y = x and y = x2, is A (1, 1). We draw AC perpendicular to x-axis.
Area (OBAO) = Area (OCA) Area (OCABO) (1)
Question 3: Find the area of the region lying in the first quadrant and bounded by y = 4x2, x = 0, y = 1 and y = 4
Page 30 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Answer The area in the first quadrant bounded by y = 4x2, x = 0, y = 1, and y = 4 is represented by the shaded area ABCDA as
Question 4: Sketch the graph of Answer and evaluate
Page 31 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The given equation is The corresponding values of x and y are given in the following table. x y 6 3 5 2 4 1 3 0 2 1 1 2 0 3
On plotting these points, we obtain the graph of
as follows.
It is known that,
Page 32 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: Find the area bounded by the curve y = sin x between x = 0 and x = 2 Answer The graph of y = sin x can be drawn as
Required area = Area OABO + Area BCDB
Question 6: Find the area enclosed between the parabola y2 = 4ax and the line y = mx Answer The area enclosed between the parabola, y2 = 4ax, and the line, y = mx, is represented by the shaded area OABO as
Page 33 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The points of intersection of both the curves are (0, 0) and We draw AC perpendicular to x-axis.
Area OABO = Area OCABO Area (OCA)
Page 34 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 7: Find the area enclosed by the parabola 4y = 3x2 and the line 2y = 3x + 12 Answer The area enclosed between the parabola, 4y = 3x2, and the line, 2y = 3x + 12, is represented by the shaded area OBAO as
The points of intersection of the given curves are A (2, 3) and (4, 12). We draw AC and BD perpendicular to x-axis.
Area OBAO = Area CDBA (Area ODBO + Area OACO)
Page 35 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 8:
Find the area of the smaller region bounded by the ellipse
and the line
Answer
The area of the smaller region bounded by the ellipse,
, and the line,
, is represented by the shaded region BCAB as
Page 36 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Area BCAB = Area (OBCAO) Area (OBAO)
Page 37 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Find the area of the smaller region bounded by the ellipse
and the line
Answer
The area of the smaller region bounded by the ellipse,
, and the line,
, is represented by the shaded region BCAB as
Area BCAB = Area (OBCAO) Area (OBAO)
Page 38 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 10: Find the area of the region enclosed by the parabola x2 = y, the line y = x + 2 and xaxis Answer The area of the region enclosed by the parabola, x2 = y, the line, y = x + 2, and x-axis is represented by the shaded region OABCO as
Page 39 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The point of intersection of the parabola, x2 = y, and the line, y = x + 2, is A (1, 1).
Area OABCO = Area (BCA) + Area COAC
Page 40 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: Using the method of integration find the area bounded by the curve [Hint: the required region is bounded by lines x + y = 1, x y = 1, x + y = 1 and x y = 11] Answer The area bounded by the curve, as , is represented by the shaded region ADCB
The curve intersects the axes at points A (0, 1), B (1, 0), C (0, 1), and D (1, 0). It can be observed that the given curve is symmetrical about x-axis and y-axis.
Area ADCB = 4 Area OBAO
Page 41 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 12: Find the area bounded by curves Answer The area bounded by the curves, shaded region as , is represented by the
It can be observed that the required area is symmetrical about y-axis.
Question 13: Using the method of integration find the area of the triangle ABC, coordinates of whose vertices are A (2, 0), B (4, 5) and C (6, 3)
Page 42 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Answer The vertices of ABC are A (2, 0), B (4, 5), and C (6, 3).
Equation of line segment AB is
Equation of line segment BC is
Equation of line segment CA is
Page 43 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Area (ABC) = Area (ABLA) + Area (BLMCB) Area (ACMA)
Question 14: Using the method of integration find the area of the region bounded by lines: 2x + y = 4, 3x 2y = 6 and x 3y + 5 = 0 Answer The given equations of lines are 2x + y = 4 (1) 3x 2y = 6 (2) And, x 3y + 5 = 0 (3)
Page 44 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The area of the region bounded by the lines is the area of ABC. AL and CM are the perpendiculars on x-axis. Area (ABC) = Area (ALMCA) Area (ALB) Area (CMB)
Question 15: Find the area of the region Answer The area bounded by the curves, , is represented as
Page 45 of 53
Class XII
Maths
The points of intersection of both the curves are The required area is given by OABCO. It can be observed that area OABCO is symmetrical about x-axis.
Area OABCO = 2 Area OBC
Area OBCO = Area OMC + Area MBC
Question 16: Area bounded by the curve y = x3, the x-axis and the ordinates x = 2 and x = 1 is A. 9
B.
Page 46 of 53
Class XII
Maths
C.
D. Answer
Question 17: The area bounded by the curve given by [Hint: y = x2 if x > 0 and y = x2 if x < 0] , x-axis and the ordinates x = 1 and x = 1 is
Page 47 of 53
Class XII
Maths
A. 0
B.
C.
D. Answer
Thus, the correct answer is C.
Page 48 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 18: The area of the circle x2 + y2 = 16 exterior to the parabola y2 = 6x is
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer The given equations are x2 + y2 = 16 (1) y2 = 6x (2)
Area bounded by the circle and parabola
Page 49 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Area of circle = (r)2 = (4)2 = 16 units
Page 50 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Question 19:
The area bounded by the y-axis, y = cos x and y = sin x when A. B. C. D. Answer The given equations are y = cos x (1) And, y = sin x (2)
Required area = Area (ABLA) + area (OBLO)
Page 51 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Page 52 of 53
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the required area is
units
Page 53 of 53
Class XII
Chapter 9 Differential Equations Exercise 9.1
Maths
Question 1:
Determine order and degree(if defined) of differential equation Answer
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is order is four.
. Therefore, its
The given differential equation is not a polynomial equation in its derivatives. Hence, its degree is not defined.
Question 2: Determine order and degree(if defined) of differential equation Answer The given differential equation is:
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is is one. It is a polynomial equation in one. . The highest power raised to
. Therefore, its order
is 1. Hence, its degree is
Question 3:
Page 1 of 120
Class XII
Chapter 9 Differential Equations
Maths
The highest order derivative present in the given differential equation is its order is two.
. Therefore,
It is a polynomial equation in Hence, its degree is one.
and
. The power raised to
is 1.
Question 4:
The highest order derivative present in the given differential equation is its order is 2.
. Therefore,
The given differential equation is not a polynomial equation in its derivatives. Hence, its degree is not defined.
Question 5:
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is order is two.
. Therefore, its
Page 2 of 120
Class XII
Maths
It is a polynomial equation in Hence, its degree is one.
and the power raised to
is 1.
Question 6: Determine order and degree(if defined) of differential equation
Answer
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is order is three. The given differential equation is a polynomial equation in The highest power raised to is 2. Hence, its degree is 2.
. Therefore, its
Question 7: Determine order and degree(if defined) of differential equation Answer
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is order is three. It is a polynomial equation in degree is 1.
. Therefore, its
. The highest power raised to
is 1. Hence, its
Page 3 of 120
Class XII
Maths . Therefore, its order
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is is one. The given differential equation is a polynomial equation in raised to is one. Hence, its degree is one.
and the highest power
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is order is two. The given differential equation is a polynomial equation in power raised to is one. and
. Therefore, its
and the highest
Hence, its degree is one.
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is order is two. This is a polynomial equation in Hence, its degree is one. and
. Therefore, its
and the highest power raised to
is one.
Question 11: The degree of the differential equation
is Page 4 of 120
Class XII
Maths
(A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) not defined Answer
The given differential equation is not a polynomial equation in its derivatives. Therefore, its degree is not defined. Hence, the correct answer is D.
Question 12: The order of the differential equation
is (A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 0 (D) not defined Answer
The highest order derivative present in the given differential equation is its order is two. Hence, the correct answer is A.
. Therefore,
Page 5 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Differentiating both sides of this equation with respect to x, we get:
Now, differentiating equation (1) with respect to x, we get:
Substituting the values of as:
in the given differential equation, we get the L.H.S.
Thus, the given function is the solution of the corresponding differential equation.
Question 2:
Answer
Substituting the value of L.H.S. =
in the given differential equation, we get: = R.H.S.
Hence, the given function is the solution of the corresponding differential equation.
Page 6 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 3:
Answer
Substituting the value of L.H.S. =
in the given differential equation, we get: = R.H.S.
Question 4:
Answer
Differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to x, we get:
Page 7 of 120
Class XII
Maths
L.H.S. = R.H.S. Hence, the given function is the solution of the corresponding differential equation.
Question 5:
Answer
Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Substituting the value of
in the given differential equation, we get:
Question 6:

Class XII
Maths
Question 7:
Answer
Page 9 of 120
Class XII
Maths
L.H.S. = R.H.S. Hence, the given function is the solution of the corresponding differential equation.
Question 8:
Answer
Differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to x, we get:
in equation (1), we get:
Page 10 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Page 11 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Answer
Page 12 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: The numbers of arbitrary constants in the general solution of a differential equation of fourth order are: (A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 Answer We know that the number of constants in the general solution of a differential equation of order n is equal to its order. Therefore, the number of constants in the general equation of fourth order differential equation is four. Hence, the correct answer is D.
Question 12: The numbers of arbitrary constants in the particular solution of a differential equation of third order are: (A) 3 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0 Answer In a particular solution of a differential equation, there are no arbitrary constants. Hence, the correct answer is D.
Page 13 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
Differentiating both sides of the given equation with respect to x, we get:
Again, differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Hence, the required differential equation of the given curve is
Question 2:
Answer
Page 14 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Dividing equation (2) by equation (1), we get:
This is the required differential equation of the given curve.
Question 3:
Answer
Multiplying equation (1) with (2) and then adding it to equation (2), we get:
Now, multiplying equation (1) with equation (3) and subtracting equation (2) from it, we get:
Substituting the values of
Page 15 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
Answer
Multiplying equation (1) with equation (2) and then subtracting it from equation (2), we get:
Page 16 of 120
Maths
Answer
Again, differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Adding equations (1) and (3), we get:
Question 6: Form the differential equation of the family of circles touching the y-axis at the origin. Answer The centre of the circle touching the y-axis at origin lies on the x-axis. Let (a, 0) be the centre of the circle. Since it touches the y-axis at origin, its radius is a. Now, the equation of the circle with centre (a, 0) and radius (a) is
Page 17 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Differentiating equation (1) with respect to x, we get:
Now, on substituting the value of a in equation (1), we get:
This is the required differential equation.
Question 7: Form the differential equation of the family of parabolas having vertex at origin and axis along positive y-axis. Answer The equation of the parabola having the vertex at origin and the axis along the positive y-axis is:
Page 18 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 8: Form the differential equation of the family of ellipses having foci on y-axis and centre at origin. Answer The equation of the family of ellipses having foci on the y-axis and the centre at origin is as follows:
Page 19 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting this value in equation (2), we get:
Page 20 of 120
Maths
Form the differential equation of the family of hyperbolas having foci on x-axis and centre at origin. Answer The equation of the family of hyperbolas with the centre at origin and foci along the xaxis is:
Differentiating both sides of equation (1) with respect to x, we get:
Page 21 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 10: Form the differential equation of the family of circles having centre on y-axis and radius 3 units. Answer Let the centre of the circle on y-axis be (0, b). The differential equation of the family of circles with centre at (0, b) and radius 3 is as follows:
Substituting the value of (y b) in equation (1), we get:
Page 22 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: Which of the following differential equations has as the general solution?
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer The given equation is:
Differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Page 23 of 120
Class XII
Maths
This is the required differential equation of the given equation of curve. Hence, the correct answer is B.
Question 12: Which of the following differential equation has as one of its particular solution?
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer The given equation of curve is y = x. Differentiating with respect to x, we get:
Now, on substituting the values of y,
from equation (1) and (2) in each of
the given alternatives, we find that only the differential equation given in alternative C is correct.
Page 24 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Page 25 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer The given differential equation is:
Now, integrating both sides of this equation, we get:
This is the required general solution of the given differential equation.
Question 2:
Page 26 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, integrating both sides of this equation, we get:
Question 3:
Now, integrating both sides, we get:
Page 27 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
Integrating both sides of this equation, we get:
Page 28 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting these values in equation (1), we get:
Question 5:
Page 29 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Let (ex + ex) = t. Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Question 6:
Page 30 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 7:
Integrating both sides, we get:
Page 31 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 8:
Page 32 of 120
Maths
Page 33 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Page 34 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting the values of
Question 11:
Page 35 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Comparing the coefficients of x2 and x, we get: A+B=2 B+C=1 A+C=0 Solving these equations, we get:
Substituting the values of A, B, and C in equation (2), we get:
Therefore, equation (1) becomes:
Page 36 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting C = 1 in equation (3), we get:
Question 12:
Answer
Page 37 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Comparing the coefficients of x2, x, and constant, we get:
Solving these equations, we get Substituting the values of A, B, and C in equation (2), we get:
Page 38 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting the value of k2 in equation (3), we get:
Question 13:
Answer
Page 39 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 14:
Answer
Page 40 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting C = 1 in equation (1), we get: y = sec x
Question 15: Find the equation of a curve passing through the point (0, 0) and whose differential equation is Answer The differential equation of the curve is: .
Page 41 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, the curve passes through point (0, 0).
Substituting
Hence, the required equation of the curve is
Question 16:
For the differential equation through the point (1, 1).
find the solution curve passing
Page 42 of 120
Class XII Answer
Maths
The differential equation of the given curve is:
This is the required solution of the given curve.
Question 17: Find the equation of a curve passing through the point (0, 2) given that at any point on the curve, the product of the slope of its tangent and y-coordinate of the point is equal to the x-coordinate of the point. Answer Let x and y be the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the curve respectively. Page 43 of 120
Class XII
Maths
We know that the slope of a tangent to the curve in the coordinate axis is given by the relation,
According to the given information, we get:
(2)2 02 = 2C
2C = 4
Substituting 2C = 4 in equation (1), we get: y2 x2 = 4 This is the required equation of the curve.
Question 18: At any point (x, y) of a curve, the slope of the tangent is twice the slope of the line segment joining the point of contact to the point (4, 3). Find the equation of the curve given that it passes through (2, 1). Answer Page 44 of 120
Class XII
Maths
It is given that (x, y) is the point of contact of the curve and its tangent.
The slope (m1) of the line segment joining (x, y) and (4, 3) is We know that the slope of the tangent to the curve is given by the relation,
According to the given information:
This is the general equation of the curve. It is given that it passes through point (2, 1).
Substituting C = 1 in equation (1), we get: y + 3 = (x + 4)2 This is the required equation of the curve.
Page 45 of 120
Maths
The volume of spherical balloon being inflated changes at a constant rate. If initially its radius is 3 units and after 3 seconds it is 6 units. Find the radius of balloon after t seconds. Answer Let the rate of change of the volume of the balloon be k (where k is a constant).
4 33 = 3 (k 0 + C)
108 = 3C
C = 36
Page 46 of 120
Class XII At t = 3, r = 6:
Maths
4 63 = 3 (k 3 + C)
864 = 3 (3k + 36)
3k = 288 36 = 252
k = 84
Substituting the values of k and C in equation (1), we get:
Thus, the radius of the balloon after t seconds is
Question 20: In a bank, principal increases continuously at the rate of r% per year. Find the value of r if Rs 100 doubles itself in 10 years (loge 2 = 0.6931).
Page 47 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Answer Let p, t, and r represent the principal, time, and rate of interest respectively. It is given that the principal increases continuously at the rate of r% per year.
It is given that when t = 0, p = 100.
100 = ek (2)
Now, if t = 10, then p = 2 100 = 200. Therefore, equation (1) becomes:
Page 48 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the value of r is 6.93%.
Question 21: In a bank, principal increases continuously at the rate of 5% per year. An amount of Rs 1000 is deposited with this bank, how much will it worth after 10 years Answer Let p and t be the principal and time respectively. It is given that the principal increases continuously at the rate of 5% per year. .
Now, when t = 0, p = 1000.
1000 = eC (2)
At t = 10, equation (1) becomes:
Page 49 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Hence, after 10 years the amount will worth Rs 1648.
Question 22: In a culture, the bacteria count is 1,00,000. The number is increased by 10% in 2 hours. In how many hours will the count reach 2,00,000, if the rate of growth of bacteria is proportional to the number present? Answer Let y be the number of bacteria at any instant t. It is given that the rate of growth of the bacteria is proportional to the number present.
Let y0 be the number of bacteria at t = 0.
log y0 = C
Substituting the value of C in equation (1), we get:
Also, it is given that the number of bacteria increases by 10% in 2 hours. Page 50 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, let the time when the number of bacteria increases from 100000 to 200000 be t1.
y = 2y0 at t = t1
From equation (4), we get:
Hence, in
hours the number of bacteria increases from 100000 to 200000.
Page 51 of 120
Maths
The general solution of the differential equation A. B. C. D. Answer
Hence, the correct answer is A.
Page 52 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer The given differential equation i.e., (x2 + xy) dy = (x2 + y2) dx can be written as:
This shows that equation (1) is a homogeneous equation. To solve it, we make the substitution as: y = vx Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Substituting the values of v and
Page 53 of 120
Class XII
Maths
This is the required solution of the given differential equation.
Page 54 of 120
Maths
Thus, the given equation is a homogeneous equation. To solve it, we make the substitution as: y = vx Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Substituting the values of y and
Page 55 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 3:
Thus, the given differential equation is a homogeneous equation. To solve it, we make the substitution as: y = vx
Page 56 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
Therefore, the given differential equation is a homogeneous equation. To solve it, we make the substitution as: y = vx
Page 57 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 5:
Page 58 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Page 59 of 120
Class XII
Maths
This is the required solution for the given differential equation.
Question 6:
Answer
Page 60 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting the values of v and
Question 7:
Page 61 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Page 62 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Page 63 of 120
Maths
Answer
Page 64 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
Page 65 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Page 66 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Answer
Page 67 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the given differential equation is a homogeneous equation. To solve it, we make the substitution as: x = vy
Substituting the values of x and
Page 68 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 11:
Answer
Page 69 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, y = 1 at x = 1.
Substituting the value of 2k in equation (2), we get:
Page 70 of 120
Maths
Answer
Page 71 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, y = 1 at x = 1.
Substituting
Question 13:
Page 72 of 120
Class XII Answer
Maths
Therefore, the given differential equation is a homogeneous equation. To solve this differential equation, we make the substitution as: y = vx
Page 73 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now,
Substituting C = e in equation (2), we get:
Question 14:
Answer
Therefore, the given differential equation is a homogeneous equation. Page 74 of 120

Class XII
Maths
To solve it, we make the substitution as: y = vx
This is the required solution of the given differential equation. Now, y = 0 at x = 1.
Substituting C = e in equation (2), we get:
Page 75 of 120
Maths
Answer
Substituting the value of y and
Page 76 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, y = 2 at x = 1.
Question 16:
A homogeneous differential equation of the form substitution A. y = vx B. v = yx C. x = vy D. x = v Answer
can be solved by making the
Page 77 of 120
Class XII
Maths
For solving the homogeneous equation of the form substitution as x = vy. Hence, the correct answer is C.
, we need to make the
Question 17: Which of the following is a homogeneous differential equation? A. B. C. D. Answer Function F(x, y) is said to be the homogenous function of degree n, if F(x, y) = n F(x, y) for any non-zero constant (). Consider the equation given in alternativeD:
Hence, the differential equation given in alternative D is a homogenous equation.
Page 78 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
Answer
The given differential equation is
This is in the form of
The solution of the given differential equation is given by the relation,
Page 79 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 2:
Answer
The given differential equation is
Question 3:
Page 80 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 4:
The general solution of the given differential equation is given by the relation,
Question 5:
Answer
Page 81 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 6:
This equation is in the form of a linear differential equation as:
Page 82 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 7:
This equation is the form of a linear differential equation as:
Page 83 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 8:
Answer
This equation is a linear differential equation of the form:
Page 84 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 9:
Answer
This equation is a linear differential equation of the form:
Page 85 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Answer
This is a linear differential equation of the form:
Page 86 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 11:
Answer
Page 87 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 12:
Answer
Page 88 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 13:
Answer
The given differential equation is This is a linear equation of the form:
Now, Therefore,
Page 89 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required solution of the given differential equation is
Question 14:
Answer
Now, y = 0 at x = 1. Therefore,
Page 90 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting
Question 15:
Answer
The given differential equation is This is a linear differential equation of the form:
Now, Therefore, we get:
Page 91 of 120
Class XII
Maths
This is the required particular solution of the given differential equation.
Question 16: Find the equation of a curve passing through the origin given that the slope of the tangent to the curve at any point (x, y) is equal to the sum of the coordinates of the point. Answer Let F (x, y) be the curve passing through the origin.
At point (x, y), the slope of the curve will be According to the given information:
Page 92 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Substituting in equation (1), we get:
The curve passes through the origin. Therefore, equation (2) becomes: 1=C
C=1
Hence, the required equation of curve passing through the origin is
Question 17: Find the equation of a curve passing through the point (0, 2) given that the sum of the coordinates of any point on the curve exceeds the magnitude of the slope of the tangent to the curve at that point by 5. Answer Let F (x, y) be the curve and let (x, y) be a point on the curve. The slope of the tangent
to the curve at (x, y) is According to the given information:
Page 93 of 120
Class XII
Maths
The general equation of the curve is given by the relation,
The curve passes through point (0, 2). Therefore, equation (2) becomes: 0 + 2 4 = Ce0
2=C
C=2
Page 94 of 120
Class XII
Maths
This is the required equation of the curve.
Question 18:
The integrating factor of the differential equation A. e

x
is
B. ey
C. D. x Answer The given differential equation is:
The integrating factor (I.F) is given by the relation,
Question 19: The integrating factor of the differential equation.
is
A.
Page 95 of 120
Class XII
Maths
B.
C.
D. Answer The given differential equation is:
The integrating factor (I.F) is given by the relation,
Hence, the correct answer is D.
Page 96 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: For each of the differential equations given below, indicate its order and degree (if defined).
(i)
(ii)
(iii) Answer (i) The differential equation is given as:
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is
. Thus, its order is
two. The highest power raised to
is one. Hence, its degree is one.
(ii) The differential equation is given as:
Page 97 of 120
Class XII
Maths
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is
one. The highest power raised to
is three. Hence, its degree is three.
(iii) The differential equation is given as:
The highest order derivative present in the differential equation is four.
However, the given differential equation is not a polynomial equation. Hence, its degree is not defined.
Question 2: For each of the exercises given below, verify that the given function (implicit or explicit) is a solution of the corresponding differential equation.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv) Answer (i) Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Page 98 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, on substituting the values of
and
in the differential equation, we get:
L.H.S. R.H.S.
Hence, the given function is not a solution of the corresponding differential equation. (ii) Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Page 99 of 120
Class XII
Maths
Now, on substituting the values of equation, we get:
and
in the L.H.S. of the given differential
Hence, the given function is a solution of the corresponding differential equation. (iii) Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
Page 100 of 120

Class XII
Maths
in the L.H.S. of the given differential equation, we get:
Hence, the given function is a solution of the corresponding differential equation. (iv) Differentiating both sides with respect to x, we get:
in the L.H.S. of the given differential equation, we get:
Page 101 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Hence, the given function is a solution of the corresponding differential equation.
Question 3: Form the differential equation representing the family of curves given by where a is an arbitrary constant. Answer
Differentiating with respect to x, we get:
From equation (1), we get:
On substituting this value in equation (3), we get:
Page 102 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Hence, the differential equation of the family of curves is given as
Question 4: Prove that equation Answer is the general solution of differential , where c is a parameter.
This is a homogeneous equation. To simplify it, we need to make the substitution as:
Page 103 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Substituting the values of I1 and I2 in equation (3), we get:
Page 104 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Question 5: Form the differential equation of the family of circles in the first quadrant which touch the coordinate axes. Answer The equation of a circle in the first quadrant with centre (a, a) and radius (a) which touches the coordinate axes is:
Page 105 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Substituting the value of a in equation (1), we get:
Hence, the required differential equation of the family of circles is
Page 106 of 120

Maths
Find the general solution of the differential equation Answer
Question 7:
Show that the general solution of the differential equation (x + y + 1) = A (1 x y 2xy), where A is parameter Answer
is given by
Page 107 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Page 108 of 120

Maths
Find the equation of the curve passing through the point equation is, Answer The differential equation of the given curve is:
whose differential
The curve passes through point
On substituting
Hence, the required equation of the curve is
Page 109 of 120

Maths
Find the particular solution of the differential equation , given that y = 1 when x = 0 Answer
Substituting these values in equation (1), we get:
Now, y = 1 at x = 0. Therefore, equation (2) becomes:
Substituting
Page 110 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Question 10:
Solve the differential equation Answer
Differentiating it with respect to y, we get:
From equation (1) and equation (2), we get:
Page 111 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Question 11: Find a particular solution of the differential equation y = 1, when x = 0 (Hint: put x y = t) Answer , given that
Substituting the values of x y and
Page 112 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Now, y = 1 at x = 0. Therefore, equation (3) becomes: log 1 = 0 1 + C
C=1
Substituting C = 1 in equation (3) we get:
Question 12:
Solve the differential equation Answer Page 113 of 120

Class XII
Maths
This equation is a linear differential equation of the form
The general solution of the given differential equation is given by,
Question 13:
Find a particular solution of the differential equation
given that y = 0 when Answer The given differential equation is:
This equation is a linear differential equation of the form
Page 114 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Now, Therefore, equation (1) becomes:
Substituting
Question 14:
Find a particular solution of the differential equation when x = 0 Answer
, given that y = 0
Page 115 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Now, at x = 0 and y = 0, equation (2) becomes:
Page 116 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Question 15: The population of a village increases continuously at the rate proportional to the number of its inhabitants present at any time. If the population of the village was 20000 in 1999 and 25000 in the year 2004, what will be the population of the village in 2009? Answer Let the population at any instant (t) be y. It is given that the rate of increase of population is proportional to the number of inhabitants at any instant.
Integrating both sides, we get: log y = kt + C (1) In the year 1999, t = 0 and y = 20000. Therefore, we get: log 20000 = C (2) In the year 2004, t = 5 and y = 25000. Therefore, we get:
Page 117 of 120

Class XII
Maths
In the year 2009, t = 10 years. Now, on substituting the values of t, k, and C in equation (1), we get:
Hence, the population of the village in 2009 will be 31250.
Question 16:
The general solution of the differential equation A. xy = C B. x = Cy2 C. y = Cx D. y = Cx2 Answer The given differential equation is:
is
Page 118 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Question 17:
The general solution of a differential equation of the type
is
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer
The integrating factor of the given differential equation The general solution of the differential equation is given by,
Page 119 of 120

Class XII
Maths
Question 18: The general solution of the differential equation A. xe + x = C B. xey + y2 = C C. yex + x2 = C D. yey + x2 = C Answer The given differential equation is:
y 2
is
This is a linear differential equation of the form
Page 120 of 120

Class XII
Chapter 10 Vector Algebra Exercise 10.1
Maths
Question 1: Represent graphically a displacement of 40 km, 30 east of north. Answer
Here, vector
represents the displacement of 40 km, 30 East of North.
Question 2: Classify the following measures as scalars and vectors. (i) 10 kg (ii) 2 metres north-west (iii) 40 (iv) 40 watt (v) 1019 coulomb (vi) 20 m/s2 Answer (i) 10 kg is a scalar quantity because it involves only magnitude. (ii) 2 meters north-west is a vector quantity as it involves both magnitude and direction. (iii) 40 is a scalar quantity as it involves only magnitude. (iv) 40 watts is a scalar quantity as it involves only magnitude. (v) 1019 coulomb is a scalar quantity as it involves only magnitude. (vi) 20 m/s2 is a vector quantity as it involves magnitude as well as direction.
Question 3: Classify the following as scalar and vector quantities. (i) time period (ii) distance (iii) force Page 1 of 46
Class XII (iv) velocity (v) work done Answer
Chapter 10 Vector Algebra
Maths
(i) Time period is a scalar quantity as it involves only magnitude. (ii) Distance is a scalar quantity as it involves only magnitude. (iii) Force is a vector quantity as it involves both magnitude and direction. (iv) Velocity is a vector quantity as it involves both magnitude as well as direction. (v) Work done is a scalar quantity as it involves only magnitude.
Question 4: In Figure, identify the following vectors.
(i) Coinitial (ii) Equal (iii) Collinear but not equal Answer (i) Vectors (ii) Vectors (iii) Vectors and and and are coinitial because they have the same initial point. are equal because they have the same magnitude and direction. are collinear but not equal. This is because although they are
parallel, their directions are not the same.
Question 5: Answer the following as true or false. (i) and are collinear.
(ii) Two collinear vectors are always equal in magnitude. (iii) Two vectors having same magnitude are collinear. (iv) Two collinear vectors having the same magnitude are equal. Answer (i) True. Page 2 of 46
Class XII Vectors (ii) False. and
Chapter 10 Vector Algebra are parallel to the same line.
Maths
Collinear vectors are those vectors that are parallel to the same line. (iii) False.
Page 3 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Compute the magnitude of the following vectors:
Answer The given vectors are:
Question 2: Write two different vectors having same magnitude. Answer
Hence,
are two different vectors having the same magnitude. The vectors are
different because they have different directions.
Class XII
Maths
Write two different vectors having same direction. Answer
The direction cosines of direction.
are the same. Hence, the two vectors have the same
Question 4: Find the values of x and y so that the vectors Answer The two vectors equal. Hence, the required values of x and y are 2 and 3 respectively. will be equal if their corresponding components are are equal
Question 5: Find the scalar and vector components of the vector with initial point (2, 1) and terminal point (5, 7). Answer The vector with the initial point P (2, 1) and terminal point Q (5, 7) can be given by,
Hence, the required scalar components are 7 and 6 while the vector components are
Page 5 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 6: Find the sum of the vectors Answer The given vectors are . .
Question 7: Find the unit vector in the direction of the vector Answer .
The unit vector
in the direction of vector
is given by
Question 8: Find the unit vector in the direction of vector (1, 2, 3) and (4, 5, 6), respectively. Answer The given points are P (1, 2, 3) and Q (4, 5, 6). , where P and Q are the points
Hence, the unit vector in the direction of
is
. Page 6 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 9: For given vectors, of the vector Answer The given vectors are and . and , find the unit vector in the direction
Hence, the unit vector in the direction of
is
Question 10: Find a vector in the direction of vector Answer which has magnitude 8 units.
Hence, the vector in the direction of vector given by,
which has magnitude 8 units is
Page 7 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: Show that the vectors Answer are collinear.
. Hence, the given vectors are collinear.
Question 12: Find the direction cosines of the vector Answer
Hence, the direction cosines of
Question 13: Find the direction cosines of the vector joining the points A (1, 2, 3) and B (1, 2, 1) directed from A to B. Answer The given points are A (1, 2, 3) and B (1, 2, 1).
Page 8 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the direction cosines of
are
Question 14: Show that the vector Answer is equally inclined to the axes OX, OY, and OZ.
Therefore, the direction cosines of Now, let , , and be the angles formed by axes. with the positive directions of x, y, and z
Then, we have Hence, the given vector is equally inclined to axes OX, OY, and OZ.
Question 15: Find the position vector of a point R which divides the line joining two points P and Q whose position vectors are (i) internally (ii) externally Answer The position vector of point R dividing the line segment joining two points P and Q in the ratio m: n is given by: i. Internally: Page 9 of 46
respectively, in the ration 2:1
Class XII
Maths
ii.
Externally:
Position vectors of P and Q are given as:
(i) The position vector of point R which divides the line joining two points P and Q internally in the ratio 2:1 is given by,
(ii) The position vector of point R which divides the line joining two points P and Q externally in the ratio 2:1 is given by,
Question 16: Find the position vector of the mid point of the vector joining the points P (2, 3, 4) and Q (4, 1, 2). Answer The position vector of mid-point R of the vector joining points P (2, 3, 4) and Q (4, 1, 2) is given by,
Page 10 of 46
Maths
Show that the points A, B and C with position vectors,
respectively form the vertices of a right angled triangle. Answer Position vectors of points A, B, and C are respectively given as:
Hence, ABC is a right-angled triangle.
Question 18: In triangle ABC which of the following is not true:
A. B. C. D.
Page 11 of 46
Class XII Answer
Maths
On applying the triangle law of addition in the given triangle, we have:
From equations (1) and (3), we have:
Hence, the equation given in alternative C is incorrect. The correct answer is C.
Page 12 of 46
Class XII Question 19: If A. B.
Maths
are two collinear vectors, then which of the following are incorrect: , for some scalar
C. the respective components of D. both the vectors Answer If
are proportional
have same direction, but different magnitudes
are two collinear vectors, then they are parallel.
Therefore, we have: (For some scalar ) If = 1, then .
Thus, the respective components of However, vectors
are proportional.
can have different directions.
Hence, the statement given in D is incorrect. The correct answer is D.
Page 13 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find the angle between two vectors and having Answer It is given that, . with magnitudes and 2, respectively
Now, we know that
Hence, the angle between the given vectors
and
is
Question 2: Find the angle between the vectors Answer The given vectors are .
Page 14 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Also, we know that
Question 3: Find the projection of the vector Answer Let and . is given by, on the vector .
Now, projection of vector on
Hence, the projection of vector
on
is 0.
Question 4: Find the projection of the vector Answer Let and on . is given by, on the vector .
Now, projection of vector
Page 15 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: Show that each of the given three vectors is a unit vector:
Also, show that they are mutually perpendicular to each other. Answer
Thus, each of the given three vectors is a unit vector.
Hence, the given three vectors are mutually perpendicular to each other.
Page 16 of 46
Class XII Question 6: Find and , if
Maths
Answer
Question 7: Evaluate the product Answer .
Page 17 of 46
Maths
Find the magnitude of two vectors
, having the same magnitude and such that
the angle between them is 60 and their scalar product is Answer Let be the angle between the vectors
It is given that We know that .
Question 9: Find , if for a unit vector .
Answer
Page 18 of 46
Class XII Question 10: If then find the value of . Answer
Maths
are such that
is perpendicular to
Hence, the required value of is 8.
Question 11: Show that Answer is perpendicular to , for any two nonzero vectors
Hence,
and
Question 12: If , then what can be concluded about the vector Page 19 of 46
Class XII Answer It is given that
Maths
Hence, vector
satisfying
can be any vector.
Question 14: If either vector , then . But the converse need not be true. Justify
your answer with an example. Answer
We now observe that:
Hence, the converse of the given statement need not be true.
Question 15: If the vertices A, B, C of a triangle ABC are (1, 2, 3), (1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 2), respectively, then find ABC. [ABC is the angle between the vectors Answer The vertices of ABC are given as A (1, 2, 3), B (1, 0, 0), and C (0, 1, 2). Also, it is given that ABC is the angle between the vectors and . and ]
Page 20 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Now, it is known that: .
Question 16: Show that the points A (1, 2, 7), B (2, 6, 3) and C (3, 10, 1) are collinear. Answer The given points are A (1, 2, 7), B (2, 6, 3), and C (3, 10, 1).
Hence, the given points A, B, and C are collinear.
Page 21 of 46
Class XII Question 17: Show that the vectors angled triangle. Answer Let vectors respectively.
Maths
form the vertices of a right
be position vectors of points A, B, and C
Now, vectors
represent the sides of ABC.
Hence, ABC is a right-angled triangle.
Question 18: If is a nonzero vector of magnitude a and a nonzero scalar, then (A) = 1 (B) = 1 (C) is unit vector if
(D) Answer Vector is a unit vector if .
Page 22 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Hence, vector
is a unit vector if
Page 23 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: Find Answer We have, and , if and .
Question 2: Find a unit vector perpendicular to each of the vector and Answer We have, and . and , where
Page 24 of 46
Class XII
Chapter 10 Vector Algebra and
Maths is given by the
Hence, the unit vector perpendicular to each of the vectors relation,
Question 3:
If a unit vector
makes an angles
with .
with
and an acute angle with
, then
find and hence, the compounds of Answer Let unit vector Since is a unit vector, .
have (a1, a2, a3) components.
Also, it is given that Then, we have:
makes angles
with
with
, and an acute angle with
Page 25 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Hence,
and the components of
are
Question 4: Show that
Answer
Question 5:
Find and if
. Page 26 of 46
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII Answer
Maths
On comparing the corresponding components, we have:
Hence,
Question 6: Given that Answer and . What can you conclude about the vectors ?
Then, (i) Either or , or
(ii) Either But, and
or
, or
cannot be perpendicular and parallel simultaneously. or .
Hence,
Page 27 of 46
Class XII Question 7: Let the vectors that Answer We have,
Maths
given as
. Then show
On adding (2) and (3), we get:
Now, from (1) and (4), we have:
Hence, the given result is proved. Page 28 of 46

Class XII
Maths
Question 8: If either example. Answer Take any parallel non-zero vectors so that . or , then . Is the converse true? Justify your answer with an
It can now be observed that:
Hence, the converse of the given statement need not be true.
Question 9: Find the area of the triangle with vertices A (1, 1, 2), B (2, 3, 5) and C (1, 5, 5). Answer The vertices of triangle ABC are given as A (1, 1, 2), B (2, 3, 5), and C (1, 5, 5). The adjacent sides and of ABC are given as:
Page 29 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Area of ABC
Hence, the area of ABC
Question 10: Find the area of the parallelogram whose adjacent sides are determined by the vector . Answer The area of the parallelogram whose adjacent sides are Adjacent sides are given as: is .
Hence, the area of the given parallelogram is
Question 11:
Let the vectors
and
be such that and is
and
, then
is a unit vector, if
the angle between
Page 30 of 46
Class XII
Maths
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Answer
It is given that We know that and is the angle between Now, is a unit vector if
. , where and . . is a unit vector perpendicular to both and
Hence,
is a unit vector if the angle between
and
is
Question 12: Area of a rectangle having vertices A, B, C, and D with position vectors
and
respectively is
(A)
(B) 1
(C) 2 (D) Answer Page 31 of 46

Class XII
Maths
The position vectors of vertices A, B, C, and D of rectangle ABCD are given as:
The adjacent sides
and
of the given rectangle are given as:
Now, it is known that the area of a parallelogram whose adjacent sides are is .
Hence, the area of the given rectangle is The correct answer is C.
Page 32 of 46
Class XII
Chapter 10 Vector Algebra Miscellaneous Solutions
Maths
Question 1: Write down a unit vector in XY-plane, making an angle of 30 with the positive direction of x-axis. Answer If is a unit vector in the XY-plane, then
Here, is the angle made by the unit vector with the positive direction of the x-axis. Therefore, for = 30:
Hence, the required unit vector is
Question 2: Find the scalar components and magnitude of the vector joining the points . Answer The vector joining the points can be obtained by,
Hence, the scalar components and the magnitude of the vector joining the given points are respectively and .
Question 3: A girl walks 4 km towards west, then she walks 3 km in a direction 30 east of north and stops. Determine the girls displacement from her initial point of departure. Answer Page 33 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Let O and B be the initial and final positions of the girl respectively. Then, the girls position can be shown as:
Now, we have:
By the triangle law of vector addition, we have:
Hence, the girls displacement from her initial point of departure is
. Page 34 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Question 4: If Answer , then is it true that ? Justify your answer.
Now, by the triangle law of vector addition, we have It is clearly known that
represent the sides of ABC.
Also, it is known that the sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the third side.
Hence, it is not true that
Question 5: Find the value of x for which Answer is a unit vector if . is a unit vector.
Page 35 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Hence, the required value of x is
Question 6: Find a vector of magnitude 5 units, and parallel to the resultant of the vectors . Answer We have,
Let
be the resultant of
Hence, the vector of magnitude 5 units and parallel to the resultant of vectors
is
Page 36 of 46
Class XII Question 7: If vector Answer We have, .
Maths
, find a unit vector parallel to the
Hence, the unit vector along
is
Question 8: Show that the points A (1, 2, 8), B (5, 0, 2) and C (11, 3, 7) are collinear, and find the ratio in which B divides AC. Answer The given points are A (1, 2, 8), B (5, 0, 2), and C (11, 3, 7).
Thus, the given points A, B, and C are collinear. Page 37 of 46

Class XII
Chapter 10 Vector Algebra . Then, we have:
Maths
Now, let point B divide AC in the ratio
On equating the corresponding components, we get:
Hence, point B divides AC in the ratio
Question 9: Find the position vector of a point R which divides the line joining two points P and Q whose position vectors are that P is the mid point of the line segment RQ. Answer It is given that . externally in the ratio 1: 2. Also, show
It is given that point R divides a line segment joining two points P and Q externally in the ratio 1: 2. Then, on using the section formula, we get:
Therefore, the position vector of point R is
Position vector of the mid-point of RQ =
Page 38 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Hence, P is the mid-point of the line segment RQ.
Question 10: The two adjacent sides of a parallelogram are and .
Find the unit vector parallel to its diagonal. Also, find its area. Answer Adjacent sides of a parallelogram are given as: Then, the diagonal of a parallelogram is given by . and
Thus, the unit vector parallel to the diagonal is
Area of parallelogram ABCD =
Hence, the area of the parallelogram is
square units.
Page 39 of 46
Maths
Show that the direction cosines of a vector equally inclined to the axes OX, OY and OZ
are Answer
Let a vector be equally inclined to axes OX, OY, and OZ at angle . Then, the direction cosines of the vector are cos , cos , and cos .
Hence, the direction cosines of the vector which are equally inclined to the axes
are
Question 12: Let perpendicular to both Answer Let Since . is perpendicular to both and , we have: and and , and . . Find a vector which is
Also, it is given that:
Page 40 of 46
Class XII
Maths
On solving (i), (ii), and (iii), we get:
Hence, the required vector is
Question 13: The scalar product of the vector and Answer with a unit vector along the sum of vectors .
is equal to one. Find the value of
Therefore, unit vector along
is given as:
Scalar product of
with this unit vector is 1.
Hence, the value of is 1. Page 41 of 46

Class XII
Maths
Question 14: If are mutually perpendicular vectors of equal magnitudes, show that the vector is equally inclined to Answer Since are mutually perpendicular vectors, we have and .
It is given that:
Let vector Then, we have:
be inclined to
at angles
respectively.
Page 42 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Now, as
Hence, the vector
is equally inclined to
Question 15:
Prove that given Answer .
, if and only if
are perpendicular,
Question 16: If is the angle between two vectors and , then only when
(A) (C) Answer
(B) (D)
Let be the angle between two vectors Then, without loss of generality, that . and
and
are non-zero vectors so
Page 43 of 46
Class XII
Maths
It is known that
Hence,
when
Question 17: Let and be two unit vectors and is the angle between them. Then is a unit
vector if
(A) Answer Let Then, Now, and
(B)
(C)
(D)
be two unit vectors and be the angle between them. . is a unit vector if .
Page 44 of 46
Class XII
Maths
Hence,
is a unit vector if
Question 18: The value of (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 1 (D) 3 Answer is
Question 19: If is the angle between any two vectors and , then when isequal to
Page 45 of 46
Class XII
Maths
(A) 0 (B) Answer
(C)
(D)
Let be the angle between two vectors Then, without loss of generality, that . and
and
are non-zero vectors, so
Hence,
when isequal to
Page 46 of 46
Class XII
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry Exercise 11.1
Maths
Question 1: If a line makes angles 90, 135, 45 with x, y and z-axes respectively, find its direction cosines. Answer Let direction cosines of the line be l, m, and n.
Therefore, the direction cosines of the line are
Question 2: Find the direction cosines of a line which makes equal angles with the coordinate axes. Answer Let the direction cosines of the line make an angle with each of the coordinate axes.
l = cos , m = cos , n = cos
Page 1 of 58
Class XII
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry
Maths
Thus, the direction cosines of the line, which is equally inclined to the coordinate axes,
are
Question 3: If a line has the direction ratios 18, 12, 4, then what are its direction cosines? Answer If a line has direction ratios of 18, 12, and 4, then its direction cosines are
Thus, the direction cosines are
Question 4: Show that the points (2, 3, 4), (1, 2, 1), (5, 8, 7) are collinear. Answer The given points are A (2, 3, 4), B ( 1, 2, 1), and C (5, 8, 7). It is known that the direction ratios of line joining the points, (x1, y1, z1) and (x2, y2, z2), are given by, x2 x1, y2 y1, and z2 z1. The direction ratios of AB are (1 2), (2 3), and (1 4) i.e., 3, 5, and 3. The direction ratios of BC are (5 ( 1)), (8 ( 2)), and (7 1) i.e., 6, 10, and 6. It can be seen that the direction ratios of BC are 2 times that of AB i.e., they are proportional. Therefore, AB is parallel to BC. Since point B is common to both AB and BC, points A, B, and C are collinear.
Page 2 of 58
Maths
Find the direction cosines of the sides of the triangle whose vertices are (3, 5, 4), ( 1, 1, 2) and ( 5, 5, 2) Answer The vertices of ABC are A (3, 5, 4), B (1, 1, 2), and C (5, 5, 2).
The direction ratios of side AB are (1 3), (1 5), and (2 (4)) i.e., 4, 4, and 6.
Therefore, the direction cosines of AB are
The direction ratios of BC are (5 (1)), (5 1), and (2 2) i.e., 4, 6, and 4. Therefore, the direction cosines of BC are
The direction ratios of CA are (5 3), (5 5), and (2 (4)) i.e., 8, 10, and 2. Therefore, the direction cosines of AC are
Page 3 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Page 4 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Exercise 11.2
Question 1: Show that the three lines with direction cosines
are mutually perpendicular. Answer Two lines with direction cosines, l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2, are perpendicular to each other, if l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2 = 0
(i) For the lines with direction cosines,
and
, we obtain
Therefore, the lines are perpendicular.
(ii) For the lines with direction cosines,
and
, we obtain
Therefore, the lines are perpendicular.
(iii) For the lines with direction cosines,
and
, we obtain
Page 5 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the lines are perpendicular. Thus, all the lines are mutually perpendicular.
Question 2: Show that the line through the points (1, 1, 2) (3, 4, 2) is perpendicular to the line through the points (0, 3, 2) and (3, 5, 6). Answer Let AB be the line joining the points, (1, 1, 2) and (3, 4, 2), and CD be the line joining the points, (0, 3, 2) and (3, 5, 6). The direction ratios, a1, b1, c1, of AB are (3 1), (4 (1)), and (2 2) i.e., 2, 5, and 4. The direction ratios, a2, b2, c2, of CD are (3 0), (5 3), and (6 2) i.e., 3, 2, and 4. AB and CD will be perpendicular to each other, if a1a2 + b1b2+ c1c2 = 0 a1a2 + b1b2+ c1c2 = 2 3 + 5 2 + ( 4) 4 = 6 + 10 16 =0 Therefore, AB and CD are perpendicular to each other.
Question 3: Show that the line through the points (4, 7, 8) (2, 3, 4) is parallel to the line through the points (1, 2, 1), (1, 2, 5). Answer Let AB be the line through the points, (4, 7, 8) and (2, 3, 4), and CD be the line through the points, (1, 2, 1) and (1, 2, 5). The directions ratios, a1, b1, c1, of AB are (2 4), (3 7), and (4 8) i.e., 2, 4, and 4. The direction ratios, a2, b2, c2, of CD are (1 (1)), (2 (2)), and (5 1) i.e., 2, 4, and 4. Page 6 of 58
Class XII
Maths
AB will be parallel to CD, if
Thus, AB is parallel to CD.
Question 4: Find the equation of the line which passes through the point (1, 2, 3) and is parallel to the vector Answer It is given that the line passes through the point A (1, 2, 3). Therefore, the position vector through A is .
It is known that the line which passes through point A and parallel to is a constant.
is given by
This is the required equation of the line.
Question 5: Find the equation of the line in vector and in Cartesian form that passes through the point with position vector Answer It is given that the line passes through the point with position vector Page 7 of 58
and is in the direction
Class XII
Maths
It is known that a line through a point with position vector the equation,
and parallel to
is given by
This is the required equation of the line in vector form.
Eliminating , we obtain the Cartesian form equation as
This is the required equation of the given line in Cartesian form.
Question 6: Find the Cartesian equation of the line which passes through the point
(2, 4, 5) and parallel to the line given by Answer It is given that the line passes through the point (2, 4, 5) and is parallel to
The direction ratios of the line,
, are 3, 5, and 6.
The required line is parallel to Therefore, its direction ratios are 3k, 5k, and 6k, where k 0 It is known that the equation of the line through the point (x1, y1, z1) and with direction
ratios, a, b, c, is given by Page 8 of 58

Class XII
Maths
Therefore the equation of the required line is
Question 7:
The Cartesian equation of a line is Answer The Cartesian equation of the line is
. Write its vector form.
The given line passes through the point (5, 4, 6). The position vector of this point is
Also, the direction ratios of the given line are 3, 7, and 2. This means that the line is in the direction of vector, It is known that the line through position vector given by the equation, and in the direction of the vector is
This is the required equation of the given line in vector form.
Question 8: Find the vector and the Cartesian equations of the lines that pass through the origin and (5, 2, 3). Answer The required line passes through the origin. Therefore, its position vector is given by,
The direction ratios of the line through origin and (5, 2, 3) are (5 0) = 5, (2 0) = 2, (3 0) = 3 Page 9 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The line is parallel to the vector given by the equation, The equation of the line in vector form through a point with position vector to is, and parallel
The equation of the line through the point (x1, y1, z1) and direction ratios a, b, c is given
by, Therefore, the equation of the required line in the Cartesian form is
Question 9: Find the vector and the Cartesian equations of the line that passes through the points (3, 2, 5), (3, 2, 6). Answer Let the line passing through the points, P (3, 2, 5) and Q (3, 2, 6), be PQ. Since PQ passes through P (3, 2, 5), its position vector is given by,
The direction ratios of PQ are given by, (3 3) = 0, (2 + 2) = 0, (6 + 5) = 11 The equation of the vector in the direction of PQ is
The equation of PQ in vector form is given by,
The equation of PQ in Cartesian form is
Page 10 of 58
Class XII
Maths
i.e.,
Question 10: Find the angle between the following pairs of lines: (i)
(ii)
and
Answer (i) Let Q be the angle between the given lines.
The angle between the given pairs of lines is given by, The given lines are parallel to the vectors, respectively. and ,
Page 11 of 58
Class XII
Maths
(ii) The given lines are parallel to the vectors, respectively.
and
Question 11: Find the angle between the following pairs of lines:
(i)
(ii) i. Answer
Page 12 of 58
Class XII
Maths
ii.
Let
and
be the vectors parallel to the pair of lines,
, respectively. and
The angle, Q, between the given pair of lines is given by the relation,
(ii) Let
be the vectors parallel to the given pair of lines,
and
, respectively.
Page 13 of 58
Class XII
Maths
If Q is the angle between the given pair of lines, then
Question 12:
Find the values of p so the line
and
are at right angles. Answer The given equations can be written in the standard form as
and
The direction ratios of the lines are 3,
, 2 and
respectively.
Two lines with direction ratios, a1, b1, c1 and a2, b2, c2, are perpendicular to each other, if a1a2 + b1 b2 + c1c2 = 0
Page 14 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Thus, the value of p is
Question 13:
Show that the lines Answer
and
The equations of the given lines are
and
The direction ratios of the given lines are 7, 5, 1 and 1, 2, 3 respectively. Two lines with direction ratios, a1, b1, c1 and a2, b2, c2, are perpendicular to each other, if a1a2 + b1 b2 + c1c2 = 0
7 1 + (5) 2 + 1 3
= 7 10 + 3 =0 Therefore, the given lines are perpendicular to each other.
Question 14: Find the shortest distance between the lines
Page 15 of 58
Class XII Answer
Maths
The equations of the given lines are
It is known that the shortest distance between the lines, given by,
and
, is
Comparing the given equations, we obtain
Substituting all the values in equation (1), we obtain
Page 16 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the shortest distance between the two lines is
units.
Question 15:
Find the shortest distance between the lines Answer
and
The given lines are
and
It is known that the shortest distance between the two lines,
, is given by,
Comparing the given equations, we obtain
Page 17 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Since distance is always non-negative, the distance between the given lines is units.
Question 16: Find the shortest distance between the lines whose vector equations are
Answer The given lines are and and , is
It is known that the shortest distance between the lines, given by, Page 18 of 58
Mobile: 9999 249717
Class XII
Maths
Comparing the given equations with
and
, we obtain
Therefore, the shortest distance between the two given lines is
units.
Question 17: Find the shortest distance between the lines whose vector equations are
Answer The given lines are Page 19 of 58

Class XII
Maths
It is known that the shortest distance between the lines, given by,
and
, is
For the given equations,
Therefore, the shortest distance between the lines is
units.
Page 20 of 58
Class XII
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry Exercise 11.3
Maths
Question 1: In each of the following cases, determine the direction cosines of the normal to the plane and the distance from the origin. (a)z = 2 (b) (c) Answer (a) The equation of the plane is z = 2 or 0x + 0y + z = 2 (1) The direction ratios of normal are 0, 0, and 1. (d)5y + 8 = 0
Dividing both sides of equation (1) by 1, we obtain
This is of the form lx + my + nz = d, where l, m, n are the direction cosines of normal to the plane and d is the distance of the perpendicular drawn from the origin. Therefore, the direction cosines are 0, 0, and 1 and the distance of the plane from the origin is 2 units. (b) x + y + z = 1 (1) The direction ratios of normal are 1, 1, and 1.
Dividing both sides of equation (1) by
, we obtain
Page 21 of 58
Class XII
Maths
This equation is of the form lx + my + nz = d, where l, m, n are the direction cosines of normal to the plane and d is the distance of normal from the origin.
Therefore, the direction cosines of the normal are
and the distance of
normal from the origin is (c) 2x + 3y z = 5 (1)
units.
The direction ratios of normal are 2, 3, and 1.
, we obtain
This equation is of the form lx + my + nz = d, where l, m, n are the direction cosines of normal to the plane and d is the distance of normal from the origin.
Therefore, the direction cosines of the normal to the plane are
and
the distance of normal from the origin is (d) 5y + 8 = 0
units.
0x 5y + 0z = 8 (1)
Page 22 of 58
Class XII
Maths
This equation is of the form lx + my + nz = d, where l, m, n are the direction cosines of normal to the plane and d is the distance of normal from the origin. Therefore, the direction cosines of the normal to the plane are 0, 1, and 0 and the
distance of normal from the origin is
units.
Question 2: Find the vector equation of a plane which is at a distance of 7 units from the origin and normal to the vector Answer The normal vector is, .
It is known that the equation of the plane with position vector
is given by,
This is the vector equation of the required plane.
Question 3: Find the Cartesian equation of the following planes: (a) (c) Answer (a) It is given that equation of the plane is (b)
For any arbitrary point P (x, y, z) on the plane, position vector
is given by,
Page 23 of 58
Class XII
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry in equation (1), we obtain
Maths
This is the Cartesian equation of the plane. (b) For any arbitrary point P (x, y, z) on the plane, position vector is given by,
This is the Cartesian equation of the plane. (c) For any arbitrary point P (x, y, z) on the plane, position vector is given by,
This is the Cartesian equation of the given plane.
Question 4: In the following cases, find the coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from the origin. (a) (c) Answer (a) Let the coordinates of the foot of perpendicular P from the origin to the plane be (x1, y1, z1). (d) (b)
Page 24 of 58
Class XII 2x + 3y + 4z 12 = 0
Maths
2x + 3y + 4z = 12 (1)
, we obtain
This equation is of the form lx + my + nz = d, where l, m, n are the direction cosines of normal to the plane and d is the distance of normal from the origin. The coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular are given by (ld, md, nd). Therefore, the coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular are
(b) Let the coordinates of the foot of perpendicular P from the origin to the plane be (x1, y1, z1).
(1)
The direction ratios of the normal are 0, 3, and 4.
Page 25 of 58
Class XII
Maths
(c) Let the coordinates of the foot of perpendicular P from the origin to the plane be (x1, y1, z1). (1) The direction ratios of the normal are 1, 1, and 1.
, we obtain
(d) Let the coordinates of the foot of perpendicular P from the origin to the plane be (x1, y1, z1).
0x 5y + 0z = 8 (1)
The direction ratios of the normal are 0, 5, and 0.
Page 26 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: Find the vector and Cartesian equation of the planes (a) that passes through the point (1, 0, 2) and the normal to the plane is (b) that passes through the point (1, 4, 6) and the normal vector to the plane is . Answer (a) The position vector of point (1, 0, 2) is The normal vector perpendicular to the plane is .
The vector equation of the plane is given by,
is the position vector of any point P (x, y, z) in the plane.
Page 27 of 58
Class XII
Maths
This is the Cartesian equation of the required plane. (b) The position vector of the point (1, 4, 6) is The normal vector perpendicular to the plane is
The vector equation of the plane is given by,
is the position vector of any point P (x, y, z) in the plane.
This is the Cartesian equation of the required plane.
Question 6: Find the equations of the planes that passes through three points. (a) (1, 1, 1), (6, 4, 5), (4, 2, 3) (b) (1, 1, 0), (1, 2, 1), (2, 2, 1) Answer (a) The given points are A (1, 1, 1), B (6, 4, 5), and C (4, 2, 3).
Page 28 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Since A, B, C are collinear points, there will be infinite number of planes passing through the given points. (b) The given points are A (1, 1, 0), B (1, 2, 1), and C (2, 2, 1).
Therefore, a plane will pass through the points A, B, and C. It is known that the equation of the plane through the points, , is , and
This is the Cartesian equation of the required plane.
Question 7: Find the intercepts cut off by the plane Answer
Page 29 of 58
Class XII
Maths
It is known that the equation of a plane in intercept form is are the intercepts cut off by the plane at x, y, and z axes respectively. Therefore, for the given equation,
, where a, b, c
Thus, the intercepts cut off by the plane are
Question 8: Find the equation of the plane with intercept 3 on the y-axis and parallel to ZOX plane. Answer The equation of the plane ZOX is y=0 Any plane parallel to it is of the form, y = a Since the y-intercept of the plane is 3,
a=3
Thus, the equation of the required plane is y = 3
Question 9: Find the equation of the plane through the intersection of the planes and Answer and the point (2, 2, 1)
Page 30 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The equation of any plane through the intersection of the planes, 3x y + 2z 4 = 0 and x + y + z 2 = 0, is
The plane passes through the point (2, 2, 1). Therefore, this point will satisfy equation (1).
Substituting
This is the required equation of the plane.
Question 10: Find the vector equation of the plane passing through the intersection of the planes and through the point (2, 1, 3) Answer The equations of the planes are
The equation of any plane through the intersection of the planes given in equations (1) and (2) is given by,
, where Page 31 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The plane passes through the point (2, 1, 3). Therefore, its position vector is given by,
Substituting
This is the vector equation of the required plane.
Question 11: Find the equation of the plane through the line of intersection of the planes and Answer The equation of the plane through the intersection of the planes, , is and which is perpendicular to the plane
The direction ratios, a1, b1, c1, of this plane are (2 + 1), (3 + 1), and (4 + 1). The plane in equation (1) is perpendicular to Page 32 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Its direction ratios, a2, b2, c2, are 1, 1, and 1. Since the planes are perpendicular,
Substituting
Question 12: Find the angle between the planes whose vector equations are and Answer The equations of the given planes are It is known that if and are normal to the planes, and and , then the .
angle between them, Q, is given by,
Here,
Page 33 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Question 13: In the following cases, determine whether the given planes are parallel or perpendicular, and in case they are neither, find the angles between them. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Answer The direction ratios of normal to the plane, . , are a1, b1, c1 and
The angle between L1 and L2 is given by,
(a) The equations of the planes are 7x + 5y + 6z + 30 = 0 and 3x y 10z + 4 = 0 Here, a1 = 7, b1 =5, c1 = 6
Page 34 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the given planes are not perpendicular.
It can be seen that, Therefore, the given planes are not parallel. The angle between them is given by,
(b) The equations of the planes are Here, and
and
Thus, the given planes are perpendicular to each other. (c) The equations of the given planes are Here, and and
Thus, the given planes are not perpendicular to each other.
Page 35 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Thus, the given planes are parallel to each other. (d) The equations of the planes are Here, and and
Thus, the given lines are parallel to each other. (e) The equations of the given planes are Here, and and
Therefore, the given lines are not perpendicular to each other.
Therefore, the given lines are not parallel to each other. The angle between the planes is given by,
Page 36 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Question 14: In the following cases, find the distance of each of the given points from the corresponding given plane. Point Plane (a) (0, 0, 0) (b) (3, 2, 1) (c) (2, 3, 5) (d) (6, 0, 0) Answer It is known that the distance between a point, p(x1, y1, z1), and a plane, Ax + By + Cz = D, is given by,
(a) The given point is (0, 0, 0) and the plane is
(b) The given point is (3, 2, 1) and the plane is
(c) The given point is (2, 3, 5) and the plane is
(d) The given point is (6, 0, 0) and the plane is
Page 37 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Page 38 of 58
Class XII
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry Miscellaneous Solutions
Maths
Question 1: Show that the line joining the origin to the point (2, 1, 1) is perpendicular to the line determined by the points (3, 5, 1), (4, 3, 1). Answer Let OA be the line joining the origin, O (0, 0, 0), and the point, A (2, 1, 1). Also, let BC be the line joining the points, B (3, 5, 1) and C (4, 3, 1). The direction ratios of OA are 2, 1, and 1 and of BC are (4 3) = 1, (3 5) = 2, and (1 + 1) = 0 OA is perpendicular to BC, if a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2 = 0
a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2 = 2 1 + 1 (2) + 1 0 = 2 2 = 0
Thus, OA is perpendicular to BC.
Question 2: If l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2 are the direction cosines of two mutually perpendicular lines, show that the direction cosines of the line perpendicular to both of these are m1n2 m2n1, n1l2 n2l1, l1m2 l2m1. Answer It is given that l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2 are the direction cosines of two mutually perpendicular lines. Therefore,
Let l, m, n be the direction cosines of the line which is perpendicular to the line with direction cosines l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2.
Page 39 of 58
Class XII
Maths
l, m, n are the direction cosines of the line.
l2 + m2 + n2 = 1 (5)
It is known that,
Substituting the values from equations (5) and (6) in equation (4), we obtain
Thus, the direction cosines of the required line are Page 40 of 58

Class XII
Maths
Question 3: Find the angle between the lines whose direction ratios are a, b, c and b c, c a, a b. Answer The angle Q between the lines with direction cosines, a, b, c and b c, c a, a b, is given by,
Thus, the angle between the lines is 90.
Question 4: Find the equation of a line parallel to x-axis and passing through the origin. Answer The line parallel to x-axis and passing through the origin is x-axis itself. Let A be a point on x-axis. Therefore, the coordinates of A are given by (a, 0, 0), where
a R.
Direction ratios of OA are (a 0) = a, 0, 0 The equation of OA is given by,
Thus, the equation of line parallel to x-axis and passing through origin is
Page 41 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: If the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D be (1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 7), (4, 3, 6) and (2, 9, 2) respectively, then find the angle between the lines AB and CD. Answer The coordinates of A, B, C, and D are (1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 7), (4, 3, 6), and (2, 9, 2) respectively. The direction ratios of AB are (4 1) = 3, (5 2) = 3, and (7 3) = 4 The direction ratios of CD are (2 ( 4)) = 6, (9 3) = 6, and (2 (6)) = 8
It can be seen that, Therefore, AB is parallel to CD. Thus, the angle between AB and CD is either 0 or 180.
sQuestion 6:
If the lines of k. Answer
and
are perpendicular, find the value
The direction of ratios of the lines, 2k, 2 and 3k, 1, 5 respectively.
and
, are 3,
It is known that two lines with direction ratios, a1, b1, c1 and a2, b2, c2, are perpendicular, if a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2 = 0
Page 42 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, for
, the given lines are perpendicular to each other.
Question 7: Find the vector equation of the plane passing through (1, 2, 3) and perpendicular to the plane Answer The position vector of the point (1, 2, 3) is The direction ratios of the normal to the plane, and the normal vector is The equation of a line passing through a point and perpendicular to the given plane is given by, , are 1, 2, and 5
Question 8: Find the equation of the plane passing through (a, b, c) and parallel to the plane
Answer Any plane parallel to the plane, , is of the form
The plane passes through the point (a, b, c). Therefore, the position vector point is Therefore, equation (1) becomes
of this
Page 43 of 58
Class XII Substituting
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry in equation (1), we obtain
Maths
This is the vector equation of the required plane. Substituting in equation (2), we obtain
Question 9: Find the shortest distance between lines and Answer The given lines are .
It is known that the shortest distance between two lines, given by
and
, is
Comparing
to equations (1) and (2), we obtain
Page 44 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the shortest distance between the two given lines is 9 units.
Question 10: Find the coordinates of the point where the line through (5, 1, 6) and (3, 4, 1) crosses the YZ-plane Answer It is known that the equation of the line passing through the points, (x1, y1, z1) and (x2,
y2, z2), is The line passing through the points, (5, 1, 6) and (3, 4, 1), is given by,
Any point on the line is of the form (5 2k, 3k + 1, 6 5k). The equation of YZ-plane is x = 0 Since the line passes through YZ-plane, 5 2k = 0
Page 45 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the required point is
Question 11: Find the coordinates of the point where the line through (5, 1, 6) and (3, 4, 1) crosses the ZX plane. Answer It is known that the equation of the line passing through the points, (x1, y1, z1) and (x2,
y2, z2), is The line passing through the points, (5, 1, 6) and (3, 4, 1), is given by,
Any point on the line is of the form (5 2k, 3k + 1, 6 5k). Since the line passes through ZX-plane,
Therefore, the required point is
Page 46 of 58
Maths
Find the coordinates of the point where the line through (3, 4, 5) and (2, 3, 1) crosses the plane 2x + y + z = 7). Answer It is known that the equation of the line through the points, (x1, y1, z1) and (x2, y2, z2), is
Since the line passes through the points, (3, 4, 5) and (2, 3, 1), its equation is given by,
Therefore, any point on the line is of the form (3 k, k 4, 6k 5). This point lies on the plane, 2x + y + z = 7
2 (3 k) + (k 4) + (6k 5) = 7
Hence, the coordinates of the required point are (3 2, 2 4, 6 2 5) i.e., (1, 2, 7).
Question 13: Find the equation of the plane passing through the point (1, 3, 2) and perpendicular to each of the planes x + 2y + 3z = 5 and 3x + 3y + z = 0. Answer The equation of the plane passing through the point (1, 3, 2) is a (x + 1) + b (y 3) + c (z 2) = 0 (1) where, a, b, c are the direction ratios of normal to the plane.
Page 47 of 58
Class XII
Chapter 11 Three Dimensional Geometry and , are
Maths
It is known that two planes, perpendicular, if
Plane (1) is perpendicular to the plane, x + 2y + 3z = 5
Also, plane (1) is perpendicular to the plane, 3x + 3y + z = 0
Substituting the values of a, b, and c in equation (1), we obtain
Question 14: If the points (1, 1, p) and (3, 0, 1) be equidistant from the plane , then find the value of p. Answer The position vector through the point (1, 1, p) is Similarly, the position vector through the point (3, 0, 1) is
Page 48 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The equation of the given plane is It is known that the perpendicular distance between a point whose position vector is
and the plane, Here,
is given by, and d
Therefore, the distance between the point (1, 1, p) and the given plane is
Similarly, the distance between the point (3, 0, 1) and the given plane is
It is given that the distance between the required plane and the points, (1, 1, p) and (3, 0, 1), is equal.
D 1 = D2
Page 49 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Question 15: Find the equation of the plane passing through the line of intersection of the planes and Answer The given planes are and parallel to x-axis.
The equation of any plane passing through the line of intersection of these planes is
Its direction ratios are (2 + 1), (3 + 1), and (1 ). The required plane is parallel to x-axis. Therefore, its normal is perpendicular to x-axis. The direction ratios of x-axis are 1, 0, and 0.
Substituting
Page 50 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, its Cartesian equation is y 3z + 6 = 0 This is the equation of the required plane.
Question 16: If O be the origin and the coordinates of P be (1, 2, 3), then find the equation of the plane passing through P and perpendicular to OP. Answer The coordinates of the points, O and P, are (0, 0, 0) and (1, 2, 3) respectively. Therefore, the direction ratios of OP are (1 0) = 1, (2 0) = 2, and (3 0) = 3 It is known that the equation of the plane passing through the point (x1, y1 z1) is where, a, b, and c are the direction ratios of normal. Here, the direction ratios of normal are 1, 2, and 3 and the point P is (1, 2, 3). Thus, the equation of the required plane is
Question 17: Find the equation of the plane which contains the line of intersection of the planes , . Answer The equations of the given planes are and which is perpendicular to the plane
The equation of the plane passing through the line intersection of the plane given in equation (1) and equation (2) is
Page 51 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The plane in equation (3) is perpendicular to the plane,
Substituting
This is the vector equation of the required plane. The Cartesian equation of this plane can be obtained by substituting equation (3). in
Question 18: Find the distance of the point (1, 5, 10) from the point of intersection of the line and the plane Answer The equation of the given line is .
The equation of the given plane is
from equation (1) in equation (2), we obtain
Page 52 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Substituting this value in equation (1), we obtain the equation of the line as
This means that the position vector of the point of intersection of the line and the plane is This shows that the point of intersection of the given line and plane is given by the coordinates, (2, 1, 2). The point is (1, 5, 10). The distance d between the points, (2, 1, 2) and (1, 5, 10), is
Question 19: Find the vector equation of the line passing through (1, 2, 3) and parallel to the planes and Answer Let the required line be parallel to vector given by, .
The position vector of the point (1, 2, 3) is The equation of line passing through (1, 2, 3) and parallel to is given by,
The equations of the given planes are
Page 53 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The line in equation (1) and plane in equation (2) are parallel. Therefore, the normal to the plane of equation (2) and the given line are perpendicular.
Therefore, the direction ratios of
are 3, 5, and 4.
This is the equation of the required line.
Question 20: Find the vector equation of the line passing through the point (1, 2, 4) and
perpendicular to the two lines: Answer Let the required line be parallel to the vector given by,
Page 54 of 58
Class XII
Maths
The position vector of the point (1, 2, 4) is The equation of the line passing through (1, 2, 4) and parallel to vector is
The equations of the lines are
Line (1) and line (2) are perpendicular to each other.
Also, line (1) and line (3) are perpendicular to each other.
Direction ratios of
are 2, 3, and 6.
Substituting
This is the equation of the required line.
Page 55 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Question 21: Prove that if a plane has the intercepts a, b, c and is at a distance of P units from the
origin, then Answer The equation of a plane having intercepts a, b, c with x, y, and z axes respectively is given by,
The distance (p) of the plane from the origin is given by,
Question 22: Distance between the two planes: (A)2 units (B)4 units (C)8 units and is
(D) Answer The equations of the planes are
Page 56 of 58
Class XII
Maths
It can be seen that the given planes are parallel. It is known that the distance between two parallel planes, ax + by + cz = d1 and ax + by + cz = d2, is given by,
Thus, the distance between the lines is Hence, the correct answer is D.
units.
Question 23: The planes: 2x y + 4z = 5 and 5x 2.5y + 10z = 6 are (A) Perpendicular (B) Parallel (C) intersect y-axis
(C) passes through Answer The equations of the planes are 2x y + 4z = 5 (1) 5x 2.5y + 10z = 6 (2) It can be seen that,
Page 57 of 58
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the given planes are parallel. Hence, the correct answer is B.
Page 58 of 58
Class XII
Chapter 12 Linear Programming Exercise 12.1
Maths
Question 1: Maximise Z = 3x + 4y Subject to the constraints: Answer The feasible region determined by the constraints, x + y 4, x 0, y 0, is as follows.
The corner points of the feasible region are O (0, 0), A (4, 0), and B (0, 4). The values of Z at these points are as follows. Corner point O(0, 0) A(4, 0) B(0, 4) Z = 3x + 4y 0 12 16 Maximum
Therefore, the maximum value of Z is 16 at the point B (0, 4).
Question 2: Minimise Z = 3x + 4y subject to Answer .
Page 1 of 50
Class XII
Chapter 12 Linear Programming
Maths x
The feasible region determined by the system of constraints, 0, and y 0, is as follows.
The corner points of the feasible region are O (0, 0), A (4, 0), B (2, 3), and C (0, 4). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point 0(0, 0) A(4, 0) B(2, 3) C(0, 4) Z = 3x + 4y 0 12 6 16 Minimum
Therefore, the minimum value of Z is 12 at the point (4, 0).
Question 3: Maximise Z = 5x + 3y subject to Answer The feasible region determined by the system of constraints, 3x + 5y 15, 5x + 2y 10, x 0, and y 0, are as follows. .
Page 2 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are O (0, 0), A (2, 0), B (0, 3), and The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point 0(0, 0) A(2, 0) B(0, 3) Z = 5x + 3y 0 10 9 Maximum
Therefore, the maximum value of Z is
Question 4: Minimise Z = 3x + 5y such that Answer The feasible region determined by the system of constraints, y 0, is as follows. Page 3 of 50
, and x,
Class XII
Maths
It can be seen that the feasible region is unbounded.
The corner points of the feasible region are A (3, 0), The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(3, 0) Z = 3x + 5y 9 7 Smallest
, and C (0, 2).
C(0, 2)
10
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, 7 may or may not be the minimum value of Z. For this, we draw the graph of the inequality, 3x + 5y < 7, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. It can be seen that the feasible region has no common point with 3x + 5y < 7 Therefore,
the minimum value of Z is 7 at
Question 5: Maximise Z = 3x + 2y Page 4 of 50

Class XII subject to Answer
Chapter 12 Linear Programming .
Maths
The feasible region determined by the constraints, x + 2y 10, 3x + y 15, x 0, and y 0, is as follows.
The corner points of the feasible region are A (5, 0), B (4, 3), and C (0, 5). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(5, 0) B(4, 3) C(0, 5) Z = 3x + 2y 15 18 10 Maximum
Therefore, the maximum value of Z is 18 at the point (4, 3).
Question 6: Minimise Z = x + 2y subject to Answer .
Page 5 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The feasible region determined by the constraints, 2x + y 3, x + 2y 6, x 0, and y 0, is as follows.
The corner points of the feasible region are A (6, 0) and B (0, 3). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(6, 0) B(0, 3) Z = x + 2y 6 6
It can be seen that the value of Z at points A and B is same. If we take any other point such as (2, 2) on line x + 2y = 6, then Z = 6 Thus, the minimum value of Z occurs for more than 2 points. Therefore, the value of Z is minimum at every point on the line, x + 2y = 6
Question 7: Minimise and Maximise Z = 5x + 10y subject to Answer The feasible region determined by the constraints, x + 2y 120, x + y 60, x 2y 0, x 0, and y 0, is as follows. .
Page 6 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are A (60, 0), B (120, 0), C (60, 30), and D (40, 20). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(60, 0) B(120, 0) C(60, 30) D(40, 20) Z = 5x + 10y 300 600 600 400 Minimum Maximum Maximum
The minimum value of Z is 300 at (60, 0) and the maximum value of Z is 600 at all the points on the line segment joining (120, 0) and (60, 30).
Question 8: Minimise and Maximise Z = x + 2y subject to Answer The feasible region determined by the constraints, x + 2y 100, 2x y 0, 2x + y 200, x 0, and y 0, is as follows. .
Page 7 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are A(0, 50), B(20, 40), C(50, 100), and D(0, 200). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(0, 50) B(20, 40) C(50, 100) D(0, 200) Z = x + 2y 100 100 250 400 Maximum Minimum Minimum
The maximum value of Z is 400 at (0, 200) and the minimum value of Z is 100 at all the points on the line segment joining the points (0, 50) and (20, 40).
Question 9: Maximise Z = x + 2y, subject to the constraints: .
Page 8 of 50
Class XII Answer
Maths
The feasible region determined by the constraints, as follows.
is
It can be seen that the feasible region is unbounded. The values of Z at corner points A (6, 0), B (4, 1), and C (3, 2) are as follows. Corner point A(6, 0) B(4, 1) C(3, 2) Z = x + 2y Z=6 Z=2 Z=1
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, Z = 1 may or may not be the maximum value. For this, we graph the inequality, x + 2y > 1, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. The resulting feasible region has points in common with the feasible region. Therefore, Z = 1 is not the maximum value. Z has no maximum value.
Question 10: Maximise Z = x + y, subject to Answer Page 9 of 50

Class XII
Maths is as follows.
The region determined by the constraints,
There is no feasible region and thus, Z has no maximum value.
Page 10 of 50
Class XII
Chapter 12 Linear Programming Exercise 12.2
Maths
Question 1: Reshma wishes to mix two types of food P and Q in such a way that the vitamin contents of the mixture contain at least 8 units of vitamin A and 11 units of vitamin B. Food P costs Rs 60/kg and Food Q costs Rs 80/kg. Food P contains 3 units /kg of vitamin A and 5 units /kg of vitamin B while food Q contains 4 units /kg of vitamin A and 2 units /kg of vitamin B. Determine the minimum cost of the mixture? Answer Let the mixture contain x kg of food P and y kg of food Q. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be compiled in a table as follows. Vitamin A (units/kg) Food P Food Q Requirement (units/kg) The mixture must contain at least 8 units of vitamin A and 11 units of vitamin B. Therefore, the constraints are 3x + 4y 8 5x + 2y 11 Total cost, Z, of purchasing food is, Z = 60x + 80y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Minimise Z = 60x + 80y (1) subject to the constraints, 3x + 4y 8 (2) 5x + 2y 11 (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is as follows. 3 4 8 Vitamin B (units/kg) 5 2 11 Cost (Rs/kg) 60 80
Page 11 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point Z = 60x + 80y 160
160
440
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, 160 may or may not be the minimum value of Z. For this, we graph the inequality, 60x + 80y < 160 or 3x + 4y < 8, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. It can be seen that the feasible region has no common point with 3x + 4y < 8
Page 12 of 50
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the minimum cost of the mixture will be Rs 160 at the line segment joining
the points
Question 2: One kind of cake requires 200g flour and 25g of fat, and another kind of cake requires 100g of flour and 50g of fat. Find the maximum number of cakes which can be made from 5 kg of flour and 1 kg of fat assuming that there is no shortage of the other ingredients used in making the cakes? Answer Let there be x cakes of first kind and y cakes of second kind. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be complied in a table as follows. Flour (g) Cakes of first kind, x Cakes of second kind, y Availability 200 100 5000 Fat (g) 25 50 1000
Total numbers of cakes, Z, that can be made are, Z = x + y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Maximize Z = x + y (1) subject to the constraints,
The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is as follows.
Page 13 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (25, 0), B (20, 10), O (0, 0), and C (0, 20). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(25, 0) B(20, 10) C(0, 20) O(0, 0) Z=x+y 25 30 20 0 Maximum
Thus, the maximum numbers of cakes that can be made are 30 (20 of one kind and 10 of the other kind).
Question 3: A factory makes tennis rackets and cricket bats. A tennis racket takes 1.5 hours of machine time and 3 hours of craftsmans time in its making while a cricket bat takes 3 hour of machine time and 1 hour of craftsmans time. In a day, the factory has the availability of not more than 42 hours of machine time and 24 hours of craftsmans time. (ii) What number of rackets and bats must be made if the factory is to work at full capacity? (ii) If the profit on a racket and on a bat is Rs 20 and Rs 10 respectively, find the maximum profit of the factory when it works at full capacity. Page 14 of 50
Class XII Answer
Maths
(i) Let the number of rackets and the number of bats to be made be x and y respectively. The machine time is not available for more than 42 hours.
The craftsmans time is not available for more than 24 hours.
The factory is to work at full capacity. Therefore, 1.5x + 3y = 42 3x + y = 24 On solving these equations, we obtain x = 4 and y = 12 Thus, 4 rackets and 12 bats must be made. (i) The given information can be complied in a table as follows. Tennis Racket Machine Time (h) Craftsmans Time (h) 1.5 3 Cricket Bat 3 1 Availability 42 24
1.5x + 3y 42
3x + y 24 x, y 0 The profit on a racket is Rs 20 and on a bat is Rs 10.
The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Maximize (1)
subject to the constraints, 1.5x + 3y 42 (2)
Page 15 of 50
Class XII 3x + y 24 (3) x, y 0 (4)
Maths
The corner points are A (8, 0), B (4, 12), C (0, 14), and O (0, 0). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(8, 0) B(4, 12) C(0, 14) O(0, 0) Z = 20x + 10y 160 200 140 0 Maximum
Thus, the maximum profit of the factory when it works to its full capacity is Rs 200.
Page 16 of 50
Maths
A manufacturer produces nuts ad bolts. It takes 1 hour of work on machine A and 3 hours on machine B to produce a package of nuts. It takes 3 hours on machine A and 1 hour on machine B to produce a package of bolts. He earns a profit, of Rs 17.50 per package on nuts and Rs. 7.00 per package on bolts. How many packages of each should be produced each day so as to maximize his profit, if he operates his machines for at the most 12 hours a day? Answer Let the manufacturer produce x packages of nuts and y packages of bolts. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be compiled in a table as follows. Nuts Machine A (h) Machine B (h) 1 3 Bolts 3 1 Availability 12 12
The profit on a package of nuts is Rs 17.50 and on a package of bolts is Rs 7. Therefore, the constraints are
Total profit, Z = 17.5x + 7y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Maximise Z = 17.5x + 7y (1) subject to the constraints, x + 3y 12 (2) 3x + y 12 (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is as follows.
Page 17 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (4, 0), B (3, 3), and C (0, 4). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point O(0, 0) A(4, 0) B(3, 3) C(0, 4) Z = 17.5x + 7y 0 70 73.5 28 Maximum
The maximum value of Z is Rs 73.50 at (3, 3). Thus, 3 packages of nuts and 3 packages of bolts should be produced each day to get the maximum profit of Rs 73.50.
Question 5: A factory manufactures two types of screws, A and B. Each type of screw requires the use of two machines, an automatic and a hand operated. It takes 4 minutes on the automatic and 6 minutes on hand operated machines to manufacture a package of screws A, while it takes 6 minutes on automatic and 3 minutes on the hand operated
Page 18 of 50
Class XII
Maths
machines to manufacture a package of screws B. Each machine is available for at the most 4 hours on any day. The manufacturer can sell a package of screws A at a profit of Rs 7 and screws B at a profit of Rs10. Assuming that he can sell all the screws he manufactures, how many packages of each type should the factory owner produce in a day in order to maximize his profit? Determine the maximum profit. Answer Let the factory manufacture x screws of type A and y screws of type B on each day. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be compiled in a table as follows. Screw A Automatic Machine (min) Hand Operated Machine (min) 4 6 Screw B 6 3 Availability 4 60 =120 4 60 =120
The profit on a package of screws A is Rs 7 and on the package of screws B is Rs 10. Therefore, the constraints are
Total profit, Z = 7x + 10y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Maximize Z = 7x + 10y (1) subject to the constraints, (2) (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is
Page 19 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (40, 0), B (30, 20), and C (0, 40). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(40, 0) B(30, 20) C(0, 40) Z = 7x + 10y 280 410 400 Maximum
The maximum value of Z is 410 at (30, 20). Thus, the factory should produce 30 packages of screws A and 20 packages of screws B to get the maximum profit of Rs 410.
Question 6: A cottage industry manufactures pedestal lamps and wooden shades, each requiring the use of a grinding/cutting machine and a sprayer. It takes 2 hours on grinding/cutting machine and 3 hours on the sprayer to manufacture a pedestal lamp. It takes 1 hour on the grinding/cutting machine and 2 hours on the sprayer to manufacture a shade. On any day, the sprayer is available for at the most 20 hours and the grinding/cutting
Page 20 of 50
Class XII
Maths
machine for at the most 12 hours. The profit from the sale of a lamp is Rs 5 and that from a shade is Rs 3. Assuming that the manufacturer can sell all the lamps and shades that he produces, how should he schedule his daily production in order to maximize his profit? Answer Let the cottage industry manufacture x pedestal lamps and y wooden shades. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be compiled in a table as follows. Lamps Grinding/Cutting Machine (h) Sprayer (h) 2 3 Shades 1 2 Availability 12 20
The profit on a lamp is Rs 5 and on the shades is Rs 3. Therefore, the constraints are
Total profit, Z = 5x + 3y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Maximize Z = 5x + 3y (1) subject to the constraints, (2) (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is as follows.
Page 21 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (6, 0), B (4, 4), and C (0, 10). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows Corner point A(6, 0) B(4, 4) C(0, 10) Z = 5x + 3y 30 32 30 Maximum
The maximum value of Z is 32 at (4, 4). Thus, the manufacturer should produce 4 pedestal lamps and 4 wooden shades to maximize his profits.
Question 7: A company manufactures two types of novelty souvenirs made of plywood. Souvenirs of type A require 5 minutes each for cutting and 10 minutes each for assembling. Souvenirs Page 22 of 50
Class XII
Maths
of type B require 8 minutes each for cutting and 8 minutes each for assembling. There are 3 hours 20 minutes available for cutting and 4 hours of assembling. The profit is Rs 5 each for type A and Rs 6 each for type B souvenirs. How many souvenirs of each type should the company manufacture in order to maximize the profit? Answer Let the company manufacture x souvenirs of type A and y souvenirs of type B. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be complied in a table as follows. Type A Cutting (min) Assembling (min) 5 10 Type B 8 8 Availability 3 60 + 20 =200 4 60 = 240
The profit on type A souvenirs is Rs 5 and on type B souvenirs is Rs 6. Therefore, the constraints are
i.e., Total profit, Z = 5x + 6y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Maximize Z = 5x + 6y (1) subject to the constraints, (2) (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is as follows.
Page 23 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (24, 0), B (8, 20), and C (0, 25). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(24, 0) B(8, 20) C(0, 25) Z = 5x + 6y 120 160 150 Maximum
The maximum value of Z is 200 at (8, 20). Thus, 8 souvenirs of type A and 20 souvenirs of type B should be produced each day to get the maximum profit of Rs 160.
Question 8: A merchant plans to sell two types of personal computers a desktop model and a portable model that will cost Rs 25000 and Rs 40000 respectively. He estimates that the total monthly demand of computers will not exceed 250 units. Determine the number of units of each type of computers which the merchant should stock to get maximum profit if he does not want to invest more than Rs 70 lakhs and if his profit on the desktop model is Rs 4500 and on portable model is Rs 5000. Answer Let the merchant stock x desktop models and y portable models. Therefore,
Page 24 of 50
Class XII x 0 and y 0
Maths
The cost of a desktop model is Rs 25000 and of a portable model is Rs 4000. However, the merchant can invest a maximum of Rs 70 lakhs.
The monthly demand of computers will not exceed 250 units.
The profit on a desktop model is Rs 4500 and the profit on a portable model is Rs 5000. Total profit, Z = 4500x + 5000y Thus, the mathematical formulation of the given problem is
subject to the constraints,
The corner points are A (250, 0), B (200, 50), and C (0, 175). The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point Z = 4500x + 5000y
Page 25 of 50
Class XII A(250, 0) B(200, 50) C(0, 175)
Chapter 12 Linear Programming 1125000 1150000 875000 Maximum
Maths
The maximum value of Z is 1150000 at (200, 50). Thus, the merchant should stock 200 desktop models and 50 portable models to get the maximum profit of Rs 1150000.
Question 9: A diet is to contain at least 80 units of vitamin A and 100 units of minerals. Two foods F1and F2 are available. Food F1 costs Rs 4 per unit food and F2 costs Rs 6 per unit. One unit of food F1 contains 3 units of vitamin A and 4 units of minerals. One unit of food F2 contains 6 units of vitamin A and 3 units of minerals. Formulate this as a linear programming problem. Find the minimum cost for diet that consists of mixture of these two foods and also meets the minimal nutritional requirements? Answer Let the diet contain x units of food F1 and y units of food F2. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be complied in a table as follows. Vitamin A (units) Mineral (units) Cost per unit (Rs) Food F1 (x) Food F2 (y) Requirement 3 6 80 4 3 100 4 6
The cost of food F1 is Rs 4 per unit and of Food F2 is Rs 6 per unit. Therefore, the constraints are 3x + 6y 80 4x + 3y 100 x, y 0
Page 26 of 50
Class XII
Maths
Total cost of the diet, Z = 4x + 6y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Minimise Z = 4x + 6y (1) subject to the constraints, 3x + 6y 80 (2) 4x + 3y 100 (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the constraints is as follows.
The corner points of the feasible region are
The corner points are The values of Z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point Z = 4x + 6y
Page 27 of 50
Class XII
Maths
104
Minimum
200
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, 104 may or may not be the minimum value of Z. For this, we draw a graph of the inequality, 4x + 6y < 104 or 2x + 3y < 52, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. It can be seen that the feasible region has no common point with 2x + 3y < 52 Therefore, the minimum cost of the mixture will be Rs 104.
Question 10: There are two types of fertilizers F1 and F2. F1 consists of 10% nitrogen and 6% phosphoric acid and F2 consists of 5% nitrogen and 10% phosphoric acid. After testing the soil conditions, a farmer finds that she needs at least 14 kg of nitrogen and 14 kg of phosphoric acid for her crop. If F1 cost Rs 6/kg and F2 costs Rs 5/kg, determine how much of each type of fertilizer should be used so that nutrient requirements are met at a minimum cost. What is the minimum cost? Answer Let the farmer buy x kg of fertilizer F1 and y kg of fertilizer F2. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The given information can be complied in a table as follows. Nitrogen (%) F1 (x) F2 (y) 10 5 Phosphoric Acid (%) 6 10 Cost (Rs/kg) 6 5
Page 28 of 50
Class XII Requirement (kg)
Chapter 12 Linear Programming 14 14
Maths
F1 consists of 10% nitrogen and F2 consists of 5% nitrogen. However, the farmer requires at least 14 kg of nitrogen.
10% of x + 5% of y 14
F1 consists of 6% phosphoric acid and F2 consists of 10% phosphoric acid. However, the farmer requires at least 14 kg of phosphoric acid.
6% of x + 10% of y 14
Total cost of fertilizers, Z = 6x + 5y The mathematical formulation of the given problem is Minimize Z = 6x + 5y (1) subject to the constraints, 2x + y 280 (2) 3x + 5y 700 (3) x, y 0 (4) The feasible region determined by the system of constraints is as follows.
Page 29 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are The values of Z at these points are as follows. Corner point Z = 6x + 5y 1400
B(100, 80) C(0, 280)
1000 1400
Minimum
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, 1000 may or may not be the minimum value of Z. For this, we draw a graph of the inequality, 6x + 5y < 1000, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. It can be seen that the feasible region has no common point with 6x + 5y < 1000 Page 30 of 50
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, 100 kg of fertiliser F1 and 80 kg of fertilizer F2 should be used to minimize the cost. The minimum cost is Rs 1000.
Question 11: The corner points of the feasible region determined by the following system of linear inequalities: Let Z = px + qy, where p, q > 0. Condition on p and q so that the maximum of Z occurs at both (3, 4) and (0, 5) is (A) p = q (B) p = 2q (C) p = 3q (D) q = 3p Answer The maximum value of Z is unique. It is given that the maximum value of Z occurs at two points, (3, 4) and (0, 5).
Value of Z at (3, 4) = Value of Z at (0, 5)
p(3) + q(4) = p(0) + q(5)
3p + 4q = 5q
q = 3p
Hence, the correct answer is D.
Page 31 of 50
Class XII
Chapter 12 Linear Programming Miscellaneous Solutions
Maths
Question 1: Refer to Example 9. How many packets of each food should be used to maximize the amount of vitamin A in the diet? What is the maximum amount of vitamin A in the diet? Answer Let the diet contain x and y packets of foods P and Q respectively. Therefore, x 0 and y 0 The mathematical formulation of the given problem is as follows. Maximize z = 6x + 3y (1) subject to the constraints,
The corner points of the feasible region are A (15, 20), B (40, 15), and C (2, 72). The values of z at these corner points are as follows.
Page 32 of 50
Class XII Corner point A(15, 20) B(40, 15) C(2, 72)
Chapter 12 Linear Programming z = 6x + 3y 150 285 228 Maximum
Maths
Thus, the maximum value of z is 285 at (40, 15). Therefore, to maximize the amount of vitamin A in the diet, 40 packets of food P and 15 packets of food Q should be used. The maximum amount of vitamin A in the diet is 285 units.
Question 2: A farmer mixes two brands P and Q of cattle feed. Brand P, costing Rs 250 per bag contains 3 units of nutritional element A, 2.5 units of element B and 2 units of element C. Brand Q costing Rs 200 per bag contains 1.5 units of nutritional elements A, 11.25 units of element B, and 3 units of element C. The minimum requirements of nutrients A, B and C are 18 units, 45 units and 24 units respectively. Determine the number of bags of each brand which should be mixed in order to produce a mixture having a minimum cost per bag? What is the minimum cost of the mixture per bag? Answer Let the farmer mix x bags of brand P and y bags of brand Q. The given information can be compiled in a table as follows. Vitamin A (units/kg) Food P Food Q Requirement (units/kg) The given problem can be formulated as follows. 3 4 8 Vitamin B (units/kg) 5 2 11 Cost (Rs/kg) 60 80
Page 33 of 50
Class XII
Maths
Minimize z = 250x + 200y (1) subject to the constraints,
The corner points of the feasible region are A (18, 0), B (9, 2), C (3, 6), and D (0, 12). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (18, 0) B (9, 2) C (3, 6) D (0, 12) z = 250x + 200y 4500 2650 1950 2400 Minimum
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, 1950 may or may not be the minimum value of z.
Page 34 of 50
Class XII
Maths
For this, we draw a graph of the inequality, 250x + 200y < 1950 or 5x + 4y < 39, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. It can be seen that the feasible region has no common point with 5x + 4y < 39 Therefore, the minimum value of z is 2000 at (3, 6). Thus, 3 bags of brand P and 6 bags of brand Q should be used in the mixture to minimize the cost to Rs 1950.
Question 3: A dietician wishes to mix together two kinds of food X and Y in such a way that the mixture contains at least 10 units of vitamin A, 12 units of vitamin B and 8 units of vitamin C. The vitamin content of one kg food is given below: Food X Y Vitamin A 1 2 Vitamin B 2 2 Vitamin C 3 1
One kg of food X costs Rs 16 and one kg of food Y costs Rs 20. Find the least cost of the mixture which will produce the required diet? Answer Let the mixture contain x kg of food X and y kg of food Y. The mathematical formulation of the given problem is as follows. Minimize z = 16x + 20y (1) subject to the constraints,
Page 35 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are A (10, 0), B (2, 4), C (1, 5), and D (0, 8). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (10, 0) B (2, 4) C (1, 5) D (0, 8) z = 16x + 20y 160 112 116 160 Minimum
As the feasible region is unbounded, therefore, 112 may or may not be the minimum value of z. For this, we draw a graph of the inequality, 16x + 20y < 112 or 4x + 5y < 28, and check whether the resulting half plane has points in common with the feasible region or not. It can be seen that the feasible region has no common point with 4x + 5y < 28 Therefore, the minimum value of z is 112 at (2, 4). Thus, the mixture should contain 2 kg of food X and 4 kg of food Y. The minimum cost of the mixture is Rs 112.
Page 36 of 50
Class XII
Maths
Question 4: A manufacturer makes two types of toys A and B. Three machines are needed for this purpose and the time (in minutes) required for each toy on the machines is given below: Machines Type of toys I A B 12 6 II 18 0 III 6 9
Each machine is available for a maximum of 6 hours per day. If the profit on each toy of type A is Rs 7.50 and that on each toy of type B is Rs 5, show that 15 toys of type A and 30 of type B should be manufactured in a day to get maximum profit. Answer Let x and y toys of type A and type B respectively be manufactured in a day. The given problem can be formulated as follows. Maximize z = 7.5x + 5y (1) subject to the constraints,
The feasible region determined by the constraints is as follows.
Page 37 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are A (20, 0), B (20, 20), C (15, 30), and D (0, 40). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A(20, 0) B(20, 20) C(15, 30) O(0, 40) Z = 7.5x + 5y 150 250 262.5 200 Maximum
The maximum value of z is 262.5 at (15, 30). Thus, the manufacturer should manufacture 15 toys of type A and 30 toys of type B to maximize the profit.
Question 5: An aeroplane can carry a maximum of 200 passengers. A profit of Rs 1000 is made on each executive class ticket and a profit of Rs 600 is made on each economy class ticket. The airline reserves at least 20 seats for executive class. However, at least 4 times as
Page 38 of 50
Class XII
Maths
many passengers prefer to travel by economy class than by the executive class. Determine how many tickets of each type must be sold in order to maximize the profit for the airline. What is the maximum profit? Answer Let the airline sell x tickets of executive class and y tickets of economy class. The mathematical formulation of the given problem is as follows. Maximize z = 1000x + 600y (1) subject to the constraints,
The corner points of the feasible region are A (20, 80), B (40, 160), and C (20, 180). Page 39 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (20, 80) B (40, 160) C (20, 180) z = 1000x + 600y 68000 136000 128000 Maximum
The maximum value of z is 136000 at (40, 160). Thus, 40 tickets of executive class and 160 tickets of economy class should be sold to maximize the profit and the maximum profit is Rs 136000.
Question 6: Two godowns A and B have grain capacity of 100 quintals and 50 quintals respectively. They supply to 3 ration shops, D, E and F whose requirements are 60, 50 and 40 quintals respectively. The cost of transportation per quintal from the godowns to the shops are given in the following table: Transportation cost per quintal (in Rs) From/To D E F A 6 3 2.50 B 4 2 3
How should the supplies be transported in order that the transportation cost is minimum? What is the minimum cost? Answer Let godown A supply x and y quintals of grain to the shops D and E respectively. Then, (100 x y) will be supplied to shop F. The requirement at shop D is 60 quintals since x quintals are transported from godown A. Therefore, the remaining (60 x) quintals will be transported from godown B. Similarly, (50 y) quintals and 40 (100 x y) = (x + y 60) quintals will be transported from godown B to shop E and F respectively.
Page 40 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The given problem can be represented diagrammatically as follows.
Total transportation cost z is given by,
The given problem can be formulated as Minimize z = 2.5x + 1.5y + 410 (1) subject to the constraints,
Page 41 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (60, 0), B (60, 40), C (50, 50), and D (10, 50). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (60, 0) B (60, 40) C (50, 50) z = 2.5x + 1.5y + 410 560 620 610
Page 42 of 50
Class XII D (10, 50)
Chapter 12 Linear Programming 510 Minimum
Maths
The minimum value of z is 510 at (10, 50). Thus, the amount of grain transported from A to D, E, and F is 10 quintals, 50 quintals, and 40 quintals respectively and from B to D, E, and F is 50 quintals, 0 quintals, and 0 quintals respectively.
Question 7: An oil company has two depots A and B with capacities of 7000 L and 4000 L respectively. The company is to supply oil to three petrol pumps, D, E and F whose requirements are 4500L, 3000L and 3500L respectively. The distance (in km) between the depots and the petrol pumps is given in the following table: Distance in (km) From/To D E F A 7 6 3 B 3 4 2
Assuming that the transportation cost of 10 litres of oil is Re 1 per km, how should the delivery be scheduled in order that the transportation cost is minimum? What is the minimum cost? Answer Let x and y litres of oil be supplied from A to the petrol pumps, D and E. Then, (7000 x y) will be supplied from A to petrol pump F. The requirement at petrol pump D is 4500 L. Since x L are transported from depot A, the remaining (4500 x) L will be transported from petrol pump B. Similarly, (3000 y) L and 3500 (7000 x y) = (x + y 3500) L will be transported from depot B to petrol pump E and F respectively. The given problem can be represented diagrammatically as follows.
Page 43 of 50
Class XII
Maths
Cost of transporting 10 L of petrol = Re 1
Cost of transporting 1 L of petrol = Therefore, total transportation cost is given by,
The problem can be formulated as follows. Minimize z = 0.3x + 0.1y + 3950 (1) subject to the constraints,
Page 44 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points of the feasible region are A (3500, 0), B (4500, 0), C (4500, 2500), D (4000, 3000), and E (500, 3000). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (3500, 0) B (4500, 0) z = 0.3x + 0.1y + 3950 5000 5300
Page 45 of 50
Class XII C (4500, 2500) D (4000, 3000) E (500, 3000)
Chapter 12 Linear Programming 5550 5450 4400 Minimum
Maths
The minimum value of z is 4400 at (500, 3000). Thus, the oil supplied from depot A is 500 L, 3000 L, and 3500 L and from depot B is 4000 L, 0 L, and 0 L to petrol pumps D, E, and F respectively. The minimum transportation cost is Rs 4400.
Question 8: A fruit grower can use two types of fertilizer in his garden, brand P and brand Q. The amounts (in kg) of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash, and chlorine in a bag of each brand are given in the table. Tests indicate that the garden needs at least 240 kg of phosphoric acid at least 270 kg of potash and at most 310 kg of chlorine. If the grower wants to minimize the amount of nitrogen added to the garden, how many bags of each brand should be used? What is the minimum amount of nitrogen added in the garden? kg per bag Brand P Nitrogen Phosphoric acid Potash Chlorine Answer Let the fruit grower use x bags of brand P and y bags of brand Q. The problem can be formulated as follows. Minimize z = 3x + 3.5y (1) subject to the constraints, 3 1 3 1.5 Brand Q 3.5 2 1.5 2
Page 46 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (240, 0), B (140, 50), and C (20, 140). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (140, 50) B (20, 140) C (40, 100) z = 3x + 3.5y 595 550 470 Minimum
The maximum value of z is 470 at (40, 100). Thus, 40 bags of brand P and 100 bags of brand Q should be added to the garden to minimize the amount of nitrogen. The minimum amount of nitrogen added to the garden is 470 kg.
Page 47 of 50
Maths
Refer to question 8. If the grower wants to maximize the amount of nitrogen added to the garden, how many bags of each brand should be added? What is the maximum amount of nitrogen added? Answer Let the fruit grower use x bags of brand P and y bags of brand Q. The problem can be formulated as follows. Maximize z = 3x + 3.5y (1) subject to the constraints,
The corner points are A (140, 50), B (20, 140), and C (40, 100). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (140, 50) z = 3x + 3.5y 595 Maximum
Page 48 of 50
Class XII B (20, 140) C (40, 100) 550 470
Maths
The maximum value of z is 595 at (140, 50). Thus, 140 bags of brand P and 50 bags of brand Q should be used to maximize the amount of nitrogen. The maximum amount of nitrogen added to the garden is 595 kg.
Question 10: A toy company manufactures two types of dolls, A and B. Market tests and available resources have indicated that the combined production level should not exceed 1200 dolls per week and the demand for dolls of type B is at most half of that for dolls of type A. Further, the production level of dolls of type A can exceed three times the production of dolls of other type by at most 600 units. If the company makes profit of Rs 12 and Rs 16 per doll respectively on dolls A and B, how many of each should be produced weekly in order to maximize the profit? Answer Let x and y be the number of dolls of type A and B respectively that are produced per week. The given problem can be formulated as follows. Maximize z = 12x + 16y (1) subject to the constraints,
Page 49 of 50
Class XII
Maths
The corner points are A (600, 0), B (1050, 150), and C (800, 400). The values of z at these corner points are as follows. Corner point A (600, 0) B (1050, 150) C (800, 400) z = 12x + 16y 7200 15000 16000 Maximum
The maximum value of z is 16000 at (800, 400). Thus, 800 and 400 dolls of type A and type B should be produced respectively to get the maximum profit of Rs 16000.
Page 50 of 50
Class XII
Chapter 13 Probability Exercise 13.1
Maths
Question 1: Given that E and F are events such that P(E) = 0.6, P(F) = 0.3 and P(E F) = 0.2, find P (E|F) and P(F|E). Answer It is given that P(E) = 0.6, P(F) = 0.3, and P(E F) = 0.2
Question 2: Compute P(A|B), if P(B) = 0.5 and P (A B) = 0.32 Answer It is given that P(B) = 0.5 and P(A B) = 0.32
Question 3: If P(A) = 0.8, P(B) = 0.5 and P(B|A) = 0.4, find
(i) P(A B) (ii) P(A|B) (iii) P(A B)
Answer It is given that P(A) = 0.8, P(B) = 0.5, and P(B|A) = 0.4 (i) P (B|A) = 0.4
Page 1 of 103
Class XII
Chapter 13 Probability
Maths
(ii)
(iii)
Question 4:
Evaluate P (A B), if 2P (A) = P (B) =
and P(A|B) =
Answer
It is given that,
It is known that,
Page 2 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 5:
If P(A)
, P(B) =
and P(A B) =
, find
(i) P(A B) (ii) P(A|B) (iii) P(B|A) Answer
It is given that
(i)
(ii) It is known that,
(iii) It is known that,
Page 3 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 6: A coin is tossed three times, where (i) E: head on third toss, F: heads on first two tosses (ii) E: at least two heads, F: at most two heads (iii) E: at most two tails, F: at least one tail Answer If a coin is tossed three times, then the sample space S is S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT} It can be seen that the sample space has 8 elements. (i) E = {HHH, HTH, THH, TTH} F = {HHH, HHT} E F = {HHH}
(ii) E = {HHH, HHT, HTH, THH} F = {HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT} E F = {HHT, HTH, THH}
Clearly,
(iii) E = {HHH, HHT, HTT, HTH, THH, THT, TTH} F = {HHT, HTT, HTH, THH, THT, TTH, TTT}
Page 4 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 7: Two coins are tossed once, where (i) E: tail appears on one coin, F: one coin shows head (ii) E: not tail appears, F: no head appears Answer If two coins are tossed once, then the sample space S is S = {HH, HT, TH, TT} (i) E = {HT, TH} F = {HT, TH}
(ii) E = {HH} F = {TT}
EF=
P (F) = 1 and P (E F) = 0
Page 5 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P(E|F) =
Question 8: A die is thrown three times, E: 4 appears on the third toss, F: 6 and 5 appears respectively on first two tosses Answer If a die is thrown three times, then the number of elements in the sample space will be 6 6 6 = 216
Page 6 of 103
Maths
Mother, father and son line up at random for a family picture E: son on one end, F: father in middle Answer If mother (M), father (F), and son (S) line up for the family picture, then the sample space will be S = {MFS, MSF, FMS, FSM, SMF, SFM}
E = {MFS, FMS, SMF, SFM}
F = {MFS, SFM}
E F = {MFS, SFM}
Question 10: A black and a red dice are rolled. (a) Find the conditional probability of obtaining a sum greater than 9, given that the black die resulted in a 5. (b) Find the conditional probability of obtaining the sum 8, given that the red die resulted in a number less than 4. Answer
Page 7 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let the first observation be from the black die and second from the red die. When two dice (one black and another red) are rolled, the sample space S has 6 6 = 36 number of elements. 1. Let A: Obtaining a sum greater than 9 = {(4, 6), (5, 5), (5, 6), (6, 4), (6, 5), (6, 6)} B: Black die results in a 5. = {(5, 1), (5, 2), (5, 3), (5, 4), (5, 5), (5, 6)}
A B = {(5, 5), (5, 6)}
The conditional probability of obtaining a sum greater than 9, given that the black die resulted in a 5, is given by P (A|B).
(b) E: Sum of the observations is 8. = {(2, 6), (3, 5), (4, 4), (5, 3), (6, 2)} F: Red die resulted in a number less than 4.
The conditional probability of obtaining the sum equal to 8, given that the red die resulted in a number less than 4, is given by P (E|F).
Page 8 of 103
Maths
A fair die is rolled. Consider events E = {1, 3, 5}, F = {2, 3} and G = {2, 3, 4, 5} Find (i) P (E|F) and P (F|E) (ii) P (E|G) and P (G|E)
(ii) P ((E F)|G) and P ((E G)|G)
Answer When a fair die is rolled, the sample space S will be S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} It is given that E = {1, 3, 5}, F = {2, 3}, and G = {2, 3, 4, 5}
(i) E F = {3}
(ii) E G = {3, 5}
Page 9 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(iii) E F = {1, 2, 3, 5}
(E F) G = {1, 2, 3, 5} {2, 3, 4, 5} = {2, 3, 5}
E F = {3} (E F) G = {3}{2, 3, 4, 5} = {3}
Page 10 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 12: Assume that each born child is equally likely to be a boy or a girl. If a family has two children, what is the conditional probability that both are girls given that (i) the youngest is a girl, (ii) at least one is a girl? Answer Let b and g represent the boy and the girl child respectively. If a family has two children, the sample space will be S = {(b, b), (b, g), (g, b), (g, g)} Let A be the event that both children are girls.
(i) Let B be the event that the youngest child is a girl.
Page 11 of 103
Class XII
Maths
The conditional probability that both are girls, given that the youngest child is a girl, is given by P (A|B).
Therefore, the required probability is
(ii) Let C be the event that at least one child is a girl.
The conditional probability that both are girls, given that at least one child is a girl, is given by P(A|C).
Question 13: An instructor has a question bank consisting of 300 easy True/False questions, 200 difficult True/False questions, 500 easy multiple choice questions and 400 difficult multiple choice questions. If a question is selected at random from the question bank,
Page 12 of 103
Class XII
Maths
what is the probability that it will be an easy question given that it is a multiple choice question? Answer The given data can be tabulated as True/False Easy Difficult Total 300 200 500 Multiple choice 500 400 900 Total 800 600 1400
Let us denote E = easy questions, M = multiple choice questions, D = difficult questions, and T = True/False questions Total number of questions = 1400 Total number of multiple choice questions = 900 Therefore, probability of selecting an easy multiple choice question is
P (E M) = Probability of selecting a multiple choice question, P (M), is
P (E|M) represents the probability that a randomly selected question will be an easy question, given that it is a multiple choice question.
Page 13 of 103
Maths
Given that the two numbers appearing on throwing the two dice are different. Find the probability of the event the sum of numbers on the dice is 4. Answer When dice is thrown, number of observations in the sample space = 6 6 = 36 Let A be the event that the sum of the numbers on the dice is 4 and B be the event that the two numbers appearing on throwing the two dice are different.
Let P (A|B) represent the probability that the sum of the numbers on the dice is 4, given that the two numbers appearing on throwing the two dice are different.
Question 15: Consider the experiment of throwing a die, if a multiple of 3 comes up, throw the die again and if any other number comes, toss a coin. Find the conditional probability of the event the coin shows a tail, given that at least one die shows a 3. Answer The outcomes of the given experiment can be represented by the following tree diagram. Page 14 of 103
Class XII
Maths
The sample space of the experiment is,
Let A be the event that the coin shows a tail and B be the event that at least one die shows 3.
Probability of the event that the coin shows a tail, given that at least one die shows 3, is given by P(A|B). Therefore,
Question 16:
If
(A) 0 (B) (C) not defined (D) 1 Answer
It is given that
Page 15 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, P (A|B) is not defined. Thus, the correct answer is C.
Question 17: If A and B are events such that P (A|B) = P(B|A), then
(A) A B but A B (B) A = B
(C) A B = (D) P(A) = P(B) Answer It is given that, P(A|B) = P(B|A)
P (A) = P (B)
Thus, the correct answer is D.
Page 16 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 1:
If Answer
, find P (A B) if A and B are independent events.
It is given that A and B are independent events. Therefore,
Question 2: Two cards are drawn at random and without replacement from a pack of 52 playing cards. Find the probability that both the cards are black. Answer There are 26 black cards in a deck of 52 cards. Let P (A) be the probability of getting a black card in the first draw.
Let P (B) be the probability of getting a black card on the second draw. Since the card is not replaced,
Thus, probability of getting both the cards black =
Question 3: A box of oranges is inspected by examining three randomly selected oranges drawn without replacement. If all the three oranges are good, the box is approved for sale, otherwise, it is rejected. Find the probability that a box containing 15 oranges out of which 12 are good and 3 are bad ones will be approved for sale.
Page 17 of 103
Class XII Answer
Maths
Let A, B, and C be the respective events that the first, second, and third drawn orange is good.
Therefore, probability that first drawn orange is good, P (A) The oranges are not replaced.
Therefore, probability of getting second orange good, P (B) =
Similarly, probability of getting third orange good, P(C) The box is approved for sale, if all the three oranges are good.
Thus, probability of getting all the oranges good
Therefore, the probability that the box is approved for sale is
Question 4: A fair coin and an unbiased die are tossed. Let A be the event head appears on the coin and B be the event 3 on the die. Check whether A and B are independent events or not. Answer If a fair coin and an unbiased die are tossed, then the sample space S is given by,
Let A: Head appears on the coin
B: 3 on die
Page 18 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, A and B are independent events.
Question 5: A die marked 1, 2, 3 in red and 4, 5, 6 in green is tossed. Let A be the event, the number is even, and B be the event, the number is red. Are A and B independent? Answer When a die is thrown, the sample space (S) is S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} Let A: the number is even = {2, 4, 6}
B: the number is red = {1, 2, 3}
A B = {2}
Page 19 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, A and B are not independent.
Question 6:
Let E and F be events with independent? Answer
. Are E and F
It is given that
, and
Therefore, E and F are not independent.
Question 7:
Given that the events A and B are such that if they are (i) mutually exclusive (ii) independent. Answer
and P (B) = p. Find p
It is given that (i) When A and B are mutually exclusive, A B =
P (A B) = 0
Page 20 of 103
Class XII
Maths
It is known that,
(ii) When A and B are independent, It is known that,
Question 8: Let A and B be independent events with P (A) = 0.3 and P (B) = 0.4. Find
(i) P (A B) (ii) P (A B)
(iii) P (A|B) (iv) P (B|A) Answer It is given that P (A) = 0.3 and P (B) = 0.4 (i) If A and B are independent events, then
(ii) It is known that,
Page 21 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(iii) It is known that,
(iv) It is known that,
Question 9:
If A and B are two events such that and not B). Answer
, find P (not A
It is given that, P(not on A and not on B) =
P(not on A and not on B) =
Page 22 of 103
Maths
Events A and B are such that whether A and B are independent? Answer
. State
It is given that
Therefore, A and B are independent events.
Question 11: Given two independent events A and B such that P (A) = 0.3, P (B) = 0.6. Find (i) P (A and B) (ii) P (A and not B) (iii) P (A or B) (iv) P (neither A nor B) Answer It is given that P (A) = 0.3 and P (B) = 0.6 Also, A and B are independent events. (i)
(ii) P (A and not B) = Page 23 of 103

Class XII
Maths
(iii) P (A or B) =
(iv) P (neither A nor B) =
Question 12: A die is tossed thrice. Find the probability of getting an odd number at least once. Answer
Probability of getting an odd number in a single throw of a die =
Similarly, probability of getting an even number =
Probability of getting an even number three times = Therefore, probability of getting an odd number at least once = 1 Probability of getting an odd number in none of the throws = 1 Probability of getting an even number thrice
Page 24 of 103
Maths
Two balls are drawn at random with replacement from a box containing 10 black and 8 red balls. Find the probability that (i) both balls are red. (ii) first ball is black and second is red. (iii) one of them is black and other is red. Answer Total number of balls = 18 Number of red balls = 8 Number of black balls = 10
(i) Probability of getting a red ball in the first draw = The ball is replaced after the first draw.
Probability of getting a red ball in the second draw =
Therefore, probability of getting both the balls red =
(ii) Probability of getting first ball black = The ball is replaced after the first draw.
Probability of getting second ball as red =
Therefore, probability of getting first ball as black and second ball as red =
(iii) Probability of getting first ball as red = The ball is replaced after the first draw.
Probability of getting second ball as black =
Page 25 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, probability of getting first ball as black and second ball as red = Therefore, probability that one of them is black and other is red = Probability of getting first ball black and second as red + Probability of getting first ball red and second ball black
Question 14:
Probability of solving specific problem independently by A and B are If both try to solve the problem independently, find the probability that (i) the problem is solved (ii) exactly one of them solves the problem. Answer
respectively.
Probability of solving the problem by A, P (A) =
Probability of solving the problem by B, P (B) = Since the problem is solved independently by A and B,
i.
Probability that the problem is solved = P (A B)
= P (A) + P (B) P (AB)
Page 26 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(ii) Probability that exactly one of them solves the problem is given by,
Question 15: One card is drawn at random from a well shuffled deck of 52 cards. In which of the following cases are the events E and F independent? (i) E: the card drawn is a spade F: the card drawn is an ace (ii) E: the card drawn is black F: the card drawn is a king (iii) E: the card drawn is a king or queen F: the card drawn is a queen or jack Answer (i) In a deck of 52 cards, 13 cards are spades and 4 cards are aces.
P(E) = P(the card drawn is a spade) =
Page 27 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P(F) = P(the card drawn is an ace) =
In the deck of cards, only 1 card is an ace of spades.
P(EF) = P(the card drawn is spade and an ace) =
P(E) P(F) =
P(E) P(F) = P(EF)
Therefore, the events E and F are independent. (ii) In a deck of 52 cards, 26 cards are black and 4 cards are kings.
P(E) = P(the card drawn is black) =
P(F) = P(the card drawn is a king) =
In the pack of 52 cards, 2 cards are black as well as kings.
P (EF) = P(the card drawn is a black king) =
Page 28 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P(E) P(F) = Therefore, the given events E and F are independent. (iii) In a deck of 52 cards, 4 cards are kings, 4 cards are queens, and 4 cards are jacks.
P(E) = P(the card drawn is a king or a queen) =
P(F) = P(the card drawn is a queen or a jack) =
There are 4 cards which are king or queen and queen or jack.
P(EF) = P(the card drawn is a king or a queen, or queen or a jack)
P(E) P(F) =
Therefore, the given events E and F are not independent.
Question 16: In a hostel, 60% of the students read Hindi newspaper, 40% read English newspaper and 20% read both Hindi and English news papers. A student is selected at random. (a) Find the probability that she reads neither Hindi nor English news papers. (b) If she reads Hindi news paper, find the probability that she reads English news paper.
Page 29 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(c) If she reads English news paper, find the probability that she reads Hindi news paper. Answer Let H denote the students who read Hindi newspaper and E denote the students who read English newspaper. It is given that,
i.
Probability that a student reads Hindi or English newspaper is,
(ii) Probability that a randomly chosen student reads English newspaper, if she reads Hindi news paper, is given by P (E|H).
(iii) Probability that a randomly chosen student reads Hindi newspaper, if she reads English newspaper, is given by P (H|E).
Page 30 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 17: The probability of obtaining an even prime number on each die, when a pair of dice is rolled is
(A) 0 (B) Answer
(C)
(D)
When two dice are rolled, the number of outcomes is 36. The only even prime number is 2. Let E be the event of getting an even prime number on each die.
E = {(2, 2)}
Therefore, the correct answer is D.
Question 18: Two events A and B will be independent, if (A) A and B are mutually exclusive (B) (C) P(A) = P(B) (D) P(A) + P(B) = 1 Page 31 of 103
Class XII Answer
Maths
Two events A and B are said to be independent, if P(AB) = P(A) P(B) Consider the result given in alternative B.
This implies that A and B are independent, if Distracter Rationale A. Let P (A) = m, P (B) = n, 0 < m, n < 1 A and B are mutually exclusive.
C. Let A: Event of getting an odd number on throw of a die = {1, 3, 5}
B: Event of getting an even number on throw of a die = {2, 4, 6}
Here,
D. From the above example, it can be seen that,
Page 32 of 103
Class XII
Maths
However, it cannot be inferred that A and B are independent. Thus, the correct answer is B.
Page 33 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: An urn contains 5 red and 5 black balls. A ball is drawn at random, its colour is noted and is returned to the urn. Moreover, 2 additional balls of the colour drawn are put in the urn and then a ball is drawn at random. What is the probability that the second ball is red? Answer The urn contains 5 red and 5 black balls. Let a red ball be drawn in the first attempt.
P (drawing a red ball) If two red balls are added to the urn, then the urn contains 7 red and 5 black balls.
P (drawing a red ball) Let a black ball be drawn in the first attempt.
P (drawing a black ball in the first attempt) If two black balls are added to the urn, then the urn contains 5 red and 7 black balls.
P (drawing a red ball) Therefore, probability of drawing second ball as red is
Question 2: A bag contains 4 red and 4 black balls, another bag contains 2 red and 6 black balls. One of the two bags is selected at random and a ball is drawn from the bag which is found to be red. Find the probability that the ball is drawn from the first bag. Answer Let E1 and E2 be the events of selecting first bag and second bag respectively.
Page 34 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let A be the event of getting a red ball.
The probability of drawing a ball from the first bag, given that it is red, is given by P (E2|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Question 3: Of the students in a college, it is known that 60% reside in hostel and 40% are day scholars (not residing in hostel). Previous year results report that 30% of all students who reside in hostel attain A grade and 20% of day scholars attain A grade in their annual examination. At the end of the year, one student is chosen at random from the college and he has an A grade, what is the probability that the student is hostler? Answer
Page 35 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let E1 and E2 be the events that the student is a hostler and a day scholar respectively and A be the event that the chosen student gets grade A.
The probability that a randomly chosen student is a hostler, given that he has an A grade, is given by .
By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Question 4: In answering a question on a multiple choice test, a student either knows the answer or
guesses. Let
be the probability that he knows the answer and
be the probability that
he guesses. Assuming that a student who guesses at the answer will be correct with
probability
What is the probability that the student knows the answer given that he
answered it correctly? Answer
Page 36 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let E1 and E2 be the respective events that the student knows the answer and he guesses the answer. Let A be the event that the answer is correct.
The probability that the student answered correctly, given that he knows the answer, is 1.
P (A|E1) = 1
Probability that the student answered correctly, given that he guessed, is
The probability that the student knows the answer, given that he answered it correctly, is given by .
By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Page 37 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 5: A laboratory blood test is 99% effective in detecting a certain disease when it is in fact, present. However, the test also yields a false positive result for 0.5% of the healthy person tested (that is, if a healthy person is tested, then, with probability 0.005, the test will imply he has the disease). If 0.1 percent of the population actually has the disease, what is the probability that a person has the disease given that his test result is positive? Answer: Let E1 and E2 be the respective events that a person has a disease and a person has no disease. Since E1 and E2 are events complimentary to each other,
P (E1) + P (E2) = 1
P (E2) = 1 P (E1) = 1 0.001 = 0.999
Page 38 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let A be the event that the blood test result is positive.
Probabilit y that a person has a disease, given that his test result is positive, is given by P (E1|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Question 6: There are three coins. One is two headed coin (having head on both faces), another is a biased coin that comes up heads 75% of the time and third is an unbiased coin. One of the three coins is chosen at random and tossed, it shows heads, what is the probability that it was the two headed coin? Answer Let E1, E2, and E3 be the respective events of choosing a two headed coin, a biased coin, and an unbiased coin.
Page 39 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let A be the event that the coin shows heads. A two-headed coin will always show heads.
Probability of heads coming up, given that it is a biased coin= 75%
Since the third coin is unbiased, the probability that it shows heads is always
The probability that the coin is two-headed, given that it shows heads, is given by P (E1|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Question 7: An insurance company insured 2000 scooter drivers, 4000 car drivers and 6000 truck drivers. The probability of accidents are 0.01, 0.03 and 0.15 respectively. One of the insured persons meets with an accident. What is the probability that he is a scooter driver? Page 40 of 103
Class XII Answer
Maths
Let E1, E2, and E3 be the respective events that the driver is a scooter driver, a car driver, and a truck driver. Let A be the event that the person meets with an accident. There are 2000 scooter drivers, 4000 car drivers, and 6000 truck drivers. Total number of drivers = 2000 + 4000 + 6000 = 12000
P (E1) = P (driver is a scooter driver)
P (E2) = P (driver is a car driver)
P (E3) = P (driver is a truck driver)
The probability that the driver is a scooter driver, given that he met with an accident, is given by P (E1|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Page 41 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 8: A factory has two machines A and B. Past record shows that machine A produced 60% of the items of output and machine B produced 40% of the items. Further, 2% of the items produced by machine A and 1% produced by machine B were defective. All the items are put into one stockpile and then one item is chosen at random from this and is found to be defective. What is the probability that was produced by machine B? Answer Let E1 and E2 be the respective events of items produced by machines A and B. Let X be the event that the produced item was found to be defective.
Probability of items produced by machine A, P (E1)
Probability of items produced by machine B, P (E2)
Probability that machine A produced defective items, P (X|E1)
Probability that machine B produced defective items, P (X|E2) The probability that the randomly selected item was from machine B, given that it is defective, is given by P (E2|X). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Page 42 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 9: Two groups are competing for the position on the board of directors of a corporation. The probabilities that the first and the second groups will win are 0.6 and 0.4 respectively. Further, if the first group wins, the probability of introducing a new product is 0.7 and the corresponding probability is 0.3 if the second group wins. Find the probability that the new product introduced was by the second group. Answer Let E1 and E2 be the respective events that the first group and the second group win the competition. Let A be the event of introducing a new product. P (E1) = Probability that the first group wins the competition = 0.6 P (E2) = Probability that the second group wins the competition = 0.4 P (A|E1) = Probability of introducing a new product if the first group wins = 0.7 P (A|E2) = Probability of introducing a new product if the second group wins = 0.3 The probability that the new product is introduced by the second group is given by P (E2|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Page 43 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 10: Suppose a girl throws a die. If she gets a 5 or 6, she tosses a coin three times and notes the number of heads. If she gets 1, 2, 3 or 4, she tosses a coin once and notes whether a head or tail is obtained. If she obtained exactly one head, what is the probability that she threw 1, 2, 3 or 4 with the die? Answer Let E1 be the event that the outcome on the die is 5 or 6 and E2 be the event that the outcome on the die is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Let A be the event of getting exactly one head. P (A|E1) = Probability of getting exactly one head by tossing the coin three times if she
gets 5 or 6 P (A|E2) = Probability of getting exactly one head in a single throw of coin if she gets 1,
2, 3, or 4 The probability that the girl threw 1, 2, 3, or 4 with the die, if she obtained exactly one head, is given by P (E2|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Page 44 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: A manufacturer has three machine operators A, B and C. The first operator A produces 1% defective items, where as the other two operators B and C produce 5% and 7% defective items respectively. A is on the job for 50% of the time, B is on the job for 30% of the time and C is on the job for 20% of the time. A defective item is produced, what is the probability that was produced by A? Answer Let E1, E2, and E3 be the respective events of the time consumed by machines A, B, and C for the job.
Let X be the event of producing defective items.
Page 45 of 103
Class XII
Maths
The probability that the defective item was produced by A is given by P (E1|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Question 12: A card from a pack of 52 cards is lost. From the remaining cards of the pack, two cards are drawn and are found to be both diamonds. Find the probability of the lost card being a diamond. Answer Let E1 and E2 be the respective events of choosing a diamond card and a card which is not diamond. Let A denote the lost card. Out of 52 cards, 13 cards are diamond and 39 cards are not diamond.
Page 46 of 103
Class XII
Maths
When one diamond card is lost, there are 12 diamond cards out of 51 cards. Two cards can be drawn out of 12 diamond cards in ways. ways. The probability of
Similarly, 2 diamond cards can be drawn out of 51 cards in
getting two cards, when one diamond card is lost, is given by P (A|E1).
When the lost card is not a diamond, there are 13 diamond cards out of 51 cards. Two cards can be drawn out of 13 diamond cards in drawn out of 51 cards in ways. ways whereas 2 cards can be
The probability of getting two cards, when one card is lost which is not diamond, is given by P (A|E2).
The probability that the lost card is diamond is given by P (E1|A). By using Bayes theorem, we obtain
Page 47 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 13:
Probability that A speaks truth is
. A coin is tossed. A reports that a head appears. The
probability that actually there was head is
A.
B.
C.
D. Answer Let E1 and E2 be the events such that E1: A speaks truth E2: A speaks false Let X be the event that a head appears.
If a coin is tossed, then it may result in either head (H) or tail (T).
The probability of getting a head is
whether A speaks truth or not.
The probability that there is actually a head is given by P (E1|X). Page 48 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the correct answer is A.
Question 14:
If A and B are two events such that A B and P (B) 0, then which of the following is
correct?
A. B. C. D. None of these Answer
If A B, then A B = A
Page 49 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (A B) = P (A)
Also, P (A) < P (B)
Consider
(1)
Consider It is known that, P (B) 1
(2)
Thus, from (3), it can be concluded that the relation given in alternative C is correct.
Page 50 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Exercise 13.4
Question 1: State which of the following are not the probability distributions of a random variable. Give reasons for your answer. (i) X P (X) (ii) X P (X) (iii) Y P (Y) (iv) Z P (Z) Answer It is known that the sum of all the probabilities in a probability distribution is one. (i) Sum of the probabilities = 0.4 + 0.4 + 0.2 = 1 Therefore, the given table is a probability distribution of random variables. (ii) It can be seen that for X = 3, P (X) = 0.1 It is known that probability of any observation is not negative. Therefore, the given table is not a probability distribution of random variables. (iii) Sum of the probabilities = 0.6 + 0.1 + 0.2 = 0.9 1 Therefore, the given table is not a probability distribution of random variables. 3 0.3 2 0.2 1 0.4 0 0.1 1 0.05 1 0.6 0 0.1 1 0.2 0 0.1 1 0.5 2 0.2 3 0.1 4 0.3 0 0.4 1 0.4 2 0.2
Page 51 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(iv) Sum of the probabilities = 0.3 + 0.2 + 0.4 + 0.1 + 0.05 = 1.05 1 Therefore, the given table is not a probability distribution of random variables.
Question 2: An urn contains 5 red and 2 black balls. Two balls are randomly drawn. Let X represents the number of black balls. What are the possible values of X? Is X a random variable? Answer The two balls selected can be represented as BB, BR, RB, RR, where B represents a black ball and R represents a red ball. X represents the number of black balls.
X (BB) = 2
X (BR) = 1 X (RB) = 1 X (RR) = 0 Therefore, the possible values of X are 0, 1, and 2. Yes, X is a random variable.
Question 3: Let X represents the difference between the number of heads and the number of tails obtained when a coin is tossed 6 times. What are possible values of X? Answer A coin is tossed six times and X represents the difference between the number of heads and the number of tails.
X (6 H, 0T)
X (5 H, 1 T)
Page 52 of 103
Class XII
Maths
X (4 H, 2 T) X (3 H, 3 T) X (2 H, 4 T) X (1 H, 5 T) X (0H, 6 T) Thus, the possible values of X are 6, 4, 2, and 0.
Question 4: Find the probability distribution of (i) number of heads in two tosses of a coin (ii) number of tails in the simultaneous tosses of three coins (iii) number of heads in four tosses of a coin Answer (i) When one coin is tossed twice, the sample space is {HH, HT, TH, TT} Let X represent the number of heads.
X (HH) = 2, X (HT) = 1, X (TH) = 1, X (TT) = 0
Therefore, X can take the value of 0, 1, or 2. It is known that,
P (X = 0) = P (TT)
P (X = 1) = P (HT) + P (TH)
Page 53 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (X = 2) = P (HH) Thus, the required probability distribution is as follows. X 0 1 2
P (X) (ii) When three coins are tossed simultaneously, the sample space is
Let X represent the number of tails. It can be seen that X can take the value of 0, 1, 2, or 3.
P (X = 0) = P (HHH) =
P (X = 1) = P (HHT) + P (HTH) + P (THH) =
P (X = 2) = P (HTT) + P (THT) + P (TTH) =
P (X = 3) = P (TTT) = Thus, the probability distribution is as follows. X 0 1 2 3
P (X) (iii) When a coin is tossed four times, the sample space is
Let X be the random variable, which represents the number of heads. It can be seen that X can take the value of 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Page 54 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (X = 0) = P (TTTT) = P (X = 1) = P (TTTH) + P (TTHT) + P (THTT) + P (HTTT)
= P (X = 2) = P (HHTT) + P (THHT) + P (TTHH) + P (HTTH) + P (HTHT) + P (THTH)
= P (X = 3) = P (HHHT) + P (HHTH) + P (HTHH) P (THHH)
P (X = 4) = P (HHHH) = Thus, the probability distribution is as follows. X 0 1 2 3 4
P (X)
Question 5: Find the probability distribution of the number of successes in two tosses of a die, where a success is defined as (i) number greater than 4 (ii) six appears on at least one die Answer When a die is tossed two times, we obtain (6 6) = 36 number of observations. Let X be the random variable, which represents the number of successes. i. Here, success refers to the number greater than 4.
P (X = 0) = P (number less than or equal to 4 on both the tosses) =
Page 55 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (X = 1) = P (number less than or equal to 4 on first toss and greater than 4 on second toss) + P (number greater than 4 on first toss and less than or equal to 4 on second toss)
P (X = 2) = P (number greater than 4 on both the tosses)
Thus, the probability distribution is as follows. X 1 1 2
P (X) (ii) Here, success means six appears on at least one die.
P (Y = 0) = P (six does not appear on any of the dice)
P (Y = 1) = P (six appears on at least one of the dice) = Thus, the required probability distribution is as follows. Y 0 1
P (Y)
Question 6: From a lot of 30 bulbs which include 6 defectives, a sample of 4 bulbs is drawn at random with replacement. Find the probability distribution of the number of defective bulbs. Answer It is given that out of 30 bulbs, 6 are defective.
Page 56 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Number of non-defective bulbs = 30 6 = 24
4 bulbs are drawn from the lot with replacement. Let X be the random variable that denotes the number of defective bulbs in the selected bulbs.
P (X = 0) = P (4 non-defective and 0 defective)
P (X = 4) = P (0 non-defective and 4 defective) Therefore, the required probability distribution is as follows. X 0 1 2 3 4
P (X)
Question 7: A coin is biased so that the head is 3 times as likely to occur as tail. If the coin is tossed twice, find the probability distribution of number of tails. Answer Let the probability of getting a tail in the biased coin be x.
Page 57 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (T) = x
P (H) = 3x
For a biased coin, P (T) + P (H) = 1
When the coin is tossed twice, the sample space is {HH, TT, HT, TH}. Let X be the random variable representing the number of tails.
P (X = 0) = P (no tail) = P (H) P (H)
P (X = 1) = P (one tail) = P (HT) + P (TH)
P (X = 2) = P (two tails) = P (TT) Therefore, the required probability distribution is as follows.
Page 58 of 103
Class XII X 0 1 2
Maths
P (X)
Question 8: A random variable X has the following probability distribution. X P (X) 0 0 1 k 2 2k 3 2k 4 3k 5 k2 6 2k2 7 7k2 + k
Determine (i) k (ii) P (X < 3) (iii) P (X > 6) (iv) P (0 < X < 3) Answer (i) It is known that the sum of probabilities of a probability distribution of random variables is one.
k = 1 is not possible as the probability of an event is never negative.
(ii) P (X < 3) = P (X = 0) + P (X = 1) + P (X = 2)
Page 59 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(iii) P (X > 6) = P (X = 7)
(iv) P (0 < X < 3) = P (X = 1) + P (X = 2)
Question 9: The random variable X has probability distribution P(X) of the following form, where k is some number:
(a) Determine the value of k. (b) Find P(X < 2), P(X 2), P(X 2).
Page 60 of 103
Class XII Answer
Maths
(a) It is known that the sum of probabilities of a probability distribution of random variables is one.
k + 2k + 3k + 0 = 1
6k = 1
k=
(b) P(X < 2) = P(X = 0) + P(X = 1)
Page 61 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 10: Find the mean number of heads in three tosses of a fair coin. Answer Let X denote the success of getting heads. Therefore, the sample space is S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT} It can be seen that X can take the value of 0, 1, 2, or 3.
P (X = 1) = P (HHT) + P (HTH) + P (THH)
P(X = 2) = P (HHT) + P (HTH) + P (THH)
Page 62 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Therefore, the required probability distribution is as follows. X P(X) 0 1 2 3
Mean of X E(X),
Question 11: Two dice are thrown simultaneously. If X denotes the number of sixes, find the expectation of X. Answer Here, X represents the number of sixes obtained when two dice are thrown simultaneously. Therefore, X can take the value of 0, 1, or 2.
P (X = 0) = P (not getting six on any of the dice) =
Page 63 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (X = 1) = P (six on first die and no six on second die) + P (no six on first die and six on second die)
P (X = 2) = P (six on both the dice) = Therefore, the required probability distribution is as follows. X P(X) 0 1 2
Then, expectation of X = E(X) =
Question 12: Two numbers are selected at random (without replacement) from the first six positive integers. Let X denotes the larger of the two numbers obtained. Find E(X). Answer The two positive integers can be selected from the first six positive integers without replacement in 6 5 = 30 ways X represents the larger of the two numbers obtained. Therefore, X can take the value of 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. For X = 2, the possible observations are (1, 2) and (2, 1).
For X = 3, the possible observations are (1, 3), (2, 3), (3, 1), and (3, 2).
For X = 4, the possible observations are (1, 4), (2, 4), (3, 4), (4, 3), (4, 2), and (4, 1). Page 64 of 103
Class XII
Maths
For X = 5, the possible observations are (1, 5), (2, 5), (3, 5), (4, 5), (5, 4), (5, 3), (5, 2), and (5, 1).
For X = 6, the possible observations are (1, 6), (2, 6), (3, 6), (4, 6), (5, 6), (6, 4), (6, 3), (6, 2), and (6, 1).
Therefore, the required probability distribution is as follows. X P(X) 2 3 4 5 6
Question 13: Let X denotes the sum of the numbers obtained when two fair dice are rolled. Find the variance and standard deviation of X. Answer When two fair dice are rolled, 6 6 = 36 observations are obtained.
P(X = 2) = P(1, 1) =
Page 65 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P(X = 3) = P (1, 2) + P(2, 1) =
P(X = 4) = P(1, 3) + P(2, 2) + P(3, 1) =
P(X = 5) = P(1, 4) + P(2, 3) + P(3, 2) + P(4, 1) =
P(X = 6) = P(1, 5) + P (2, 4) + P(3, 3) + P(4, 2) + P(5, 1) =
P(X = 7) = P(1, 6) + P(2, 5) + P(3, 4) + P(4, 3) + P(5, 2) + P(6, 1)
P(X = 8) = P(2, 6) + P(3, 5) + P(4, 4) + P(5, 3) + P(6, 2) =
P(X = 9) = P(3, 6) + P(4, 5) + P(5, 4) + P(6, 3) =
P(X = 10) = P(4, 6) + P(5, 5) + P(6, 4) =
P(X = 11) = P(5, 6) + P(6, 5) =
P(X = 12) = P(6, 6) = Therefore, the required probability distribution is as follows. X P(X) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Page 66 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 14: A class has 15 students whose ages are 14, 17, 15, 14, 21, 17, 19, 20, 16, 18, 20, 17, 16, 19 and 20 years. One student is selected in such a manner that each has the same chance of being chosen and the age X of the selected student is recorded. What is the probability distribution of the random variable X? Find mean, variance and standard deviation of X. Answer
Page 67 of 103
Class XII
Maths
There are 15 students in the class. Each student has the same chance to be chosen.
Therefore, the probability of each student to be selected is
The given information can be compiled in the frequency table as follows. X f 14 2 15 1 16 2 17 3 18 1 19 2 20 3 21 1
P(X = 14) =
, P(X = 15) =
, P(X = 16) =
, P(X = 16) =
P(X = 18) =
, P(X = 19) =
, P(X = 20) =
, P(X = 21) =
Therefore, the probability distribution of random variable X is as follows. X f 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Then, mean of X = E(X)
E(X2) =
Page 68 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 15: In a meeting, 70% of the members favour and 30% oppose a certain proposal. A member is selected at random and we take X = 0 if he opposed, and X = 1 if he is in favour. Find E(X) and Var(X). Answer
It is given that P(X = 0) = 30% =
Therefore, the probability distribution is as follows. X P(X) 0 0.3 1 0.7
Page 69 of 103
Class XII
Maths
It is known that, Var (X) = = 0.7 (0.7)2 = 0.7 0.49 = 0.21
Question 16: The mean of the numbers obtained on throwing a die having written 1 on three faces, 2 on two faces and 5 on one face is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 5 (D) Answer Let X be the random variable representing a number on the die. The total number of observations is six.
Therefore, the probability distribution is as follows. X P(X) 1 2 5
Mean = E(X) = Page 70 of 103

Class XII
Maths
Question 17: Suppose that two cards are drawn at random from a deck of cards. Let X be the number of aces obtained. Then the value of E(X) is
(A) Answer
(B)
(C)
(D)
Let X denote the number of aces obtained. Therefore, X can take any of the values of 0, 1, or 2. In a deck of 52 cards, 4 cards are aces. Therefore, there are 48 non-ace cards.
P (X = 0) = P (0 ace and 2 non-ace cards) =
P (X = 1) = P (1 ace and 1 non-ace cards) =
P (X = 2) = P (2 ace and 0 non- ace cards) = Thus, the probability distribution is as follows. X 0 1 2
Page 71 of 103
Class XII P(X)
Maths
Then, E(X) =
Therefore, the correct answer is D.
Page 72 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: A die is thrown 6 times. If getting an odd number is a success, what is the probability of (i) 5 successes? (ii) at least 5 successes? (iii) at most 5 successes? Answer The repeated tosses of a die are Bernoulli trials. Let X denote the number of successes of getting odd numbers in an experiment of 6 trials.
Probability of getting an odd number in a single throw of a die is,
X has a binomial distribution. Therefore, P (X = x) =
(i) P (5 successes) = P (X = 5)
(ii) P(at least 5 successes) = P(X 5)
Page 73 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(iii) P (at most 5 successes) = P(X 5)
Question 2: A pair of dice is thrown 4 times. If getting a doublet is considered a success, find the probability of two successes. Answer The repeated tosses of a pair of dice are Bernoulli trials. Let X denote the number of times of getting doublets in an experiment of throwing two dice simultaneously four times. Probability of getting doublets in a single throw of the pair of dice is
Clearly, X has the binomial distribution with n = 4,
Page 74 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (2 successes) = P (X = 2)
Question 3: There are 5% defective items in a large bulk of items. What is the probability that a sample of 10 items will include not more than one defective item? Answer Let X denote the number of defective items in a sample of 10 items drawn successively. Since the drawing is done with replacement, the trials are Bernoulli trials.
X has a binomial distribution with n = 10 and P(X = x) =
P (not more than 1 defective item) = P (X 1)
Page 75 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 4: Five cards are drawn successively with replacement from a well-shuffled deck of 52 cards. What is the probability that (i) all the five cards are spades? (ii) only 3 cards are spades? (iii) none is a spade? Answer Let X represent the number of spade cards among the five cards drawn. Since the drawing of card is with replacement, the trials are Bernoulli trials. In a well shuffled deck of 52 cards, there are 13 spade cards.
X has a binomial distribution with n = 5 and
(i) P (all five cards are spades) = P(X = 5) Page 76 of 103

Class XII
Maths
(ii) P (only 3 cards are spades) = P(X = 3)
(iii) P (none is a spade) = P(X = 0)
Question 5: The probability that a bulb produced by a factory will fuse after 150 days of use is 0.05. What is the probability that out of 5 such bulbs (i) none (ii) not more than one (iii) more than one (iv) at least one will fuse after 150 days of use. Answer Let X represent the number of bulbs that will fuse after 150 days of use in an experiment of 5 trials. The trials are Bernoulli trials. It is given that, p = 0.05
Page 77 of 103
Class XII
Maths
X has a binomial distribution with n = 5 and p = 0.05
(i) P (none) = P(X = 0)
(ii) P (not more than one) = P(X 1)
(iii) P (more than 1) = P(X > 1)
(iv) P (at least one) = P(X 1)
Page 78 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 6: A bag consists of 10 balls each marked with one of the digits 0 to 9. If four balls are drawn successively with replacement from the bag, what is the probability that none is marked with the digit 0? Answer Let X denote the number of balls marked with the digit 0 among the 4 balls drawn. Since the balls are drawn with replacement, the trials are Bernoulli trials.
X has a binomial distribution with n = 4 and
P (none marked with 0) = P (X = 0)
Question 7: In an examination, 20 questions of true-false type are asked. Suppose a student tosses a fair coin to determine his answer to each question. If the coin falls heads, he answers true; if it falls tails, he answers false. Find the probability that he answers at least 12 questions correctly. Answer Let X represent the number of correctly answered questions out of 20 questions.
Page 79 of 103
Class XII
Maths
The repeated tosses of a coin are Bernoulli trails. Since head on a coin represents the true answer and tail represents the false answer, the correctly answered questions are Bernoulli trials.
p=
X has a binomial distribution with n = 20 and p =
P (at least 12 questions answered correctly) = P(X 12)
Question 8:
Suppose X has a binomial distribution outcome.
. Show that X = 3 is the most likely
(Hint: P(X = 3) is the maximum among all P (xi), xi = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) Answer
Page 80 of 103
Class XII
Maths
X is the random variable whose binomial distribution is
Therefore, n = 6 and
It can be seen that P(X = x) will be maximum, if
will be maximum.
The value of
is maximum. Therefore, for x = 3, P(X = x) is maximum.
Thus, X = 3 is the most likely outcome.
Question 9: On a multiple choice examination with three possible answers for each of the five questions, what is the probability that a candidate would get four or more correct answers just by guessing? Answer The repeated guessing of correct answers from multiple choice questions are Bernoulli trials. Let X represent the number of correct answers by guessing in the set of 5 multiple choice questions.
Page 81 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Probability of getting a correct answer is, p
Clearly, X has a binomial distribution with n = 5 and p
P (guessing more than 4 correct answers) = P(X 4)
Question 10: A person buys a lottery ticket in 50 lotteries, in each of which his chance of winning a
prize is
. What is the probability that he will in a prize (a) at least once (b) exactly
once (c) at least twice? Answer Let X represent the number of winning prizes in 50 lotteries. The trials are Bernoulli trials.
Clearly, X has a binomial distribution with n = 50 and
Page 82 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(a) P (winning at least once) = P (X 1)
(b) P (winning exactly once) = P(X = 1)
(c) P (at least twice) = P(X 2)
Page 83 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 11: Find the probability of getting 5 exactly twice in 7 throws of a die. Answer The repeated tossing of a die are Bernoulli trials. Let X represent the number of times of getting 5 in 7 throws of the die.
Probability of getting 5 in a single throw of the die, p
Clearly, X has the probability distribution with n = 7 and p
P (getting 5 exactly twice) = P(X = 2)
Page 84 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 12: Find the probability of throwing at most 2 sixes in 6 throws of a single die. Answer The repeated tossing of the die are Bernoulli trials. Let X represent the number of times of getting sixes in 6 throws of the die.
Probability of getting six in a single throw of die, p
Clearly, X has a binomial distribution with n = 6
P (at most 2 sixes) = P(X 2)
Page 85 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 13: It is known that 10% of certain articles manufactured are defective. What is the probability that in a random sample of 12 such articles, 9 are defective? Answer The repeated selections of articles in a random sample space are Bernoulli trails. Let X denote the number of times of selecting defective articles in a random sample space of 12 articles.
Clearly, X has a binomial distribution with n = 12 and p = 10% =
Page 86 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (selecting 9 defective articles) =
Question 14: In a box containing 100 bulbs, 10 are defective. The probability that out of a sample of 5 bulbs, none is defective is (A) 101
(B)
(C)
(D) Answer The repeated selections of defective bulbs from a box are Bernoulli trials. Let X denote the number of defective bulbs out of a sample of 5 bulbs.
Probability of getting a defective bulb, p
P (none of the bulbs is defective) = P(X = 0)
Page 87 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 15:
The probability that a student is not a swimmer is students, four are swimmers is
. Then the probability that out of five
(A)
(B)
(C) Answer
(D) None of these
The repeated selection of students who are swimmers are Bernoulli trials. Let X denote the number of students, out of 5 students, who are swimmers.
Probability of students who are not swimmers, q
P (four students are swimmers) = P(X = 4) Therefore, the correct answer is A.
Page 88 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 1: A and B are two events such that P (A) 0. Find P (B|A), if (i) A is a subset of B (ii) A B = Answer It is given that, P (A) 0 (i) A is a subset of B.
(ii)
Question 2: A couple has two children, (i) Find the probability that both children are males, if it is known that at least one of the children is male. (ii) Find the probability that both children are females, if it is known that the elder child is a female. Answer If a couple has two children, then the sample space is S = {(b, b), (b, g), (g, b), (g, g)} (i) Let E and F respectively denote the events that both children are males and at least one of the children is a male.
Page 89 of 103
Class XII
Maths
(ii) Let A and B respectively denote the events that both children are females and the elder child is a female.
Question 3: Suppose that 5% of men and 0.25% of women have grey hair. A haired person is selected at random. What is the probability of this person being male? Assume that there are equal number of males and females. Answer It is given that 5% of men and 0.25% of women have grey hair. Therefore, percentage of people with grey hair = (5 + 0.25) % = 5.25%
Probability that the selected haired person is a male
Page 90 of 103
Maths
Suppose that 90% of people are right-handed. What is the probability that at most 6 of a random sample of 10 people are right-handed? Answer A person can be either right-handed or left-handed. It is given that 90% of the people are right-handed.
Using binomial distribution, the probability that more than 6 people are right-handed is given by,
Therefore, the probability that at most 6 people are right-handed = 1 P (more than 6 are right-handed)
Question 5: An urn contains 25 balls of which 10 balls bear a mark X and the remaining 15 bear a mark Y. A ball is drawn at random from the urn, its mark is noted down and it is replaced. If 6 balls are drawn in this way, find the probability that (i) all will bear X mark. (ii) not more than 2 will bear Y mark. (iii) at least one ball will bear Y mark (iv) the number of balls with X mark and Y mark will be equal. Answer Total number of balls in the urn = 25 Balls bearing mark X = 10 Balls bearing mark Y = 15
Page 91 of 103
Class XII
Maths
p = P (ball bearing mark X) =
q = P (ball bearing mark Y) = Six balls are drawn with replacement. Therefore, the number of trials are Bernoulli trials. Let Z be the random variable that represents the number of balls with Y mark on them in the trials.
Clearly, Z has a binomial distribution with n = 6 and p = P (Z = z) =
(i) P (all will bear X mark) = P (Z = 0) = (ii) P (not more than 2 bear Y mark) = P (Z 2) = P (Z = 0) + P (Z = 1) + P (Z = 2)
(iii) P (at least one ball bears Y mark) = P (Z 1) = 1 P (Z = 0)
(iv) P (equal number of balls with X mark and Y mark) = P (Z = 3)
Page 92 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 6: In a hurdle race, a player has to cross 10 hurdles. The probability that he will clear each
hurdle is Answer
. What is the probability that he will knock down fewer than 2 hurdles?
Let p and q respectively be the probabilities that the player will clear and knock down the hurdle.
Let X be the random variable that represents the number of times the player will knock down the hurdle. Therefore, by binomial distribution, we obtain P (X = x) = P (player knocking down less than 2 hurdles) = P (X < 2) = P (X = 0) + P (X = 1) =
Page 93 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Question 7: A die is thrown again and again until three sixes are obtained. Find the probability of obtaining the third six in the sixth throw of the die. Answer
The probability of getting a six in a throw of die is
and not getting a six is
Let The probability that the 2 sixes come in the first five throws of the die is
Probability that third six comes in the sixth throw =
Page 94 of 103
Maths
If a leap year is selected at random, what is the chance that it will contain 53 Tuesdays? Answer In a leap year, there are 366 days i.e., 52 weeks and 2 days. In 52 weeks, there are 52 Tuesdays. Therefore, the probability that the leap year will contain 53 Tuesdays is equal to the probability that the remaining 2 days will be Tuesdays. The remaining 2 days can be Monday and Tuesday Tuesday and Wednesday Wednesday and Thursday Thursday and Friday Friday and Saturday Saturday and Sunday Sunday and Monday Total number of cases = 7 Favourable cases = 2
Probability that a leap year will have 53 Tuesdays =
Question 9: An experiment succeeds twice as often as it fails. Find the probability that in the next six trials, there will be at least 4 successes. Answer The probability of success is twice the probability of failure. Let the probability of failure be x. Probability of success = 2x
Page 95 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Let p =
and q =
Let X be the random variable that represents the number of successes in six trials. By binomial distribution, we obtain P (X = x) = Probability of at least 4 successes = P (X 4) = P (X = 4) + P (X = 5) + P (X = 6)
Question 10: How many times must a man toss a fair coin so that the probability of having at least one head is more than 90%? Answer Let the man toss the coin n times. The n tosses are n Bernoulli trials.
Probability (p) of getting a head at the toss of a coin is
p=
q=
It is given that,
Page 96 of 103
Class XII
Maths
P (getting at least one head) > P (x 1) > 0.9 1 P (x = 0) > 0.9
The minimum value of n that satisfies the given inequality is 4. Thus, the man should toss the coin 4 or more than 4 times.
Question 11: In a game, a man wins a rupee for a six and loses a rupee for any other number when a fair die is thrown. The man decided to throw a die thrice but to quit as and when he gets a six. Find the expected value of the amount he wins/loses. Answer
In a throw of a die, the probability of getting a six is
and the probability of not getting
a 6 is
Three cases can occur.
i.
If he gets a six in the first throw, then the required probability is
Amount he will receive = Re 1 ii. If he does not get a six in the first throw and gets a six in the second throw, then
probability = Amount he will receive = Re 1 + Re 1 = 0 Page 97 of 103

Class XII iii.
Maths
If he does not get a six in the first two throws and gets a six in the third throw,
then probability = Amount he will receive = Re 1 Re 1 + Re 1 = 1
Expected value he can win
Question 12: Suppose we have four boxes. A, B, C and D containing coloured marbles as given below: Box Marble colour Red A B C D 1 6 8 0 White 6 2 1 6 Black 3 2 1 4
One of the boxes has been selected at random and a single marble is drawn from it. If the marble is red, what is the probability that it was drawn from box A?, box B?, box C? Answer Let R be the event of drawing the red marble. Let EA, EB, and EC respectively denote the events of selecting the box A, B, and C. Total number of marbles = 40 Number of red marbles = 15
Page 98 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Probability of drawing the red marble from box A is given by P (EA|R).
Probability that the red marble is from box B is P (EB|R).
Probability that the red marble is from box C is P (EC|R).
Question 13: Assume that the chances of the patient having a heart attack are 40%. It is also assumed that a meditation and yoga course reduce the risk of heart attack by 30% and prescription of certain drug reduces its chances by 25%. At a time a patient can choose any one of the two options with equal probabilities. It is given that after going through one of the two options the patient selected at random suffers a heart attack. Find the probability that the patient followed a course of meditation and yoga? Answer Let A, E1, and E2 respectively denote the events that a person has a heart attack, the selected person followed the course of yoga and meditation, and the person adopted the drug prescription.
Page 99 of 103
Class XII
Maths
Probability that the patient suffering a heart attack followed a course of meditation and yoga is given by P (E1|A).
Question 14: If each element of a second order determinant is either zero or one, what is the probability that the value of the determinant is positive? (Assume that the individual entries of the determinant are chosen independently, each value being assumed with
probability Answer
).
The total number of determinants of second order with each element being 0 or 1 is (2)4 = 16
The value of determinant is positive in the following cases.
Required probability =
Question 15: An electronic assembly consists of two subsystems, say, A and B. From previous testing procedures, the following probabilities are assumed to be known: P(A fails) = 0.2 P(B fails alone) = 0.15 P(A and B fail) = 0.15 Evaluate the following probabilities (i) P(A fails| B has failed) (ii) P(A fails alone) Page 100 of 103
Class XII Answer
Maths
Let the event in which A fails and B fails be denoted by EA and EB. P (EA) = 0.2 P (EA EB) = 0.15 P (B fails alone) = P (EB) P (EA EB) 0.15 = P (EB) 0.15 P (EB) = 0.3
(i) (ii) P (A fails alone) = P (EA) P (EA EB) = 0.2 0.15 = 0.05
Question 16: Bag I contains 3 red and 4 black balls and Bag II contains 4 red and 5 black balls. One ball is transferred from Bag I to Bag II and then a ball is drawn from Bag II. The ball so drawn is found to be red in colour. Find the probability that the transferred ball is black. Answer Let E1 and E2 respectively denote the events that a red ball is transferred from bag I to II and a black ball is transferred from bag I to II.
Let A be the event that the ball drawn is red. When a red ball is transferred from bag I to II,
When a black ball is transferred from bag I to II,
Page 101 of 103

Class XII
Maths
Question 17: If A and B are two events such that P (A) 0 and P(B|A) = 1, then. (A) A B (B) B A (C) B = (D) A = Answer P (A) 0 and
Thus, the correct answer is A.
Question 18: If P (A|B) > P (A), then which of the following is correct: (A) P (B|A) < P (B) (B) P (A B) < P (A).P (B) (C) P (B|A) > P (B) (D) P (B|A) = P (B) Answer
Page 102 of 103

Class XII
Maths
Question 19: If A and B are any two events such that P (A) + P (B) P (A and B) = P (A), then (A) P (B|A) = 1 (B) P (A|B) = 1 (C) P (B|A) = 0 (D) P (A|B) = 0 Answer
Page 103 of 103


12 Math

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

12 Math

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Class XII

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions Exercise 1.1

Class XII (1, 6) R. R is not symmetric.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII (x, z) R R is transitive.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII R is not reflexive. Now, let (x, y) R.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII (3, 1.5) R R is not transitive.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Hence, R is neither reflexive, nor symmetric, nor transitive.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII Question 6:

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

It is clear that for any element a A, we have R is reflexive. Let (a, b) R.

R is symmetric. Now, let (a, b) R and (b, c) R.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

(b, a) R R is symmetric. Now, let (a, b), (b, c) R.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII Now, Let (T1, T2), (T2, T3) R.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII R is transitive.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII Question 15:

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions Exercise 1.2

Show that the function f: R* R* defined by

is one-one and onto, where R* is

It is given that f: R* R* is defined by One-one:

It is clear that for y R*, there exists

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Hence, function g is one-one but not onto.

Class XII f is not surjective.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Class XII Question 4:

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

, is neither one-one nor

is always non-negative. Thus, there does not exist any = 1.

element x in domain R such that f(x) = f is not onto.

Hence, the modulus function is neither one-one nor onto.

Question 5: Show that the Signum Function f: R R, given by

is neither one-one nor onto. Answer f: R R is given by,

It is seen that f(1) = f(2) = 1, but 1 2. f is not one-one. Page 21 of 68

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

For any real number (y) in R, there exists

Class XII Hence, f is bijective. (ii) f: R R is defined as .

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

does not imply that

Class XII f is onto. Hence, f is bijective.

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

f: N N is defined as It can be observed that:

. Case II: n is even

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

. Is f one-one and onto? Justify your answer. Answer A = R {3}, B = R {1}

Thus, for any y B, there exists

Chapter 1 Relations and Functions

Hence, function f is one-one and onto.

does not imply that